Home

Reference Guide

1. Follow the instructions in the dialog Type your validation code and then click Register A successful registration completes the registration and activation process If you selected have my validation code in step 2 the nsert Registration Code dialog box appears Please enter your code HGSCGESPF Type your validation code and then click OK A successful registration completes the registration and activation process 41 Installation configuration activation and registration Release 16 0 y o t Upgrades I ntroduction An upgrade code enables you to run the advanced features of a higher level product either Design or Perform using the same dongle that you already own Contact your local WYSIWYG dealer to purchase an upgrade You will be given an upgrade code at the time of purchase To upgrade the level of your WYSI WYG product 1 Start WYSIWYG 2 From the Help menu choose Upgrade Upgrade x How to Upgrade your WYSIWYG software lf ynu have already purchased an upgrade and have an Upgrade Code enter the code in the Upgrade Code field below Werlfy that you have entered the correct information Click an the Upgrade button You will need to exit WYSIWYG and restart the software for the upgrade to become Current Level TEME Perform 500 Serial Code BWEFST 3F Upgrade Code Esample CEAY CFGs SGRQ 7FJ KPPP Cancel More Info The current level of WYSIWYG inst
2. Paste Basepoint Draw from start Interactive object creation Draw from center lw Automatically group truss lw Prompt to put deleted fiztures in flight case IY Show fisture notes when inserting Missing Co ordinate Use only one missing coordinate Focus after hang Focus towards origin I Automatically adjust with command line CAD joo Focus joo E Paste Base point Select this check box to enter a base point before an object is copied or cut This will be the object s reference point for paste commands Click to clear this check box to allow the base point to be the insertion point of the object m Interactive object creation Select this check box to allow yourself to draw objects using the mouse instead of entering values in dialog boxes m Automatically group truss Select this check box to group truss objects together in a similar manner to choosing Group from the Edit menu This option is helpful in that it treats the truss as a single unit and allows you to perform actions more effectively on multiple objects If you want to edit one truss object you must first use the Ungroup command on the Edit menu to remove the grouping from the truss objects m Prompt to put deleted fixtures in flight case Select this check box to be prompted when you delete a fixture You will be prompted to delete it completely or send it to the Flight Case If you choose to send it to the Flight Case the f
3. LLU Facet resolution S ns Cylinder Sphere Segments 15 Segments fe Caneel m AutoUnit Select this check box to automatically assign a unit number to each fixture that is hung This option is available for pipes only It does not apply to truss m Snap Select this check box to enable pipe snap Pipe snap places fixtures on a pipe at a specific interval as specified in the nterval box For information on snaps refer to Pipe snap on page 181 m Enforce Spacing Select this check box to indicate that the spacing you specify in the Minimum Spacing box is enforced m Minimum Spacing Type the minimum spacing between fixtures This option prevents you from hanging the fixtures too close to one another The minimum spacing cannot be greater than the value you specify in the nterval box m Interval Type the distance between fixtures This option is used for pipe snaps m Line up symbols Select this check box to line up fixture symbols at specific angles and then select an increment from the drop down list Symbols will shift from their focused position to the nearest increment of the chosen angle For example symbols will be drawn in one of four directions when the increment is set to 90 degrees This setting does not affect the focus of the beam rather it is intended for the cleanliness of the printed plot u Weight Type the default weight of a line when it is printed or viewed using print prev
4. m Change Symbol Click to select a different symbol m Hatch Style The style to use for the hatch If the Hatch style is Mone the symbol is transparent If it is Background the symbol is filled with the color of the background and is not transparent wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode m Fill Color The color with which you want the symbol to be filled If the hatch style is None or Background the fill color is not enabled WYSIWYG Reference Guide 201 CAD mode b o t Release 16 0 Color gobos and accessories 202 Introduction You can add to fixtures accessories such as barndoors tophats color scrollers dousers and so on Accessories have their own section in the Library Browser and can be inserted just like other objects You must insert accessories onto existing fixtures and can only insert them onto compatible fixtures Mountable yokes Note the following before working with mountable yokes While mountable yokes are considered accessories they differ from other accessories in that you need to add them before you add the fixtures you cannot insert a fixture and then select Add Accessory to add a mountable yoke You cannot use the Add Accessory option to add a fixture on a recently inserted mountable yoke Instead you must add the fixture either by using a shortcut or by selecting it from the library browser Then you can use the Add Accessory option to add an accessory to the fixture Once yo
5. Beneath the work area in each mode is a series of layout tabs These layouts provide various configurations of the views you are working with To change layouts click the tab that corresponds to the layout you wish to use The CAD mode contains the following layouts m Wireframe The work area displays a full screen wireframe view m Quad The work area is divided into quadrants three of which can be modified to show plan front side or isometric wireframe views The lower right quadrant contains a shaded view m Flight Case The Flight Case is displayed in a section of the work area along with a wireframe view m Shaded The work area displays a full screen shaded view WYSIWYG Reference Guide 101 CAD mode Release 16 0 y The CAD environment Scales When drawing in WYSIWYG you are drawing in real scale 1 1 When you create a drawing in CAD you are generating a virtual representation of your real set up If you were to do this on paper by hand you would need to draw a scaled down version of your space However since there are no paper size limitations in CAD mode you can draw your venue sets pipes trusses and lighting fixtures in real scale Scaling down for printing purposes is done during print set up and in the Presentation mode when creating plots These settings allow you to print your drawings in whatever scales are necessary without having to redraw anything Coordinate system and origin When
6. Select the value that you want to filter You can also type in a value and choose whether you want to filter that specific text or filter for entries that contain that text Result The spreadsheet refreshes displaying only fixtures that meet the filter criteria To remove data filters Right click on a column heading Choose Remove Data Filter Result The spreadsheet returns to its unfiltered state Customizing spreadsheets There are different ways to sort and view your data First consider the different spreadsheets available on the Co umns shortcut bar Alternatively you can modify a spreadsheet to suit your needs Customizing a view allows you to change how the data is displayed and sorted wysiwyg March 2006 Data mode To modify a data sheet 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the Options menu choose View Options You can also click the View Options tool on the Standard toolbar Bl Click the Data View Options tab View Options x General Data View Options Columns Detail Level Show Fietures C Ghan Accessorie i Show Circuits Channel lw Show Selection Always lw Enable Heading Click Sort T Show Only Selected I Word Wrap M Show Gridlines lw Show Edit Bar Filter Filter column None Test fis EMPT L_ f Fontane tert Bract match Kepa Channel Spot Unit Ascend i Ascend Ascend De
7. 10 O 70 0 127 CAD mode Release 16 0 Drawing lines Lines are 2D objects Lines are drawn continuously allowing you to create shapes made up of multiple vertices Lines come in four styles a Solid m Center m Hidden a Dot Line styles determine how line objects appear on your plot and can be modified at any time They look similar to the following Solid Center ee eee Hidden 9 You can make a multi vertex line appear as a spline or french curve by selecting the option in the properties box You can then drag the markers around to adjust the curves Alternatively you can choose to draw a spline directly Splines have the same line style options as regular lines Lines can be extruded into surfaces For more on extruding lines refer to Extrude on page 167 To draw a line 1 From the Draw menu choose Line 2 From the sub menu select Solid Dot Center Dashed or Spline Tip You can also use the appropriate line tool on the Draw toolbar The available line tools are as follows Solid u n Dot B E X Center ate Dashed a a Spline Click on the drawing at the starting point of the line Drag the next vertex to its end point and click Continue to place vertices of the line as needed O o A O To end the line at its last end point right click and choose Finish Line To abort the line entirely choose Abort Line This erases the whole
8. Layer Cyc Fixtures ERS Fixtures Follow Spots Fistures Fresnel Istures Te 3 lw Use Layer Line Thickness jom le lw Use Layer Colour Pars Pipes L gt Pipes Scenic Venue Cancel Apply For a detailed description of the options available on this dialog box refer to the General tab on page 280 Object specific properties Similar to objects in CAD mode objects that are drawn in a New Plots view have properties that are specific to that object u Text label For a description of text label properties refer to the Text label tab on page 152 a Symbol For a description of symbol properties refer to Symbol properties on page 200 m Line Options on the L ne tab affect how the line is drawn WYSIWYG Reference Guide 291 Presentation mode 292 Release 16 0 Properties FR New Plot Object Line Line Pattern Solid Center Dashed Dot Scale 3 3 5 16 Arrows Located at Start l End Araw sieer Hel Fel Double Line T Double Line Distance B 11 15 m Line Pattern Choose a pattern for the selected line Refer to Drawing lines on page 128 for an illustration of each type u Scale Type a value in this box to change the length and spacing of dots and dashes for the selected line This value is applicable to center dashed or dotted lines only m Arrows Select where you would lik
9. You can add the correct frame size to a fixture using Add Accessory wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode To create a new shortcut to an accessory Refer to To create a new shortcut on page 54 Placing color and gobos You can drop color and gobos onto fixtures by using the Library Browser or the Ouick Tools method Colors and gobos from many manufacturers are included in the library You can preview the color or gobo by double clicking on the name Note For more information on Ouick Tools see Ouick tools on page 191 To insert colors and gobos using the Library Browser A Oo N Open the Library Browser Click the Color or Gobo section tool Find the color or gobo that you want to insert Right click the color gobo name and then click Insert Result The cursor shows a Q the symbol denoting that Quick Tools have been enabled Click on the fixtures to which you want to add the color or gobo Right click and then select Finish Quick Tools to finish placing the color or gobo To insert colors and gobos using the Quick Tools 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Click Tools gt Quick Tools Result The Quick Fixture Tool appears Under the Accessories heading at the bottom of the window click the ellipsis button beside the feature that you want to add either color or gobo and then choose the color or gobo in the resulting window Click OK Result The cursor shows a Q the symbol den
10. Tape Printer Options US6 Senal Gonverber Device With cutter Y Fort LLM r Baud 600 Flow control Hardware g Use converter Delay Butter 0 Region profile for new documents North America T Look for network dongle T Show wr SWYG configuration wizard in startup OpenGL From the Options menu choose Application Options Result The Application Options dialog box is displayed 2 x ETC Interface Toolbars Cancel General tab Options on the General tab affect the pipe tape printer the numeric separators used in WYSIWYG and the properties for the startup wizard WYSIWYG Reference Guide Device Specify whether or not the pipe tape printer has a tape cutter Port Specify which port on your computer the pipe tape printer is connected to Baud Specify the baud rate at which the pipe tape printer is running The baud rate is the rate at which your modem can transmit and receive data Flow Control Select the method of data control between the pipe tape printer and the machine Available options are Hardware Software and None The default is Hardware 83 84 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 16 0 Use converter Select this check box to indicate that a USB Serial converter is to be used Delay Buffer Type the buffer size for the USB Serial converter Decimal Select the method for separating whole numbers from decimals Available options are c
11. CAD mode 200 Release 16 0 k Increase or decrease the size of the shape as desired 8 Set the position of the label by clicking and dragging on the label in the preview window To drag a label you must click on the small square that appears in the middle of it when you select it Note The preview window shows the fixture symbol and layout in two orientations for your reference This is to give you a visual for the fixture in its unfocused and focused positions 9 Repeat the procedure for all attributes Tip The copy and paste buttons allow you to apply the same label layout to other fixture types I nserting symbols You can also insert symbols that are not associated with fixtures This allows you to represent the fixtures when you draw a key or want to show the position of a boom in a plan view Symbols are not fixtures and therefore are not counted in reports Standard symbols such as the United States Institute for Theatre Technology USITT symbols are available from the library for your use To insert symbols Refer to The Library Browser on page 119 For information on inserting objects from the library see To insert objects from the library on page 120 Symbol properties Options on the Symbol tab affect the fill color and hatch style of a symbol Prnperties W y Bu 2 x General Appearance Light Emission Symbol Mini Whisper Fill Golour Hatch Style Background
12. Chapter 10 Live mode WYSIWYG Reference Guide Live mode is used for graphically simulating the output of a lighting control console or compatible offline editor Live mode also has rendering ability enabling you to create photo realistic pictures of the simulated lighting looks Unlike Design mode Live mode displays transitions from cue to cue allowing you to see the programmed movement of light over time If you have configured a patched video source then you can use Live mode to control the progress of your video with the console device Live mode is available only in WYSIWYG Perform In this chapter Layout tabs 313 Connecting to consoles 314 AutoPatch 321 Visualization 323 Autofocus 326 Rendering 329 311 Live mode Release 16 0 March 2006 Live mode y ae Layout tabs Introduction Beneath the work area in each mode is a series of layout tabs These tabs provide various configurations of the views that you are working with To change layouts click the appropriate tab Live mode contains the following layout tabs m Wireframe The work area displays a full screen wireframe view E Quad The work area is divided into quadrants three of which can be modified to show plan front or side views The lower right quadrant contains a shaded view u Shaded The work area displays a full screen shaded view Note The wireframe views in Live mode are used for fixture selection only To make any drawi
13. Number of copies l Pages from i to 35 f Selection mud mud I Collate Cancel 2 From the Name drop down list choose the printer or plotter that you want to use WYSIWYG records the name that you choose for future reference and thereafter displays it as the default printer for layouts To print all pages of a layout select A To print select pages of a layout click Pages and then enter the range in the from and to boxes 5 If you want to print multiple copies of the pages select the value from the Number of copies list box 6 Click OK wysiwyg March 2006 y o t Images Presentation mode Introduction Images such as renderings and logos are stored in the mages tab of Presentation mode Renderings are automatically saved here when you select internal in the Output Properties Step 2 of the Render Wizard Any other image files bitmap or jpeg format may be imported To import a bitmap or a jpeg A N Right click on the mages shortcut tab and then choose New Image Type the name of your image Click OK Click on the shortcut for your new image The text No Image Available appears in the working area of the screen From the File menu choose Import Use the browser to find the image file that you want to import Click Open To export a bitmap or a jpeg 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Select the image that you want to export From the File menu choos
14. Tile Printing lw Show page guides Show page number Tile Options Top Lef Centre Split Centre Presentation tab Options on the Presentation tab affect the appearance and printout of the layout WYSIWYG Reference Guide Name The name of the layout Background Color Sets the background color of the layout view This does not affect your printed copy Grid On Select this check box if you want gridlines to appear on the layout Gridlines are for reference only they assist with the design of items on the page Gridlines do not appear in the printed output Color Sets the color of the gridlines Show placeholders only Select this check box to display only the placeholders for the various items in the layout If unchecked both the placeholders and contents of the items in the layout are displayed This is to facilitate the layout setup and does not affect the printout Snap Select this check box to snap the items in the layout to the gridlines Interval Specify the interval between the points on the grid Units The units of measurement for the layout The coordinates at the bottom of the layout change according to the selection This does not affect the printed output Paper Size Choose the desired paper size from the drop down menu If you do not find the size you want choose Custom and then specify the width and height as desired Landscape Select this check box if you want the page to be se
15. To draw a linear movement axis 1 In Wireframe view select the view in which you want to draw the axis plan front back side or isometric Click Draw gt Axis gt Linear Axis In the window that appears type a name for the axis and then click OK In your drawing click in the position where you want to start the axis and then move your cursor to the next point of the axis and click To create an axis with multiple segments continue clicking at each point vertex of the axis When you are finished creating the axis right click and choose Finish Axis To draw a rotation movement axis Note Unlike linear axes rotation axes cannot have multiple vertices Instead when you draw one of these axes the object rotates around the center point 1 2 3 WYSIWYG Reference Guide In Wireframe view select the view in which you want to draw the axis plan front back side or isometric Click Draw gt Axis gt Rotation Axis In the window that appears type a name for the axis and then click OK 137 CAD mode 138 Release 16 0 4 In your drawing click in the position where you want the axis to appear Note The circle that appears when you draw a rotation axis is only a visual cue to show you the direction in which the object rotates it does not affect the size of path on which the object rotates The circle is given a default size but you can change it to suit your needs To attach a movement axis to
16. To clear the patch 1 Connect to the console as described in To connect to a console on page 314 2 From the Live menu choose AutoPatch Result The AutoPatch dialog opens WYSIWYG Reference Guide 321 Live mode Release 16 0 3 Click C ear Patch Result WYSIWYG prompts each AutoPatch capable device to clear the patch for each port that is bound to a WYSIWYG patch universe 4 Click Close vee wysiwyg March 2006 Live mode b o t Visualization I ntroduction There is a limitation on the number of DMX channels that can be simulated in Live mode This limitation is based on the level of WYSIWYG Perform that you have installed on your computer WYSIWYG Perform is available in 500 1000 2000 5000 and Unlimited channel variants With each of these variants the following channels of simulation are available E WYSIWYG Perform 500 512 channels 7 WYSIWYG Perform 1000 1024 channels E WYSIWYG Perform 2000 2048 channels E WYSIWYG Perform 5000 5120 channels m WYSIWYG Perform Unlimited 51 200 channels In Live mode WYSIWYG will not simulate the DMX values being received on channels that exceed the Perform channel count of your system The unused channels display on the status bar tracks the remaining channels for simulation based on the level of your Perform system Note Fixtures on layers that are not visible or not included in the current scene are not counted Unused channels O O F 0 0 0 Unused
17. Use Custom Transparency Os Md meaning opaque Select All Select None Select an element from the ement list wysiwyg gt March 2006 Layers CAD mode If a material was chosen previously it is listed in the Material box To choose a different material or to choose a material for the first time click the ellipsis button and then navigate to the new material Note Click Defau t to remove your selection and apply the default material to the element Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each element to which you want to apply materials When finished click OK Layers are drawing aids intended to help you organize your plot They are like transparent acetate sheets upon which you can draw In the same way that you can view several transparent sheets at once by placing them on top of each other you can hide and unhide layers by choosing which sheets are in the stack The top sheet is the layer that new objects are placed on and is called the current layer Creating layers To create new layers 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the Edit menu choose Layers Result The Layer Database dialog box is displayed Layer Databaze E E Layer Hame Colour Wisible Editable J isila Fixtures Cyc ES y v l Fixtures Follow S D ww v Fixtures Fresnels _ v wv Colour Select Fixtures Macs C ww ww Fixtures Pars C v Wi Properties Pipes LX O v wv New Pipes Scenic v
18. 3 Clear the Use User Defaults check box to modify the default setting for Precision View Options E x General Draw Options Flot type Show Details W SnanTn M Grid Centre Snapbox Size In Points Perpendicular Midpoints D Tangent T Endpoints Assembly T Pipe Focus Fan 45 Tint ig Grid k mr lw Enable Grip Dragging nterva lw Cross Hairs On Angle lo Background Colour L Origin O n O n a n Units Metric Imperial Precision Whole Fraction Use User Defaults Get User Defaults Cancel 4 Based on your choice for measurement units you can choose to display the drawing resolution in whole numbers fractions centimeters or millimeters a Whole Only visible if you choose Imperial units Indicates that the measurements are rounded and displayed to the nearest whole number a Fraction Indicates that the measurements are displayed to the nearest sixteenths of an inch a d m Only visible if you choose Metric units Indicates that the measurements are displayed in centimeters a mm Indicates that the measurements are displayed in millimeters 5 Click OK Metric vs I mperial WYSIWYG enables you to use metric or imperial units at any time You may choose to set a default type of unit and you may choose to switch unit type on the fly You can also indicate whether you want these units measured in whole numbers fractions to the sixteenth of a inch centimete
19. Click the slider to advance the object to the position where you want it to start on the selected axis Ensure that the Fade looks button is enabled so the look fades instead of jumping directly to the next look Tip If the button is not enabled then you can jump from one look to the next by clicking the look shortcuts in the shortcut bar Even if the button is enabled you can always jump to the next look by right clicking the look shortcut and selecting Jump to To watch the fade from the first look to the second look click the shortcut for the second look The object moves from the starting point of the first look to the starting point of the second look over the period of time that you specified as the fade time for the second look Tips nu For a more realistic view of the fading between looks click the Shaded tab m To jump directly to a specific look right click the look and then select Jump to For details on controlling the object s movement with a console device such as the Mini Console see To control a DMX patched movement axis with a console on page 317 249 Design mode Release 16 0 y ab Rendering I ntroduction In WYSIWYG you can render lighting looks to produce high quality images of your set and lighting Rendering uses a full range of effects including depth of field motion blur soft shadows and antialiasing settings to produce a photorealistic image An easy to use Ren
20. In the Rotation Angle box type the angle by which you want to rotate the hang structure 5 Click OK Result The hang structure is rotated on the plot As an example you may have three booms on your plot that you want to rotate After you rotate the hang structures 90 degrees to the right the following is displayed je ee Attribute layout You can easily modify the layout of fixture attributes in a New Plots view by simply moving rotating or otherwise manipulating the appearance of the attribute In a New Plots view you can only manipulate the layout you cannot modify the data contained within the attribute To modify the data you will need to go to CAD or Data mode and make the modifications Fixture attribute values that are changed in CAD or Data mode are reflected in all New Plots views WYSIWYG Reference Guide 275 Presentation mode 2 6 Release 16 0 The attributes that are displayed in a New Plots view are determined by the options you set on the Fixture Details tab For more information refer to Fixture Details tab on page 272 To manipulate the attribute layout for an individual symbol 1 Select the attribute whose layout you want to manipulate 2 Drag the attribute to the desired location on the page and then release the mouse button Note This action breaks the attribute link As an example you may wish to move the channel attribute the red 2 shown on the plot below Mot
21. Similarly HogPC can only listen to MIDI data streams that are fed into the computer through the MIDI device assigned by the same Control Panel To establish a connection between WYSIWYG and HogPC you must set up a third party method One solution would be to use an external physical device that can loop the MIDI signal through it That is the device would take the signal coming from the computer on one port and feed it back into the computer on another port A second solution would be to use a software driver that emulates the MIDI signal s looping the MIDI drivers that come with Windows do not support this feature This driver is called MIDI YOKE MIDI YOKE is a MIDI patch cable driver that enables you to establish a connection between applications that output MIDI data streams and those that receive MIDI data streams without the need for an external MIDI device To obtain additional information on MIDI YOKE refer to http www midiox com myoke htm MI DI OX is the application used to configure the MIDI YOKE port mappings assignments It is also used to monitor MIDI data that passes through the MIDI YOKE driver In the case of WYSIWYG this is the MIDI data coming from WYSIWYG into the MIDI YOKE driver and out to the HogPC To obtain additional information on MIDI OX refer to http www midiox com Installing and configuring the additional software MIDI YOKE To install MIDI YOKE 1 Based on your operating syste
22. Tent Floor Tent Poles Use Layer Rendering Color Tent Roof Back Tent Foof Front Use Custom Color Right Side IL B emman Tent fall Front Tent fall Left Side Tent Wall Right Side Texture Position Texture Tile Dimensions Texture Rotation i Tile width 33791 DOD Degrees Stretch Height 22576 Material Defaut E Default Transparency i Use Material Transparency 0 Transparency iz specified as a percentage with 0 Use Custom Transparency Ons r meaning opaque Select All Select None ceu __ 3 From the Elements list box choose the elements to which you want to apply the material To choose a custom material for the selected elements such as metal paper plastic or fabric click the ellipsis button beside the Material box WYSIWYG Reference Guide 155 CAD mode 156 Release 16 0 In the resulting dialog navigate to and highlight the desired material and then click OK Click Apply If desired you can apply a transparency level to the selected element Based on the settings that you have chosen for color texture and material the transparency options vary as follows a Use Material Transparency All materials in WYSIWYG specify a level of transparency that varies from one material to the next For example glass is more transparent than brick The transparency level of the selected material appears beside this option button with 0 being complete
23. The counts of symbol types that were already in the legend are updated unless you opted to use a custom count To rename delete or clone the shortcut follow the steps defined in Working with shortcuts on page 54 wysiwyg March 2006 Presentation mode I nserting a legend onto the layout Once the legend has been created using the Legend Wizard you can place it onto the layout To insert a legend onto a layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Legend Tip You can also click the Legend tool in the Layout Pres nsert toolbar 2 Click and drag a window placeholder on the page where you want the item to appear Result The Se ect Legend to be referenced dialog box is displayed Select Legend to be referenced Cancel symbal 3 Select the legend that you want to add to the page and then click OK Result The legend is added to the page at the position where you inserted the placeholder Modifying the properties of a legend To modify the properties of a legend 1 On the layout select the legend that you want to modify 2 From the Edit menu choose Item Properties Tip You can also click the tem Properties tool on the Layout Pres Edit toolbar P Result The Properties dialog box is displayed Properties x General Legend Outline Weight E Colour BEEN Fill None Fill Colour L__ The General tab is similar for all items For more information on this tab see To modi
24. The cursor changes to an arrow Note If you see a grey dotted box beside your mouse cursor the object will be moved instead of reshaped Move your cursor so that only the arrow appears Left click to grip one of the markers While holding down the left mouse button click and drag the object until it reaches the desired shape Release the mouse button to set the shape Tip As you move the mouse the current coordinates appear at the bottom of the screen WYSIWYG Reference Guide 145 CAD mode Release 16 0 Object properties All objects in WYSIWYG have properties Properties are the characteristics or attributes that shape and define an object Modifying object properties is a form of editing and is the only way to make changes to objects once they have been drawn some exceptions exist To edit object properties 1 Select the objects that you want to edit 2 Right click on the object and then select Properties Tip At any time to access an object s properties you can click on the Properties tool on the Fait toolbar P Result The Properties dialog is displayed Note All objects have general properties that affect the color and layer on which they are drawn Objects also have properties that are particular to that type of object For example fixtures have unit numbers but do not have a radius When an object is selected and its properties are displayed a tab appears in the properties dialog box for that ty
25. The name of the group Source The name of the report as defined in the shortcut bar for example nstrument Count The venue defined on the Show Info tab in Show Options For more information on this tab refer to Show information on page 267 The designer defined on the Show Info tab in Show Options For more information on this tab refer to Show information on page 267 The show defined on the Show Info tab in Show Options For more information on this tab refer to Show information on page 267 The assistant defined on the Show Info tab in Show Options For more information on this tab refer to Show information on page 267 The columns defined on the Report tab in View Options For more information on choosing these columns refer to Report tab on page 263 Information that is available in Data mode The Scene defined on the General tab in View Options The Group By parameter chosen on the Report tab in View Options For more information on this option refer to Report tab on page 263 You should include this variable when Group By has been enabled for a report so that the group name is displayed on the report pages 265 Presentation mode Release 16 0 Variable Definition Source File The name of your The name you chose when saving your WYSIWYG file document using either the Save or Save As command from the File menu The name of your WYSIWYG fi
26. This field is not applicable for certain fixtures m Dimmer f applicable select the type of dimmer for this fixture for example choose either Internal or External m Circuits Indicates the type of DMX controls for this fixture for example Control Intensity RIntensity Color and so on m Number of Channels Based on the circuit that you selected above in addition to the options selected this box indicates the number of channels for this fixture E Avallable Channels The names of the channels available for this fixture based on the circuit and options that you selected Photometrics tab Options on the Photometrics tab affect the lamp and lens settings for the fixture azil Lamp VL51K Lens Light Stipple HSF View f Beam vs Field Flood vs Spot Beam Flood vs Spot Field Field f 5 degrees E degrees Insert Multiple 7 Lamp Select the lamp to be used in the fixture m Lens If applicable select the lens setting for the fixture Changing the lens alters the photometric properties of the fixture wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode m View Select the graphical representation that you want to display in the box to the left The choices are as follows m Beam vs Field Displays a graphical representation of the beam and field angles of the fixture Flood vs Spot Beam Displays a graphical representation of the ratio between the flood and spot for the fixture s beam a
27. To apply a texture to a surface 1 Right click the surface to which you want to apply a texture and then choose Properties 2 Click the Appearance tab Properties oOo zjx General Appearance Light Emission Set Piece Elements Color Texture f Use Layer Rendering Color Use Custom Color _ Use Texture from Library m Use Texture from File ie Texture Position Texture Tile Dimensions Texture Rotation f Tile foon Degrees Stretch Material Defaul bn Default Transparency i Use Material Transparency 0 Transparency iz specified as a percentage with 0 Use Custom Transparency Ons r meaning opaque SelectAll Select Mone Cancel 3 Select the texture option that you want The options are a Use Texture from Library Indicates that the selected surface is a texture from the WYSIWYG library The texture name appears in the box provided Click the ellipsis button to modify the selected surface a Use Texture from File The selected surface uses a texture from an external bitmap or jpeg file on your hard drive rather than one from the WYSIWYG library Click the ellipsis button to select the external file to be used as a texture 4 Click 7 e to have the texture repeated over the selected element in a continuous series of sguares or rectangles and then type the size of the frame in which you want the texture to appear in the Width and Height
28. To create a custom gobo See To create a custom gobo on page 122 To create custom color or gobo lists See To create custom color or gobo lists on page 122 ln wysiwyg March 2006 y o t CAD mode Drawing objects I ntroduction In WYSIWYG the Draw menu lists the objects that you can draw Keep the following tips and aids in mind when you are drawing the various objects Drawing tips At any time instead of clicking points with the mouse you can type in the desired coordinates Create shortcuts for library objects Use the missing coordinate Drawing aids Several commands and icons are available to help you when drawing in CAD mode For a complete list of these aids refer to Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys on page 353 Drawing a venue To begin your drawing insert a venue To insert a venue 1 3 4 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the Draw menu choose Venue Result A sub menu will appear prompting you to choose the type of venue to be inserted Select Black Box Arena Proscenium Arch Frame Tent or Circus Tent Result A dialog appears in which you can modify the properties of the room The Proscenium Arch dialog box is shown below New Venue Proscemum Arch E x STAGE width Depth nn Stage We 4 sa n ep Eoo Height a o rust myn Thrust im i mu Depth E width 35 Fly Height Eo a ARCH Width aa Oo Depth o Height 200 AUDITORIUM BOH ime myn H Fati
29. WYSIWYG Reference Guide 355 Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys 396 Default hot keys available in Simulation Views Release 16 0 The following default hot keys are helpful when working in Design and Live modes Start Operations Description At last and focus Focus At full intensity At 50 intensity Intensity off Intensity specify Iris wide Iris tight Iris specify Zoom window Zoom fit Modify view ToolTips on off Mid Operations Description Abort mode Finish mode ToolTips on off Hot Key T 4A g o o WRF T lt lt Z N Hot Key wysiwyg gt March 2006 Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys Default hot keys available in Presentation Views The following default hot keys are helpful when working in Presentation mode Plots Start Operations Description Hot Key Insert line Insert rectangle Insert round rectangle Insert ellipse Insert polygon Insert text Insert bitmap Insert plot view Insert data view Insert report view Insert spreadsheet Open bound view n o KX DBD O U U A OMC ZE Bound view properties Move to front T Move to back K Placeholders only H Print preview W Zoom window Z Zoom fit M Modify view V Mid Operations Description Hot Key Abort mode A Finish mode F WYSIWYG Reference Guide 357 Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys Release 16 0 Default hot keys available in Patch Views The following default hot Keys are helpful when working in Data mode Patch St
30. a Center If enabled pipes are drawn from the center out to both ends at the same time When center mode is used offset values are either positive or negative measured from the center of the pipe Offset Type Offset is a fixture property that measures where a fixture is hung on a pipe The value depends on the pipe mode selected Pipes can also base the Offset on a specified coordinate In this case a fixture s offset value is calculated as the distance on the specified axis from the specified coordinate This is handy if you have many small pipes grouped together to form one hang position for example the Balcony Rail If this is the case choose all the pipes properties to have their Offset based about X 0 Fixtures on the Balcony Rail will then report where they are relative to the theatre rather than the beginning of the pipe This offset methodology can be extended to box booms as well For example a boom in the first box which is 10 above the deck can be drawn as a vertical pipe and have its offset to be based about Z 10 A fixture s offset will then tell you how high from the bottom of the box to hang it In WYSIWYG set the offset mode that you want to use The choices are a Normal which indicates that the offset is based on the pipe mode a X Y and Z which calculates the offset based on the specified coordinate If you have selected an X Y or Z offset type then you must specify a coordinate on the axis from wh
31. nsert toolbar Click and drag a window placeholder on the page where you want the item to appear Result The Select Spreadsheet to be referenced dialog box appears Select Spreadsheet to be referee i FT x Title Black Cancel Select the worksheet that you want to add to the layout and then click OK Result The selected worksheet referenced from Pres mode appears within the placeholder as drawn 299 Presentation mode Release 16 0 To insert New Plot items onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose New Plot 2 Click and drag a window placeholder on the page where you want the item to appear Result The Se ect New Plot to be referenced dialog box appears Select New Plot to be referenced x Cancel Theatre Left Section View 3 Select the New Plot item that you want to add to the layout and then click OK Result The selected New Plot item referenced from Pres mode appears within the placeholder as drawn To adjust the contents that are displayed within the placeholder refer to Adjusting the contents on page 294 for further details Content and Item properties As with all objects in WYSIWYG the objects that you have placed on your page have unique properties There are two types of properties m Content Properties m Item Properties Content Properties Content Properties affect the content of the presentation item When you open these properties y
32. on page 314 3 To change the settings of a patched movement axis highlight the axis in the left pane and then choose from the following settings ID box To change the ID of the movement axis type the new motion control ID m Travel box Type the distance in meters for linear axes in degrees for rotational axes that you want the object to travel along or around the axis This can be the full length angle of the axis or only a portion of it if you do not want the object to travel along around the full path For linear axes If you type wysiwyg gt March 2006 Live mode a value that is longer than the actual axis the object stops at the end of the physical axis mu Type If you change the axis type so that it does not match the axis that you have drawn for example if the actual axis is linear but you choose rotational here the cell in patch view turns to red m n the Mode area select the type of movement for the object mu Static Select this option if you want to specify the precise location of a static object on the movement axis You can then use the position slider at the bottom of the window to adjust the position and control the movement of the object manually Bounce Select this option if you want the object to move forward and backward in a continuous loop along the movement axis Forward Select this option if you want the object to move forward along the axis from start to finish and then start o
33. scene Relationship between objects in CAD mode and New Plots Objects are transposed to a New Plots view from CAD mode and can be manipulated independently of the original object in CAD This means that in a New Plots view objects can be deleted copied moved and have their properties modified without affecting the original object in CAD mode For example moving a pipe does not cause the same pipe to also move in CAD mode You can easily create your lighting plot in a New Plots view independently of the drawing or model in CAD mode In contrast changes made to the original model in CAD mode are reflected in all New Plots views Objects that are deleted in CAD mode are also deleted from all New Plots views Similarly objects added in CAD mode are also added to all New Plots views provided the layer they are on is visible The same logic applies to objects that are moved in CAD mode moving an object causes the object to also move in all New Plots views as long as the relationship between the object in CAD mode and New Plots is intact To achieve a relationship between objects in CAD mode and objects in New Plots views various types of links are available These links track the position and properties of the original CAD object in New Plots and are referred to as the positional and properties links respectively For more information on these links and how they work refer to Links on page 273 Relationship between obje
34. w wattage Count 10 Use custom count Notes a Use custom name By default the name displayed in the Symbol Name box is used unless otherwise modified To enter an alternative name select the Use custom name check box and then type the name b Wattage The wattage in volts for the lamp Use custom count By default the value displayed in the Count box is used unless otherwise modified This value includes only hung fixtures in your show file To enter an alternate count select the Use custom count check box and then type the value d Notes Type any pertinent notes for the symbol 3 When you are finished editing the symbol information click OK Result The Legend Symbols Editor dialog box is redisplayed 4 Finish entering all relevant information and then click Finish Result The Wizard shortcut is stored in the shortcut bar with the name you specified in the Title box Editing a legend 298 To make changes to the information that is displayed in the legend open the Legend Wizard by double clicking on the legend shortcut and then make any necessary modifications Once a legend has been defined it does not change until you make modifications to its settings If any new fixtures with different symbol types are added to the file since you last made changes these additions will be available in Step 2 of the Wizard but will remain deselected until you specify whether they should be displayed in the legend
35. wfidth l oo h Depth l oo h Height E FOH p S g width E n ope 120 Units Metric Imperial Accept the defaults or choose custom properties Click OK Result The selected venue is inserted into the drawing 123 CAD mode 124 Release 16 0 The venue types are defined as follows Proscenium Arch A proscenium arch venue is a basic theatrical space with a stage proscenium arch and an auditorium The origin is set at the intersection of the center line and the proscenium line on the stage floor The following entries describe the parts of the proscenium arch A The stage width the dimension from the extremity of the SR wing to the extremity of the SL wing In WYSIWYG the default value is 90 0 B The stage depth the dimension from the proscenium line to the back of the stage space In WYSIWYG the default value is 50 0 C The stage height the dimension from the auditorium floor to the stage deck In WYSIWYG the default value is 4 0 D The thrust depth the dimension from the edge of the stage to the proscenium line In WYSIWYG the default value is 8 0 E The thrust width the dimension from the extremity of the SR edge of the thrust to the SL extremity of the thrust This dimension cannot be greater than the Arch width G Im WYSIWYG the default value is 350 F The Fly height the dimension from the stage deck to the top of the fly house In WYSIWYG the default va
36. you will need to create a custom color or gobo list To view an existing library list 1 From the Library menu choose Edit Color Gobo Lists Colour Gobo Lists E x Add 16 Colour Scroll Insert eal our 518 Colours E 518 Gobos a E e Acrobat FE Colours 1 Irizar Ciota Eere Acrobat FE Colours 2 4 e Acrobat PE Colours nesr Erien Acrobat PE Gobos 3 Delete Altman 10000 Colour 1 6 Remove Altman 10000 Colour 2 f Altman 10000 Colour 3 0 Up Altman 10000 Colour 4 a Altman 10000 Colour 5 roo Altman 10000 Colour 6 Altman 902 Colour 1 Altman 902 Colour 2 Altman 902 Colour 3 Altman 302 Colour 4 Altman 902 Colour 5 Show Altman 302 Colour 6 D Cuim Altman Comet Colour 1 Alman Comet Colour 2 Stock Altman Comet Colour 3 In the Show section click Stock Scroll to find the list you want to view Click on the list name A list of slots and the color or gobo for each slot is displayed in the slot window If OPEN appears in the Name column for a slot the color gobo or prism has not been assigned or is intentionally left OPEN 5 Click on a slot to see the preview of that color or gobo in the box below the slot window 6 Click C ose when you are done To create a custom color gobo list From the Library menu choose Edit Color Gobo Lists In the Show section click Custom Click Add Type the name of the new list Type the number of slots on the wheel or scroll Click OK oor O N ln w
37. 2 From the Edit menu choose Rotate Tip You may also use the Rotate tool on the 7oo s toolbar at 3 Click to set the center point for the rotation or type in the coordinates of the center point and then press ENTER 4 Type the rotation angle and then press ENTER or drag the mouse and click to type the rotation angle For example to rotate an object 45 degrees type 45 and then press ENTER Mirroring The Mirror command duplicates and reverses an object inserting it the same distance from an axis line as the original object To insert a mirrored object 1 2 Select the object s to be mirrored From the Edit menu choose Mirror Tip You may also use the Mirror tool on the 7oo s toolbar ad Click on the drawing to enter the first axis point Click on the drawing to set the second axis point Result The mirrored object is copied reversed from the origin based on the axis drawn Modifying object shapes You can change the shape of certain objects after they re drawn The objects you can change include lines risers cameras surfaces and arcs Modifying the shape changes one or more of the parameters of the object such as its width height or radius To modify the shape of an object 1 Select the object whose shape you want to modify Result You will notice that several white boxes will appear at the vertices of the object These boxes are referred to as markers Move your cursor to a vertex Result
38. 265 Venue variable 265 NOW variable 266 A Absolute coordinates 65 143 Acceleration 85 Accessory 202 Activating WYSIWYG 40 Activation 42 Adding floorplans 117 Aiming fixtures 182 Alias definition 189 Ambient light 73 Antialiasing options 257 Aperture 252 Application Options 83 Arc 129 Arcs 277 Arena 125 Arranging shortcuts 55 Array 169 Aspect ratio 296 Assembly Snap 108 176 Atmospheric options 253 Attribute layout 275 Attributes Data fields 216 Auto load 84 Auto save 84 Autofocus 326 361 Auto increment 191 AutoPatch 321 AutoUnit 91 171 172 Axes drawing 136 Back view 106 Backup files 84 Backup looks 341 Barndoors 202 Baud rate 83 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Index Beam angle 191 325 Beam simulation quality 73 Beams 96 Big Layouts 284 Bind to console 314 Bitmaps 307 Black Box 125 Blocks Custom library items 141 Groups 143 Booms 176 Borders and legs 134 Break tool 163 Budget Cost 189 217 Bulb Lamp 190 217 C CAD environment 102 CAD items 291 CAD Options toolbar 58 Camera 73 139 Camera toolbar using 140 Center line 128 Channel count 64 Channels Simulation 64 Circle 129 Circles 277 Circuit Name data field 216 Circuit Number data field 216 Circuit Type data field 217 Circus tents 126 Close the show document 80 Color Inserting 203 Inserting multiple 219 Color data field 216 Color wheel 240 Column Width
39. An extension line Is drawn between the label and the attribute For each attribute and its label you must decide whether you want to display it in the key If yes you can further specify how it will be displayed using the various formatting options including text size and color shape size and color and justification You can also edit all the text choose to give examples of attribute values and provide custom definitions for the labels Options in Step 2 allow you to choose the attributes and notation to be displayed around the chosen symbols Note To make the controls active you may have to click to clear the Use Defaults check box a Visible Select this check box if you want the attribute or label to be displayed around the symbol in your key a Use Body Color Select this check box if you want the attribute or label to use the same font color as the symbol To set a specific color for the attribute or label leave the box unchecked and click the color box to choose a custom color a Line weight Adjust this value to increase or decrease the density of the label or attribute font a ext Type the text that you want displayed for the attribute or label m talics Select this check box to italicize the attribute or label font Note there are no options to change the font a Horizontal and vertical justification Choose the justification for the text This is in relation to the insertion point or shape a Height Increase or
40. App y If multiple fixtures are selected the intensity level entered is assigned to all fixtures If you select multiple fixtures that have varying intensity levels N A appears in the ntensity box WYSIWYG Reference Guide 239 Design mode 240 Release 16 0 Zoom and iris tools To use the zoom and iris tools The zoom and iris design tools both work the same way Use the buttons for the extreme settings of tight or wide Use the dial to achieve any of the settings in between To use the dial click and hold the dial while you move the mouse up or down Gobo and prism tools To use the gobo and prism tools The gobo and prism tools work the same way Specify the fixture type if you have more than one selected or the specific wheel to control if that fixture type has multiple wheels using the drop down menu Note that only fixtures with gobo or prism parameters appear on the list Use the gobo prism wheel scroll arrows to select the desired gobo prism from the wheel If no gobo prism is desired leave the wheel in the open slot The dial will rotate this gobo if a rotating gobo is selected Wheel selection drop down list Dial Gobo Display Color tool To use the color tool The color tool offers many options for color selection Custom color picking Button to access gel library Wheelz scroller selection drop down list ae cea MY S4 Colours r Colors available on color
41. Axial i PAL 1200 cares m 5 Use the sliders along the top bottom and the sides to move the shutter blades Result The cuts that you make are visible in the drawing 6 Click OK when finished To adjust the leaves of barndoors Select the fixture with barndoors for which you want to adjust the leaves Right click and choose Properties Click the Fixture tab From the list on the left side highlight the barndoor Click the Leaves tab o mB Oo N Properties E 2 General Appearance Light Emission Fixture l PAR 64 General Leaves i AI 1IL Inch Barndoor Barrel Rotation cence oo WYSIWYG Reference Guide 185 CAD mode Release 16 0 6 Use the sliders along the top bottom and sides to move the barndoor leaves You will notice that the movement of the leaves is restricted to left right up and down Result The cuts are visible in the drawing 7 Click OK when finished To adjust flood or spot Select the fixture s for which you want to adjust the flood or spot Right click and choose Properties Click the Fixture tab Click the Lens tab A Oo N a Properties SA a 5 x General Appearance Light Emission Fixture o gt All Fixtures General Patch Lens Ex 6 Axial i B Inch Fresnel Gwe Apo 5 Use the slider to adjust the spot and flood 6 Click OK when finished To focus a Par 1 Select the PAR fixture that you want to focus 2 Right
42. CAD mode Tip At any time to access an object s properties you can click on the Properties tool on the Edit toolbar P Result The Properties dialog box is displayed Based on the type of fixture that you have selected the Properties dialog box varies An example is shown in the graphic below Properties General Appearance Light Emission Fixture a PAL 1200 CoGobo lt Gobo gt Options General Control Moving Mirror Position E Edit Layout Spot jo Pan non Unit ft TR so Oise 23110 5 16 Spin oop Purpose fC O Focus Position Noes Lamp MSRI200 Angle non Lens None Angle non Fixture tab Options on the Fixture tab affect the fixture properties and their accessories On the left side of the dialog box is a list of the selected fixtures and their accessories Click on a list item to obtain further details about the item Refer to Data fields on page 216 for a description of the fields WYSIWYG Reference Guide Carcel Ae Edit Layout click to edit the text label layout for the selected fixture For more information on layout refer to Information layout on page 198 193 CAD mode 194 Point of view tab Release 16 0 Options on the Point of View sub tab affect the orientation of the fixture Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to pan and tilt the light This sub tab is not available if a fixture is articulable that is if any accessories in the
43. D box type the motion control ID that you selected when configuring the axis Console is sending data Note If you do not know the ID right click on the axis and then click Properties Click the Axis tab The ID appears below the Motion Patch option button In the 7rave box type the distance in meters for linear axes in degrees for rotational axes that you want the object to travel along or around the axis This can be the full length angle of the axis or only a portion of it if you do not want the object to travel along around the full path For linear axes if you type a value that is longer than the actual axis the object stops at the end of the physical axis Click the Linear or Rotational option button according to the type of movement axis that you are patching In the Mode area select the type of movement for the object a Static Select this option if you want to specify the precise location of a static object on the movement axis You can then use the position slider at the bottom of the window to adjust the position and control the movement of the object manually Bounce Select this option if you want the object to move forward and backward in a continuous loop along the movement axis Forward Select this option if you want the object to move forward along the axis from start to finish and then start over again at the beginning in a continuous forward loop Backward Select this option if you want the obj
44. Grid On Colour gt o Paper Size Border and O E 24 0l 36 0 W Landscape Margins Joo soo 0 500 Scale Border Thickness lo 0 063 Scale E n aw ln paper Real World Units Metric Imperial _ __ Colour Iw Follow User Scene mi Print in Black and White Cancel New Plot View Properties tab Options on the New Plot View Properties tab affect the appearance of the plot Name The name of the plot Grid On Select this check box if you want gridlines to appear on the plot view Gridlines are for reference only they assist with the layout of plot items on the page Gridlines do not appear in the printed output Point Size The size at which points are printed Paper Size Choose the desired paper size from the drop down menu If you do not find the size you want choose Custom and then specify the width and height as desired The default values are 24 0 X 36 0 imperial measurement or Al metric measurement Landscape Select this check box if you want the page to be set up in landscape format Margins The margins for the plot The default values are 1 2 imperial measurement or 1cm metric measurement Border Thickness The thickness of the plot s border The border is drawn at the margins defined above The default values are 1 16 imperial measurement or Imm metric measurement Scale The scale at which the plot is drawn If the scal
45. Library Browser from the Options menu on the Welcome window when a document is not opened Objects i EF AI o Architecture o E Atmospheric E Banguet H Consoles i E Decor H Electrical Equipment E Furniture Ladders BFE Ladde i i tt Ladder i z OFt Ladder i be 12ft Ladder E Musical Instruments E Outdoors E Rigging Equipment E Road Cases E Security Items E Sound Reinforcement i E Speakers E Stairs H B Vehicles All qe Geo O Click any of the tools along the bottom of the browser window to view the contents of different sections of the library The library is divided into the following sections 119 CAD mode 120 Release 16 0 u Fixtures E Accessories ER E Truss m amp Library Items scenic El E Symbols Gel color m Gobos a t Lamps 7 9 Lenses Library entries are divided into sort criteria These criteria may be organized alphabetically by manufacturer by type or by other pertinent classifications For example you can find the ETC Source 4 in the Fixtures section gt Manufacturer gt EFGH gt ETC gt ERS sub menu Based on the library item that you click you may see a sample image of the item in the preview pane at the bottom of the browser To view the properties of library objects A Oo N e Open the Library Browser Navigate to and select the desired object Click the Property tool at the top of the Library Bro
46. Select this check box to reference the options selected on the Show Details tab of User Options Click to clear the Use User Defaults check box to make specific changes for the active view 70 wysiwyg gt March 2006 y WYSIWYG user interface Shaded views Introduction Shaded or open GL views offer a 3D perspective view of your drawing Surfaces truss and fixtures are filled in or solid rather than outlined as in wireframe views Shaded views are not available in WYSIWYG Report Shaded views will follow Scenes just like any other view Keyboard and mouse control To modify the point of view Use the arrow keys to move the position of the virtual target PAGE UP PAGE DOWN will zoom you in and out Holding down CTRL and using the arrow keys or the PAGE UP PAGE DOWN will move the position of the virtual camera At any time you can use the SHIFT key in combination with any of the movement keys to move in smaller increments The mouse pan tool can be set up to rotate the model or the camera around the target You can also use the mouse wheel to zoom in and out The arrow keys will continue to move the target position as you do this Modifying shaded views The properties of a shaded view affect the view point fixture beam quality and ambient light These settings are modified in the View Options WYSIWYG Reference Guide 71 WYSIWYG user interface Release 16 0 To modify a shaded view 1 From the Optio
47. Size 229 Columns in Data mode 216 ComEdit toolbar 58 Compass 140 Concept shortcuts 244 Connecting 314 console 314 Console data field 217 Consoles connecting 314 Content properties 290 Convert tool 163 Co ordinate display 84 365 Index Coordinate notation 102 Coordinates 65 102 Copy 278 Cost data field 217 Count column 263 Creating a new DMX universe 223 Creating a new spreadsheet 222 Cross fading between lighting looks 247 Current Set current layer 157 Custom 206 Custom color scroll 204 Custom color wheels 204 Custom fixtures 180 Custom gobo wheels 204 Custom gobos 206 Custom library items 121 141 Custom settings 83 Customizing spreadsheet views 217 Cut 278 Cylinders 132 D Data error tab 92 Data fields 216 Data filters 220 Data toolbar 58 Decimal display 84 Delay buffer 84 Delete 279 Design toolbar 59 Design tools 238 Designer s Remote 327 Detail level 263 Device Manager 314 Dimension line 131 Dimmer data field 216 Dimmer information 338 Dimmer rack information 339 Direct 3D tab 85 Display Log 335 Distance tool 170 Divide tool 165 DMX 314 320 DMX patch 149 Document summary 89 Dot line 128 Draw defaults 94 Draw toolbar 59 Drawing movement axes 136 Drawing aids 123 Drawing pipes 173 Drawing tips 123 DWG 77 DXF 77 DXF DWG files 109 366 Release 16 0 Edit Pres toolbar 60 Edit toolbar 59 Editing a key 303 Editing
48. Spline _ Circle Arc T Textlabel 7 Dimension Surface Riser 3 Cylinder Sphere 2 Library Pipe E Truss Tm Fixture Accessory Focus position Edit toolbar Item properties Cut Copy Paste Delete Hee Le Undo Redo Repeat last command Syria WYSIWYG Reference Guide WYSIWYG user interface 59 WYSIWYG user interface 60 Edit Pres toolbar P Item properties Th Bring te front Send to back fel Content properties i Open contents Format toolbar Format cells Bold Italic c mx Underline Align left Align center Align right Insert Pres toolbar Line Rectangle Round rectangle Ellipse Polygon Text Bitmap CAD item Spreadsheet item Report item Worksheet item Legend item Key item New plot item AEH HOO OD Layers toolbar Current layer Live toolbar Intensity and focus Intensity designer tool Focus designer tool lris designer tool Zoom designer tool Color designer tool eB5hA e amp Gobo designer tool Prism designer tool Release 16 0 wysiwyg gt March 2006 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Message Log Options toolbar F IB Message log options Display log options Export Print Print preview New Plots Options Solid line Center line Dashed line Dotted line Circle Are Text label Symbol Grid snap MidPoints EndPoints Center Ortho X Ortho Y Ortho Z New
49. The notes usually pertain to the simulation capabilities in WYSIWYG Data tab Options on the Data tab are read only and are set when the fixture is added to the library This does not however include the A ras Weight Cost Manu and Prod fields To modify these fields access the desired fixture s properties from the Library Browser 3 5 x 8 Axial i z E FF Manufacturer Generic Model 258A Alias OY weight 11 02 bs Use default Cost po o Catalog a Autofocus Manu 0 Prod 0 w Use sit URL pen Shortcut Close Insert Multiple m Manufacturer The name of the manufacturer of the fixture m Model The model number of the fixture m Alias The alternate name for the fixture m Weight The weight of the fixture m Use default Select this check box to use the default weight m Cost The cost of renting or purchasing the fixture The cost of renting the fixture can be the price for a day week or month The default value is 0 00 Notes a f a costis assigned to a fixture type when a WYSIWYG document is open the cost is applied to the current document only a f a cost is applied to a fixture type when a document is not open the cost is used as the default for all documents created on your copy of WYSIWYG a When opening a document created by someone other than yourself the cost entered in that person s document is used a The cost entered in this tab is displayed in WYSIWY
50. Tw Channel IY Spot T Colour Lamp T Focus TT Gobo Circuit Patch Position Purpose PanyTilt T Lens Notes T Spin F Dimmer IN Use User Details Release 16 0 Fixture data shown on plot Select the attributes that you want displayed around the fixture symbols in the CAD item To modify how the attributes are laid out refer to Fixture Notation and Information Layout in Fixture notation on page 197 Show Text Labels Select this check box to display text labels Tooltips Displays tooltips on the CAD item Tooltips are the pop up messages that display specific information about a fixture when you hover over it Choose the information that you want to display in a tooltip by selecting the appropriate check boxes in the Fixture tooltips group box Tooltips are often helpful when trying to locate a specific fixture in a plot Draw Symbols Select this check box to draw fixtures as symbols instead of 3D objects For more information on symbols refer to Symbols on page 197 Show truss cross members Deselect this check box to hide truss cross members in the CAD item to reduce the clutter or increase the speed of the display Select this check box to see the cross members Point size Set the default size for all points You can view a sample of the chosen size in the box to the right Adjusting the contents 294 If you chose fixed or variable scaling on the CAD Printing tab or if you inserted a New Plots item
51. You can also hide the tooltips that display information about a specific fixture when you hover over the fixture Tooltips are displayed by default For more information on toolbars refer to Toolbars on page 57 Compatibility tab Options on the Compatibility tab affect the processing power for beam simulation Application Options NN a x General File Options DirectsD OpenGL Toolbars Compatibility Render Options ETC Interface Simulation Options Humber of Threads l1 m Number of Threads Select the number of processors that you have available on your computer for beam simulation Modify this number only if you upgrade the number of processors Render options tab Options on the Render Options tab affect the memory and processing power available for rendering WYSIWYG Reference Guide 87 88 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 16 0 Application Options General File Options Direct3D OpenGL Toolbars Compatibility Render Options ETC Interface Rendering resources Number of threads i E Memar Memon Size MB E E Total memory 42 MB Memon available 137 MB Total physical memory 126 ME Physical memory available 17 ME Total virtual memory 301 ME Virtual memory available 120 ME Write log files 2 Number of Threads Select the number of processors available for rendering Modify this number only if you upgrade the number of processors
52. a From the Library menu choose Edit Color Gobo Lists In the Show section click Custom Select the color gobo list that you want to remove Click Delete Result The list is removed from the color gobo list To insert custom scrolls into scrollers o mB Oo N WYSIWYG Reference Guide Select the fixtures with scrollers for which you want to assign a custom scroll From the Edit menu choose Object Properties Select the Fixture tab In the fixture list highlight the scroller Select the Scro tab 205 CAD mode 206 Release 16 0 6 Select the desired list from the pull down list Note Only custom lists that have the appropriate number of slots and media type are available 7 Click OK To insert custom wheels into automated fixtures Select the fixtures for which you want to assign a custom wheel From the Edit menu choose Object Properties Select the Fixture tab Select the appropriate tab for example Color 1 Gobo lt Gobo gt o mB Oo N From the drop down list select the desired list Note Only custom lists that have the appropriate number of slots and media type are available 6 Click OK Custom gobos You can generate custom gobos if you have the artwork in either bitmap or jpeg format The Gobo Wizard walks you through the steps of making a custom gobo Custom gobos are stored in the gobo library under the Custom category Custom gobos require an association with an existing WYSIW
53. a radius measurement for the resulting fillet Note All subsequent fillet commands will follow this value until it is modified again To fillet two lines 1 Select the lines to be filleted 2 From the Tools menu choose Fillet and then choose Fillet Result The lines are joined by an arc based on the value set for the fillet radius Notes 1 You must set a fillet radius before you can perform this command 2 If the fillet radius is O the lines will be extended and joined at their intersection If they are already intersecting nothing occurs Array The Array command is used to make multiple copies of an object distributed evenly along a line or arc To perform a linear array 1 Select the object that you want to array From the Tools menu choose Array and then choose Array Linear Click a point on your drawing or type in coordinates to specify the direction and interval for the linear array For example to place a copy of the selected object every 5 at a 45 degree angle type the following and then press ENTER 5 lt 45 4 In the dialog box that opens type the total number of copies desired this includes the original object Adjust the value for the interval if required 5 Click OK Note The interval is defined as the distance between the copied objects To perform a polar array 1 Select the object that you want to array From the Tools menu choose Array and then choose Array Polar Click a point that wi
54. add one or more vertices and then drag these vertices to the new position 1 In your drawing click on the point of the axis at which you want to add a vertex 2 Right click and select Add Vertex Result The vertex is added at the point where you clicked Tip To change the path of the axis click to select the axis and view all the vertices Click the desired vertex drag it to the new position and then release the mouse Any objects that are attached to the axis will now follow the new path Viewing moving scenery After you create the axes and attach the objects to them you can watch the objects move along the axes by using the Looks feature in Design mode J ust aS you can Simulate moving lights by cross fading between one lighting look to the next you can also simulate moving scenery by creating Looks that contain movement axes and fading from one Look to the next For more information see To view moving scenery on page 249 You can also patch the axis in Data mode so you can control the movement of the object with either a DMX console device such as a Mini Console or a motion control system For details see To patch a movement axis to a DMX console device on page 225 or To patch a movement axis to a motion control system on page 225 Drawing cameras You can add cameras to the drawing to provide additional view points in shaded views and renderings To insert a camera 1 From the Draw menu choose Camera
55. affect the scale for the drawing View Options x General CAD Rotation CAD Printing View Type Showy Details Print Options Scaling Tyne Fit Fixed C vate BE 01 RE Oh paper Real Wino Point Size i B Hide Zero Intensity Fizture m Fit If you select this option the entire CAD drawing is scaled to fit inside the placeholder m Fixed If you select this option the CAD item is printed at the specified scale To determine which portion of the CAD item is displayed inside the placeholder choose Open Contents Inside this view you can move around a white rectangle wysiwyg gt gt March 2006 Presentation mode that represents the placeholder See Adjusting the contents on page 294 for details on the functionality available with Open Contents m Variable If you select this option when you open contents you will be able to change the size of the white rectangle without affecting the original placeholder The portion of the drawing contained within the white rectangle is scaled to fit in the placeholder See Adjusting the contents on page 294 for details on the functionality available with Open Contents m On paper The scale ratio that you want to use on a paper copy of the layout m Real World The real measurement for the scale ratio that you specify in the On paper box For example you may want to use a scaling of one inch in a paper copy of you
56. an 11 digit activation code To register the software involves entering a validation code This section is broken down into the following three steps m starting WYSIWYG for the first time and running through the Product Configuration Wizard E activating the software E registering the software To start WYSIWYG for the first time Note Before you perform this procedure ensure that you have the correct dongle installed on your computer or that the network dongle is installed on a computer that you can access from your PC 1 On your desktop click the shortcut icon to start WYSIWYG or click Start gt All Programs gt WYSIWYG gt WYSIWYG Result The WYSIWYG Product Configuration Wizard appears WYSIWYG Product Configuration Wizard E 2 x Welcome to the WYSIWYG Product Configuration Wizard WySTWYn is available in a number of license configurations This wizard will help you to configure your WYSIWYG installation You may change these settings in the Future by accessing 4pplication Options under the Options menu IF vou have a dongle please connect it to your computer before proceeding To continue click Mext wysiwyg gt March 2006 Installation configuration activation and registration 2 To ensure that the Wizard appears the next time you launch WYSIWYG leave the check mark in the box beside Show me this wizard next time I run WYSIWYG to configure the program so the Wizard does not appear th
57. and holding the mouse button down drag it to the end point of the line Release the mouse button when you have the desired shape Click anywhere in the drawing to finish placing the line Result The line is placed on the layout To insert a rectangle onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Rectangle Tip You can also use the Rectangle tool from the Layout Pres Insert toolbar H Click on the page at the starting point of the rectangle and holding the mouse button down drag out the shape of the rectangle Release the mouse button when you have the desired shape Click anywhere in the drawing to finish placing the rectangle Result The rectangle is placed on the layout wysiwyg March 2006 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Presentation mode To insert a rounded rectangle onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Round Rectangle Tip You can also use the Round Rectangle tool from the Layout Pres Insert toolbar Click on the page at the starting point of the rectangle and holding the mouse button down drag out the shape of the rectangle Release the mouse button when you have the desired shape Click anywhere in the drawing to finish placing the rectangle Result The round rectangle is placed on the layout Note You can only see the rounded corners of the rectangle if you zoom in on the drawing To insert an ellipse onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Ellipse Tip You can also
58. box to have the selected line s displayed in shaded views and renderings and then type a value for the radius to set its thickness Text label tab Options on the 7ext Label tab affect the justification and style of the selected text labels Prnperties EU ax General Appearance Light Emission Text Label Fisture Hang Structure Truss Text EE T Italics Height 2 F Align to View Horizontal Justification f Left Centre Right Vertical Justification Top Cente Bottom m Text Type new text to change the label 7 Height Type a value for the height to adjust the font size E Italics Select this check box to make the text appear in italics m Align to View Select this check box to set the text labels to be legible regardless of plot type m Horizontal J ustification Select the desired option button to set the text label s horizontal alignment The available horizontal alignment options are a Left Places the selected text label to the left of the insertion point a Center Horizontally centers the selected text label on the insertion point a Right Places the selected text label to the right of the insertion point m Vertical J ustification Select the desired check box to set the text label s vertical alignment The available vertical alignment options are a op Places the selected text label below the insertion point m Center Vertically centers the selected text label on the inse
59. boxes Based on the size that you enter WYSIWYG calculates how many times the texture is repeated or tiled to completely cover the selected element 5 Check Stretch to make the selected texture grow to cover the entire surface Based on the aspect ratio and the rotation angle WYSIWYG evaluates the surface with all of its edges and stretches the texture so the best fit is used This option is not active unless you choose a texture ln 154 wysiwyg amp March 2006 CAD mode 6 If the texture has text or another recognizable image in it you might need to rotate the image to get it right side up Type the rotation angle in the 7exture Rotation box 7 Click OK Materials Materials differ from textures in that they do not affect what the objects or surfaces will look like but rather how they interact with light The result of applying a material is only apparent in renderings as shown below Objects and surfaces can be assigned both a texture and a material You apply materials using the Appearance tab in the Properties dialog box You can choose your preferred material from the list of materials provided with WYSIWYG To apply a material to an object surface object or venue 1 Right click the object to which you want to apply the material and then choose Properties 2 Click the Appearance tab Properties General Appearance Light Emission Set Piece Frame Tent Elements Color Texture
60. channel is identified in the center of the box If you are connected to a console and are receiving DMX signals the incoming DMX levels are displayed in the top right corner of each box Patch universe Fixture parameter DMX address Output 1 Al x En ara ae ab ae ae ae oe 7A roy H EF M H AH EF M EF M H ry H ame tas Dimmer Dimmer Frame D Hm AM Po Sp Fi In Sp niy Sp fi In Sp uly Sp Fi In Sp niy Sp Fi In Sp niy Sp i FcHFF UD Dimmer Es yfi H EIn 5 my a Stobe Douser Coli Col Gobo Pe ed en Ng a ee if Gobo Focus Ins Pism Pan __ Pan Fine Tilt Stroba 1 Omer ala mr EI EDD Coli Col Gobo Rotator Gobo Focus Ins Posm_ Pan Pan Fine Spot number and fixture type Reading the patch for streaming video sources If you have patched a live video source or file the patch appears as shown below DMX address DMX level aS Video ral Control source me name WYSIWYG Reference Guide 221 Data mode 229 Release 16 0 Reading the patch for moving scenery If you have patched a movement axis the patch appears as shown below Position of the nhject on the axis as reported by the motion control system Axis name For linear movement axes the position of the object is reported in either metric or imperial units for example 16m For rotational axes the value is shown in degrees for example 42 If the axis is unrecogn
61. current layer is the layer that you are working on at the moment any object that you draw is placed on this layer and assumes the layer s default properties when it is drawn An asterisk appears beside the name of the current layer 10 Click OKto close the Layers dialog Note To guickly sort the layers within the layer database click the appropriate column heading in the Layer Database dialog box For example click the Editable column heading to sort the layers by edit setting that is those layers marked as editable appear at the top of the list in alphabetical order Layer properties All layers have properties that describe the appearance of the layer Objects that reside on the layer inherit the properties of the layer by default unless you decide to override the values For more information on overriding object properties refer to General object properties on page 146 General tab Options on the General tab affect the selected layer s color line thickness and visibility Layer Properties General Object Counts Narre x W Visible Plot Colour W Editable W Opaque T Use Document Line Weight Line Weight 0 077 lw Use Plot colour for rendering Render Colour OR Cancel E Visible Select this check box to make the selected layer visible on the plot and in shaded views If you modify the property here it is changed on the Layer Database dialog box m Editable select this check box to
62. decrease to modify the font size m Angle Specifies the attribute or label alignment in relation to the fixture symbol a Shape Associate a shape with the label or attribute if desired You can choose from none circle square octagon or diamond a Size Increase or decrease the size of the shape as desired wysiwyg March 2006 Presentation mode 3 Set the position of the attribute or label by clicking and dragging on the label or attribute in the preview window You can also select an attribute by clicking on it in the preview window 4 The key as it will be drawn on the layout is displayed in the preview window Once all the attributes are set as desired click Finish Result The Wizard shortcut is stored in the shortcut bar with the name you specified in the Title box Editing a key To make changes to the information that is displayed in the key open the Key Wizard by double clicking on the key shortcut and then make any necessary modifications Once a key has been defined it does not change until you make modifications to its settings To rename delete or clone the shortcut follow the steps defined in Working with shortcuts on page 54 I nserting a key into a layout Once the key has been created using the Key Wizard you can place it on the page To insert a key into a layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Key item Tip You can also click the Key tool in the Pres Layout Insert toolbar 2 Click and
63. do not create shadows Instead all objects in the path of the virtual beam are illuminated even if an object would normally block the beam from reaching another As illustrated in the rendering below all three surfaces are illuminated and the beam continues into infinity To calculate which objects the beam of light will hit and which objects it will not hit select Objects Objects in the path of the virtual beam will not be illuminated by the beam if the beam has already been blocked by another object However WYSIWYG still does not calculate where the beam stops As illustrated in the rendering below the first surface is illuminated but the beam is still continuing into infinity Select Atmospheric to calculate which objects the beam of light will hit and where the beam of light will end This is a true representation of how light behaves As illustrated in the rendering below the first surface is illuminated and the beam also stops there March 2006 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Design mode i Presence Use the Presence slider to change the relative brightness of fixture beams When set to Subtle WYSIWYG accounts for all variations in lamp output including gel transmission color temperature fixture efficiency and lamp When set to Bold all fixture beams are rendered at the same general intensity Step 5 Radiosity Options fi Render Wizard _ MM x Step 5 Radiosity Options p Radiosity Options
64. document is currently open you are prompted to save changes to that document before another show document is opened Only one show document may be open at a time When you merge documents it enables you to add the contents of the DWG or DXF file to the contents of the current document 3D solids contained within an AutoCAD file are automatically placed inside blocks by AutoCAD When you import any file that contains a block WYSIWYG will automatically explode the blocks in the DXF or DWG files for you If you decide to do this before opening them in WYSIWYG AutoCAD files saved as Release 13 or higher generally yield the best results Entities that can be imported The DWG DXF entities that can be imported are detailed in the following table The resulting WYSIWYG objects are also shown DWG DXF entity WYSI WYG object Circle Circle Point Point Arc Arc Line Line 2D Polyline Line 3D Polyline Line Mline Line WYSIWYG Reference Guide 109 CAD mode 110 Release 16 0 DWG DXF entity WYSI WYG object Spline Spline Text Text MText Text Polyface Mesh PFACE Set piece Polygon Mesh 3D Surfaces Set piece Face 3D Face Surface Aligned dimension Dimension Entities that can be imported as a library item Circle Arc Line 2D Polyline 3D Polyline Polyline Mline Polyface Mesh PFACE Polygon Mesh 3D Surfaces Face 3D Face Limitations Multilines becomes single lines Multiline text becomes single line t
65. drag a window placeholder on the page where you want the item to appear Result The Se ect Key to be referenced dialog box is displayed Select Legend to be referenced Cancel symbal WYSIWYG Reference Guide 303 Presentation mode Release 16 0 3 Select the key that you want to add to the layout and then click OK Result Your key appears within the placeholder as drawn By default key items are set to a scale of 1 16 1 Key Colour FZE Linit Centerstoge Focus Le Z Drg ryuel Cir Chit Patch Modifying the properties of a key To modify the properties of a key 1 On the layout select the key that you want to modify 2 From the Edit menu choose Item Properties Tip You can also click the tem Properties tool on the Pres Layout Edit toolbar P Result The Properties dialog box is displayed Properties E x General Key Outline Weight E Colour L Fill None Fill Colour The Genera tab is similar for all items For more information on this tab see To modify item properties on page 291 Key tab Options on the Key tab affect the scaling and content of the placeholder saa wysiwyg March 2006 Properties kita General Key mE pem hy paper Real Word Presentation mode Key Select the key that you want to be displayed on the layout A list of all the keys that you have created is displayed in the drop down list Sc
66. drawing mode Draw from Center requires that the pipe be drawn by specifying the center point and one end point or extremity of the pipe Although it is only necessary to enter all points when drawing in interactive mode the pipe drawing mode will affect the insertion point of the pipe when drawing using the pipe dialog box The drawing mode will also affect how the fixtures are hung when using pipe snap how the fixture offset distance is measured and how pipe tape prints are labelled To set the pipe drawing mode 1 From the Options menu choose User Options 2 Click the User tab User Options FIR User Draw Defaults Show Details Simulation Curent Scene Pipe drawing mode Paste Bazepoint Draw from start Interactive object creation Draw from center lw Automatically group truss lw Prompt to put deleted fixtures in flight case IY Shaw fisture notes when inserting Missing Co ordinate Focus mode T Use only one missing coordinate None Automatically adjust with command line Focus after hang a pr ae oo Focus towards origin 3 In the Pipe Drawing Mode section select Draw from Center or Draw from Start Tips a You can change the default setting for a pipe in mid command by right clicking and choosing the drawing mode for that pipe just before inserting it into the drawing a You can change the pipe mode for a specific pipe at any time in the pipe s properties For more information re
67. eee ee ee ee 31 Configuration activation and registration ag 38 Ejo g elec E be be ae de ee bw E OGRE bee be YNN 42 SUDSCIIDUIONSG 4402444400584 eS bee ee athe eeede a a FED eee Eee 43 PaSSWOLdS a omne aa a ge eh eh oees tad Hehehe dons Y Pads CARER YE GLE OOS EEE eee 45 4 WYSIWYG user interface 47 Navigation and screen Set UD I a 49 SHOMICULDalsa6 4 hak owes ee eee ete ee OS ee ae ee ae Oa a CNC FAYN 53 TOOD FS 22 222424250 ee bee cent eG oe eae bas Hees bE ee eee eee ee eS 57 Status Dal oaccee cee Geer ence oen che de beter E FO NEFYN DN FN 64 Wireframe VIEWS I Na 66 Shaded VIOWS 624 eu SR RE RO RH atones ruraa HAH AU EERO UB BOM HR OB 71 5 Managing your WYSI WYG document 75 si a EF Rh a A A EE FE NR a FEARN ee Oe ae oe Se YN 77 amp een a FF i e Y NA ANF ea a Sea Gaey Soe eeke eu 83 WYSIWYG Viewer aoaaa aa a a a e 98 6 CAD mode 99 LOVON D eo O OO OY Hu CF EE A eee harass 101 The CAD environment sa sy cg Um ab aaa RF GR HR a Bi Myd Wb AF ER Un oW od ees 102 The Library Browser S FF ug 119 Drawing ODJECE arera e ibn cen eos SS bebe hee Ge Ses eee eee Shawnee ws 123 EdIUNO ODJECES e s a a ee oe wee oe we Be ee GW O oe ee TD 000 GCC O a OA GB LE y 142 CAD TO a we Geers GS AU SR RS Bg Yny o A OG Sd EER REM eh ee See ay eh eee eeu 162 a lt 0 19 Ei a 0 Le su 22s a ae a a eo ame eS EOS eek Caw ee He ewe Ob eS SG eed A 171 Hanging and focusing fixtures 0 FF Fu
68. field is empty The spot field is empty The color field is empty The gobo field is empty Error notifications occur when WYSIWYG detects an error for which an error notification trigger has been set To set error triggers 1 From the Options menu choose Show Options 2 Click the Data Error tab Show Options Document Summary Show Info Object Defaults Object Settings Report Data Error Regional Settings Error Status Motification Trigger Reflect in Notification Status Bar Dialog Indicator Dimmers gt Circuit Fatches gt Circuit Channels gt Circuit Fatches gt Dimmer Channels gt Dimmer Channels gt Patch Spots gt Patch Missing Position Missing Unit Missing Circuit Mame Missing Circuit Missing Dimmer Missing Patch Missing Channel Missing Spot Mizsing Colour Missing Gobo VT TT TT TT 80 80 lt 1 81 81 XI I VT TTT TT 7 80 80 lt 1 5181 XI XI 3 Select the errors for which you want to trigger an error notification and or signal 4 Click OK To manage error triggers 1 When an error notification is triggered the following dialog box appears WYSIWYG Data errors have been found Catone Onn 2 From this dialog box you can perform one of the following actions wysiwyg March 2006 Data mode a Acknowledge the error and then click OK to close the notification b Acknowledge the error and then click Show Me to open a new window that automatically nav
69. fixture tree have a moving head or moving mirror modifier Properties E 21 x General Appearance Light Emission Fixture Ex E Axial General Point of View Patch Shutters Gwe ab m Pan Type a value for the pan and view the result in the window to the left m Tilt Type a tilt value and view the result in the window to the left Patch tab Options on the Patch sub tab affect the circuit channels and patch universe for the selected fixture Properties es E x General Appearance Light Emission Fixture ee E x E Axial General Point of view Patch Shutters Control Circuit Channel jo Mang Dimmer i ___ WNO fo Patch w Use DM address Universe las Gwe ab these boxes Control Circuit and Patch Refer to Data fields on page 216 for a description of wysiwyg gt gt March 2006 CAD mode m Use EDMX address Select this check box to use the EDMX address for the patch universe This check box is enabled if you select EDMX from the Universe drop down list EDMX is an Ethernet protocol developed by ETC Moving mirror moving head tab Options on the Moving Mirror and Moving Head sub tabs affect the pan and tilt values Properties ce ae _ x General Appearance Light Emission Fisture Hang Structure Pipe m PAL 1200 Col Goba lt Gobo gt Options General Control Moving Mirror Pan offset 0 00 Tilt
70. fixtures Some automated fixtures have wheels that spin continuously Gobo wheels often take a lot of processing power and can slow down the refresh rate of other fixture s updates unnecessarily g Select the Beam Angles check box to display the photometrics of the fixture s beam angle instead of the field angle The angle that is displayed is the measurement in degrees from the center of the beam to where the light level drops off to 50 of the peak For more information on photometrics refer to Photometrics tab on page 190 r Select the Bitmap Gobos check box to simulate bitmap gobo fixtures Custom gobos that have a bitmap image attached will be simulated This selection provides a realistic simulation Note Also noteworthy are the properties of shaded views These are discussed in Shaded views on page 71 325 Live mode i o t Autofocus 326 Release 16 0 Introduction Autofocus is the protocol that WYSIWYG uses to talk back to a compatible console Using the mouse in a Wireframe view or using the concept shortcuts and design tools at any time you can direct the console to select fixtures set focus and control intensity iris and color Autofocus is connected through MIDI Serial or Ethernet The following consoles are compatible with the Autofocus protocol ETC Expression and Impression consoles Flying Pig WholeHog II and III Jands Hog 250 500 600 and 1000 consoles Compulite s A
71. in all modes CAD Design Live DMX Patch Sets the selected object to have light emitting properties controllable by three DMX channels red blue green The object must be patched according to the WYSIWYG patch notation universe DMX address From the drop down box select the patch universe of the selected object and then type the starting DMX address in the box to the right of the drop down box Assign a spot number for the selected object This is the spot number that is used by the console to call the object Once the object is successfully patched you can control it from your console in Live mode as you would a regular fixture If all channels are at a level of O the object is not visible As you increase the levels on the red blue and green channels the object illuminates accordingly 149 CAD mode 150 Release 16 0 Set Piece tab Options on the Set Piece tab affect the facet properties for the selected surfaces or set pieces and conseguently how they will respond during simulation in shaded views when the beam auality is set to Light up Facet Splitting splits surfaces or set pieces into small triangles for the purposes of smooth beam fallout Properties eS T Facet Splitting Facet resolution u Use Document Defaults Select this check box if you want to reference the object settings that are saved in Show Options For more information on object settings refer to the Object Settin
72. lighting look Renderings include bounce and reflection from surfaces Animated renderings available though certified service providers Multi monitor support 12 months of software and library updates included Upgrade suggestions Modes A faster processor improves responsiveness and rendering times Memory requirements depend on the size of the show Insufficient memory can seriously affect performance Add memory if there is excessive disk activity A high performance OpenGL accelerator card significantly improves the performance of real time simulation The working modes available in WYSIWYG Network depend on your product configuration Refer to the WYSIWYG Report Design or Perform sections accordingly Detailed explanations of each of the various modes are included in this guide 26 wysiwyg March 2006 The WYSIWYG suite of software products b WYSI Link Introduction WYSILink is an add on for WYSIWYG Report Design or Perform and inserts a mode button Link to the base product when installed It acts as an interface to ETCLink and monitors the Sensor line of dimmers When a problem with a fixture is detected data about the fixture is logged in Link mode and the image of the affected fixture is highlighted on your plot Note The following specifications are subject to change Software features m Add on to the features of WYSIWYG Report Perform or Design System diagnostic fixture data is written to a Me
73. lighting looks 235 Design mode Release 16 0 Es wysiwyg March 2006 Design mode y ae Layout tabs Introduction Beneath the work area in each mode is a series of layout tabs These layouts provide various configurations of the views you are working with To change layouts click the tab that corresponds to the layout you wish to use The Design mode contains the following layout tabs m Wireframe The work area displays a full screen wireframe view m Quad The work area is divided into quadrants three of which can be modified to show plan front side or isometric views The lower right quadrant contains a shaded view m Shaded The work area displays a full screen shaded view Note The wireframe views in Data mode are used for fixture selection only To make any drawing modifications you must return to CAD mode WYSIWYG Reference Guide 237 Design mode Release 16 0 Design tools 238 Introduction The design tools are available in the Design and Live modes You must have your venue scenery and fixtures drawn in order to use the design tools however you do not need to have all the data entered for the fixtures in Design mode Design mode is intended so you do not need channel numbers or a patch The design tools allow you to create virtual lighting looks without an external control console You can rough in static looks and render them for design presentations Though the Design mode looks a
74. line from the drawing Drawing points Points are identifiers of a specific coordinate in 3D space Points are inserted as references or as scenic elements wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode To draw a point 1 From the Draw menu choose Point Tip You can also use the Point tool on the Draw toolbar w 2 Click on the drawing to place the point Note Points can be drawn as a dot a cross a Square or a circle To set the point type default From the Options menu choose Show Options Click the Object Defaults tab Select the desired point type Click OK A N Drawing circles There are two ways in which you can draw circles m non interactive mode in which you type the exact radius of the circle m interactive mode in which you click and drag to set the radius To draw a circle in non interactive mode 1 From the Draw menu choose Circle Tip You can also use the Circle tool on the Draw toolbar i Result The New Circle dialog box appears 2 In the Radius box type a radius for the circle and then click OK The default value is 4 0 Click on the drawing to place the circle 4 Click elsewhere in the drawing to finish placing the new circle To draw a circle in interactive mode Note To turn interactive mode on click the Interactive Mode button on the toolbar 1 From the Draw menu choose Circle Tip You can also use the Circle tool on the Draw toolbar i 2 Click to place the center of the circle Cl
75. list changes based on the current video card and mode OpenGL tab Options on the OpenGL tab affect the type of simulation that you want to use Application Options Compatibility Render Options ETC Interface General File Options DirectsD OpenGL Toolbars Simulation Options Fast Simulation C Fast Simulation for Primary Display Only Safe Simulation 2 Fast Simulation Enables hardware acceleration Hardware acceleration uses the capabilities of the graphics hardware of the computer to display graphics This is the default option m Fast Simulation for Primary Display Only Enables hardware acceleration for the primary emulation a Safe Simulation enables software emulation Toolbars tab Options on the 7oo bars tab affect which toolbars and status bar panes you want to display in WYSIWYG wysiwyg gt March 2006 Application Dptions NR MU 2 xj Compatibility Render Options ETC Interface General File Options DirectsD OpenGL Toolbars View Selection T Layout Format l ComEdit F Design F Layout Edit Scene F Live Layout Ingert T Layer F Gate T Layout View Universe T Mew Plot Options WwrSILink M CAD Options D New Plat View D Message Log Opt Show statusbar panes IW Statusbar lw Selected objects Coordinates lw Snap M Autofocus fw Ortho lw Channel Over lw Absolute lw Error Checking Missing Coordinate Unit Type Managing your WYSIWYG document
76. mode and layout destination For example you can save a navigation shortcut to Data mode Patch layout The next time you want to go back to that location click the shortcut to save you at least one step View shortcuts store the plot type and zoom level View shortcuts only apply to wireframe views WYSIWYG Reference Guide 53 WYSIWYG user interface Release 16 0 Library shortcuts The second type of shortcut is used in place of browsing the library The library Shortcuts are E AS Fixtures Accessories Color Gobo Library fi Truss Views tools shortcuts The final type of shortcut is used to open and save views and tools The views tools Shortcuts are Columns Patch Errors Worksheets 4 Images Layouts New Plots Legend z Key I Report el Looks RR Concepts Palettes Render Working with shortcuts Generally the procedure for creating modifying and working with shortcuts is the same regardless of the type of shortcut To create a new shortcut 1 Right click in open space on the appropriate shortcut bar and then choose the appropriate New option Note For navigation type shortcuts ensure that the destination is set up and then proceed with step 1 2 Based on the type of shortcut you are prompted to select the object or type a name for the new shortcut 3 Click nsert or OK Result The shortcut is created and added to the bottom of the list on the shortcut bar that you selected in s
77. mouse button will allow you to drag the drawing around the window Alternatively the Pan tool on the View toolbar also enables this type of movement 4 At any time you can use the SHIFT key in combination with any of the movement keys to move in smaller increments In shaded views the mouse can substitute all key strokes Click and drag to pan around and use the mouse wheel for zooming Zoom tools Zoom tools allow you to view smaller or larger sections of a plot or drawing There are seven zoom tools available in WYSIWYG Note The zoom tools are not applicable in the Shaded view to zoom in or out in this view use the arrow keys or the roller wheel on your mouse instead To access the Zoom tools 1 From the Zoom menu choose one of the Zoom tools Tip You may also use the Zoom tools on the View toolbar Result The viewpoint is adjusted accordingly The Zoom tools that are available are listed in the following table Zoom tool Description Zoom In oN Moves your viewpoint closer to the center of the view Zoom Out Er Moves your viewpoint farther away from the center of the view wysiwyg March 2006 WYSIWYG user interface Zoom tool Description Zoom Fit cf Adjusts the viewpoint so that the extremities of the drawing fit into the current view Zoom Fit All only available on For Quad layout adjusts the the Zoom menu viewpoint so that the extremities of the drawing fit into the three Wireframe views simult
78. network To set the version that is monitored refer to ETC Interface tab on page 88 ote wysiwyg March 2006 WYSI Link Link mode ce WYSI Link mode I ntroduction WYSI Link mode is accessed through the NK mode button at the top of the WYSIWYG screen You can view the WYSILink Message Log and configure your WYSILink settings from LINK mode Note If you cannot see the L NK mode button then you are not running WYSIWYG with a WYSI Link enabled dongle Contact your dealer or Cast Software Technical Support for further information Message Log The Message Log provides a spreadsheet view of ETCLink error messages As error states occur messages are logged in the Message Log and classified as either Pending or Cleared m Pending messages are generated at the time of the error m Cleared messages are generated when an error has been corrected Pending and Cleared messages are paired so that when an error state has been corrected the appropriate Pending message is cancelled You have the option of viewing all Pending and Cleared messages or only Pending messages for error states that have not been corrected Note WYSI Link defaults to displaying only Pending Messages To change this setting refer to Message Log options on page 334 E unen wpap i perform Ple Wysllink Options Hel TEW oh e Message Log Special circumstances arise when errors are generated when WY
79. next time that you select the shortcut Step 1 Shaded View Properties li Render Wizard Step 1 Shaded View Properties General Scene IV Follow User Scene m Shade Options Camera None Aperture size Sa clas aa ae Smal Lage Ambient Light WN 15 Shade Type WireFrame Flat C Gouraud V Pan tool moves objects og 2100 Finish Add Shortcut Ready Options in Step 1 affect the composition of your image a Scene Select a scene for the rendering Scenes are groupinos of layers used to organize a plot For more information on scenes refer to Scenes on page 160 291 Design mode 292 Release 16 0 b Camera Select the camera for the rendering Cameras are set up in CAD mode For more information on cameras refer to Drawing cameras on page 139 If you select a camera you can adjust its aperture This adjustment changes the depth of field of the final image The larger the aperture the fuzzier the rendering The focus point is always the target of the camera Camera target By default the target is visible This is to aid in the composition of the image It will not however be visible tn your final rendering To turn the target off that is set to not visible right click in the preview pane and then choose View Options For more information on shaded views refer to Modifying shaded views on page 71
80. note that is most commonly used to describe how this fixture is being used in your show For example SL Side Diagonal Backs Purpose is an attribute of the fixture It is not possible to assign multiple purposes for multi circuit fixtures Color This is the assigned gel color number or scroller identification Gobo This is the assigned gobo number Focus This is the fixture s focus position Patch This is the fixture s assigned DMX channel number This field is mandatory for simulation activity in Live mode One show can have multiple DMX universes A patch entry must be notated universe where universe is a letter number or other label identifying the universe or output and is the DMX channel number For example A 1 or Dim 26 Circuit Name This is an identifier note for the circuit box or multi cable Circuit Number This is the assigned circuit or multi cable tail number Dimmer This is the assigned dimmer number Offset This field identifies the fixture s location on the hanging structure It is a distance measurement referencing the pipe s end or center point or another point as specified Pan A focus attribute measured in degrees defining the positioning of the fixtures yoke Tilt A focus attribute measured in degrees defining the positioning of the fixture within the yoke wysiwyg 2 March 2006 Data mode m Spin A focus attribute measured in degrees defining the fixture s
81. of Live mode you can now use the console device to control the progress of the video For details see To control a DMX patched video source with a console on page 316 wysiwyg March 2006 Data mode To patch a movement axis to a DMX console device In WYSIWYG you can patch a movement axis to which one or more objects has been attached and then use a console device or a motion control system to control the progress of the objects along the axis You have the choice of patching the axis to either a DMX patch universe or a motion control universe based on the type of console or system you will be using to move the objects For details on patching the axis to a motion control universe see To patch a movement axis to a motion control system on page 225 To control the object s movement with a DMX console device the DMX patch is allocated two channels one each for coarse and fine movement The DMX value represents the object s percentage of movement For example if it is at O then the object is at 0 of its range of motion if it is at 100 then the object has moved 100 of its range of motion For details on controlling the object with the console device in Live mode see To control a DMX patched movement axis with a console on page 317 Note Before performing the following procedure the movement axis must already be linked to the patch universe For details see To attach a movement axis to a DMX patch univer
82. of measurement select the Custom option button and then specify the mapping of the units of measurement to use in the exported file in the DXF Unit To boxes me wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode 7 Click the Layer tab Select DWG Settings E x Scale Layer mn MIBLIHNE_PODEST Select All M BUHAE RUCK AND WIEBUHNE_TREFFE w E FASTER Clear All M BUHNE_TREPPE_BACKS TAGE M BUHNE_PODEST_BACKS TAGE i BUHAME EMPORE M BUHNE_TREPPE_EMPORE lel Tru Il Ih Li bir JL hlr 8 Select the layers that you want to include in the DWG DXF drawing a Click Se ect Al to select all the layers that are listed b Click Clear All to deselect all layers 9 Click OK I mporting floorplans If you have an existing floorplan saved in bitmap bmp JPEG jpg or Targa tga format you can import it into your drawing and then continue to customize it within WYSIWYG Note You can view your imported floorplan on either of the Drawing tabs Wireframe or Ouad only in Plan view To ensure that your drawing is accurate when you import the floorplan you must first set its scale by measuring one of its components and then telling WYSI WYG how long the line you drew really is WYSIWYG adjusts the size of the floorplan image based on the measurement that you specify To import a floorplan Note Before you perform this procedure you must know the precise dimensions of at least one of the elements in your imported floorplan For
83. on other parts of your document as it renders You can use the arrow keys PAGE UP PAGE DOWN mouse or scroll bars to explore the picture as it is being produced The final image is saved to the destination you specified in step 2 A sample of a final rendered image is shown below fee Render Wizard Of x ZOOM IN 100 4 Tips Set up your shot accurately using a camera You can always click and drag in the right hand view to adjust your shot before you render Make sure you use the appropriate aspect ratio height vs width for the output device that you will be using to present the pictures For example TV is 4x3 normally 640x480 HDTV is 16x9 wysiwyg gt WYSIWYG Reference Guide Chapter 9 Presentation mode Presentation Pres mode contains all the necessary tools for creating professional printouts of your show document including reports plots and images In this chapter Layout tabs 261 Reports 262 New Plots 268 Layouts 284 Images 307 Worksheets 308 Pipe tapes 309 299 Presentation mode Release 16 0 ES wysiwyg March 2006 y ae Layout tabs Presentation mode Introduction Beneath the work area in each mode is a series of layout tabs These tabs provide various configurations of the views that you are working with To change layouts click the tab that corresponds to the layout that you want to use Presentation mode contains the following layout tabs WYSIWYG Refere
84. on the same file in multiple modes at the same time You can close additional main frames using the C ose tool at the top right corner of the screen Only the initial main frame triggers a file closure when this button is pressed For increased flexibility WYSIWYG supports multiple monitors You can carry main frames and popup frames across monitors To open a new main frame 1 From the Options menu choose New Window 2 Drag the title bar of the new window to place it where you want it To make the window bigger or smaller use the resize tab in the lower right corner of the window or the minimize and maximize tools in the top right 3 Repeat to open more new windows as required While each window or main frame functions independently all the show drawings and data are fully integrated wysiwyg March 2006 WYSIWYG user interface Shortcut bars Introduction Shortcuts are created for quick access to library items and view types among other things The shortcut bars are located on the left side of your screen Shortcut bars are mode and layout specific Each layout has designated shortcut bars Navigation Fixtures Accessores Concepts In general there are three types of shortcuts E navigation 7 library m views tools Navigation shortcuts The first type of shortcut is used for navigation purposes The navigation shortcuts are Navigation Views Navigation shortcuts store the
85. on your computer m Memory Size Select the amount of memory the renderer can use for temporary files Eight MB is the default and should be sufficient for most computers If you are running many applications you may want to decrease this number or if your computer has a lot of RAM you may want to increase this number m Write log files Select this check box to generate a log file during rendering ETC Interface tab Options on the 7C nterface tab affect the options that will allow you to monitor EDMX data directly Direct EDMX reception allows WYSIWYG Perform users to monitor EDMX data without the need to connect to a console with the Device Manager Application Options General File Options DirectsD OpenGL Toolbars Compatibility Render Options ETC Interface l Show SAF message notification box m ETCNet2 Version Select which ETCNet2 network version you want to monitor You can monitor only one version at a time m Allow EDMX reception Select this check box to enable direct EDMX reception in WYSIWYG m Show SAF message notification box Select this check box if you want to receive error messages in Link mode whenever there are problems with an ETC dimmer rack wysiwyg March 2006 Managing your WYSIWYG document Show Options window Show settings that are specific to the current show file such as show name designer and venue are set in the Show Options dialog box You might want to modify these se
86. perform this procedure you must have drawn at least one movement axis and attached at least one object to it For details see Drawing movement axes on page 136 O O N O O FP O N 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 WYSIWYG Reference Guide In Design mode in the shortcuts bar click Looks In the Looks shortcut area right click and then select New Look In the Name box type the name of the new look In the Fade time box type the fade time in seconds for this look Click OK Scroll to the bottom of the Looks shortcuts list Click on the shortcut for your new look Click the Moving Scenery Designer Tool icon n From the drop down list in the Scenery window select the appropriate movement axis Click the slider to advance the object to the position where you want it to start on the selected axis Note You can also use the Start box to type the object s position as a percentage of its full range of movement For example to show the object at the exact half way mark on the movement axis type 50 To create the next look in the Looks shortcut area right click and then select New Look In the Name box type the name of the new look In the Fade time box type the fade time in seconds for this look Click OK Scroll to the bottom of the Looks shortcuts list Click on the shortcut for your new look From the drop down list in the Scenery window select the appropriate movement axis
87. print the plot across multiple smaller sheets of paper To set up how you want the plot arranged on the sheets of paper refer to the Tile Printing tab on page 271 You can print your complete plot or specific pages of your plot based on the settings that you choose Note Objects outside the border are not printed even if they are within the margins of the page To adjust the margins refer to Modifying the properties of a plot on page 269 To print your plot 1 From the File menu choose Print Result The Print dialog box is displayed Print E4 Ea Printer Name WMCBAINSHP LazerJet 4050 T PS Properties Shatus Ready Type HP Lazeret 4050 Seres PS Where HP4050T Comment Print to file amp All Number of copies l Pages from l to 35 Selection mud mud tollat Cancel 2 From the Name drop down list choose the printer or plotter that you want to use WYSIWYG records the name that you choose for future reference and displays it as the default printer for plots To print all pages of a plot select A To print select pages of a plot select Pages and then enter the range in the from and to boxes 5 To print multiple copies of the pages select the value from the Number of copies list box 6 Click OK WYSIWYG Reference Guide 283 Presentation mode Release 16 0 y o gt Layouts Introduction The Layouts tab opens the layout design and
88. reposition it in the listing 5 Click the box to the left of the column name to set its visibility A check indicates that the column is currently visible Note You cannot make the column labeled Message Data Seguence Number invisible 6 Click OK To sort messages 1 Click the Display Log Options tool on the Message Log Options toolbar FA 2 Click the Display Log Options tab WYSIWYG Reference Guide 335 WYS Link Link mode 336 3 Release 16 0 Click the Sort tab Display Log Options Message Log Options o w Delete In each Key position select the column by which you want to sort and then click Ascending or Descending to set the sort order Click OK Result The Message Log will refresh with the newly sorted data To filter messages 1 2 3 Click the Display Log Options tool on the Message Log Options toolbar m Click the Display Log Options tab Click the Filter tab 21x Display Log Options Message Log Options Filter Sort Column Manager Current Display Option Default r MessageData 0 Sequence_Number Select the column that you want to filter Set the type of filter using the options Click OK Result The Message Log will refresh with the newly filtered data March 2006 WYSILink Link mode Exporting the Message Log You can export the Message Log to a comma delimited text file that you can view in most spreadsheet applications This feature is useful if
89. resting on the stage 4 Change the missing CAD coordinate to a height of 10 104 wysiwyg e March 2006 CAD mode Insert a riser by clicking the Riser button on the toolbar Although we are in a plan view the riser has been drawn at the height of 10 as specified in the missing coordinate dialog box 7 Change to a side view and you will see that the riser has been placed above the stage Tips You can use separate missing coordinates for focusing fixtures if you enter a value for the Focus coordinate when pressing TAB The advantage of this is that you can be adding pipes and other CAD elements at the specified missing CAD coordinate but still focus the fixtures at an elevation of 5 feet for example a If you select the Show head height circle check box and then type a value in the Head height box all subsequently focused fixture s beams will display both the coverage at the specified head height as well as the footprint of the beam on the surface below Command line The command line is an area in WYSIWYG where you can enter coordinates for the purpose of placing or editing objects in a document The placement of objects can often be done quicker and with more precision using the command line Generally coordinates are specified as X Y Z You can however insert coordinates using either two or three values When using two values the third value will be assumed from the missing coordinate For more information on
90. rotate the model on the target Click to clear the check box if you want the pan tool to rotate the camera around the target You can use the right left up and down arrow keys in addition to the mouse button to pan to the desired location m Fast Background Rendering Select this check box if you want to render the beams and not the background The background is displayed as a pasted image and the beams are rendered on top of the background 74 wysiw go V WYSIWYG Reference Guide Chapter 5 Managing your WYSI WYG document This chapter provides information on how to work with your WYSIWYG document In this chapter File menu 77 Options menu 83 WYSIWYG Viewer 98 75 Managing your WYSIWYG document 76 Release 16 0 wysiwyg gt gt March 2006 Managing your WYSIWYG document y o t File menu I ntroduction The File menu contains the basic commands required to manipulate your WYSIWYG document The File menu is the same in all the modes New command The New command creates a new show document If another show document is currently open you will be prompted to save changes to that document before a new untitled file is created Only one show document may be open at a time To create a new document From the File menu choose New Tip You can also use the New tool on the Standard toolbar C Open command The Open command opens a previously created show document If another show docum
91. selecting Custom select the time zone for your show When you select a time zone the current time as set on your computer is displayed in the Current Time box The GMT value is also shown Note The values that you enter on this tab are reflected in Step 6 of the Render Wizard For more information on the Render Wizard refer to Rendering on page 328 View Options dialog box View options set how objects are drawn and displayed in Wireframe and shaded views For more information on View options for Wireframe views refer to Modifying wireframe views on page 68 For more information on View options for shaded views refer to Modifying shaded views on page 71 User Options dialog box The User Options dialog box enables you to set up your working preferences You might for example want to specify how the snap operation will work or how much information will be displayed on your plot The settings that you choose are in effect for the entire time that you are working in WYSIWYG regardless of the show file that you are working on To open the User Options dialog box click Options gt User Options User tab Options on the User tab affect the current scene selection options pipe drawing mode missing co ordinate and focus mode settings WYSIWYG Reference Guide 93 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 16 0 User Options x User Draw Defaults Show Details Simulation Pipe drawing mode
92. the Default Idb file in the WYSIWYG Library folder If you need to reinstall WYSIWYG make a backup of Default ldb and replace the installed file with the backup to ensure that your changes are not lost To change the symbol for the selected fixture only select the fixture open its properties and then skip to step 5 Select the Fixtures library Navigate through the library and then select the fixture type for which you wish to change the symbol 4 Click the Property tool Result The properties dialog for fixture type opens 5 Click Change Symbol Result The symbol selection window is displayed 6 Select the new symbol Click Se ect Close the fixture property box I nformation layout You can place the following attributes around fixture symbols in WYSIWYG focus lamp lens notes position purpose spot unit channel circuit color gobo patch and dimmer The position visibility color and justification of these attributes can be set by editing the Label Layout J ust like symbols label layouts can be edited at an application level document level or selected fixture only level To change the Label Layout The following procedure changes the label layout for all instances of the selected fixture type in the document Similar procedures change the symbol at an application level or selected fixture only level 1 From the Library menu choose Browse Library Notes m To change the label layout at an ap
93. the browser window Click the file name in the browser and then click Open Result The Se ect DWG Settings dialog box is displayed Select DWG DVWX Settings FR Scale Layer DWG ADAF iz in Meters Millmeters C Feet ie Inches Custom Ii Dx UritTo fl Feet f ron Select the unit type used in the DWG DXF drawing Click the Layer tab and then choose the layers that you want to import from the DWG DXF drawing Note that you do not need to import all the layers at once Refer to Importing scenario on page 114 for suggestions on how to import the various layers Select DWG Settings FR Scale Layer mn WIBUHNE PODEST Select Al IBUHNE RUCK WAND Select l WIBLIMNE_TREPPE wIK RASTER Clear All M BUIHNE_TREPPE_BACKS TAGE MIBUHNE_ PODEST_BACKS TAGE i BUHME EMPORE M BUHNE_TREPPE_EMPORE Tru Il Ih Li bir JL hlr Click OK If you have blocks in your drawing you have the option to explode the blocks convert them into a library item or substitute WYSIWYG fixtures for the existing blocks Note 3D solids are automatically placed inside blocks by AutoCAD and assigned an abstract block name for example X1 The number of blocks that are found 111 CAD mode 112 Release 16 0 are dependent upon the number of solids that were in the AutoCAD file You will be prompted to determine what action to take for each type of block DWG Block Load Ea Blo
94. the dimensions of the riser WYSIWYG Reference Guide 131 CAD mode Release 16 0 To draw a riser in non interactive mode 1 From the Draw menu choose Riser Tip You can also click the Risertool sg on the Draw toolbar wan EI Lok Depth jaa Cancel Height zo Interactive In the Width box type the width for the riser The default value is 8 0 In the Depth box type the depth for the riser The default value is 0 In the Height box type the height for the riser The default value is 20 Click OK Result The riser is attached to the cursor Oo fF N 6 Drag the new riser to its position and then click to place it in the drawing To draw a riser in interactive mode Note To turn interactive mode on click the Interactive Mode button on the toolbar 1 From the Draw menu choose Riser 2 Click the starting point of the riser on the drawing The insertion point is the lower left corner of the riser 3 Drag up and to the right to stretch out the riser s shape Click to place the upper right corner of the riser In the dialog box that opens type the missing dimension of the riser Click OK Drawing cylinders Cylinders are solid 3D objects Cylinders can be used for creating platforms columns or any other cylinder shaped objects There are two ways in which you can draw cylinders m non interactive mode in which you type the exact height and diameter of the cylinder H interactive mode in which
95. the missing coordinate refer to The missing coordinate on page 104 The values that you specify in imperial mode are assumed to be in feet unless otherwise specified Similarly the values that you specify in metric mode are assumed to be in metres unless otherwise specified At any time you can specify values in both imperial and metric measurements for example 5 3 cm 6 The following example illustrates the many different ways of using the command line Example 1 In a plan view from the Draw menu choose Line From the sub menu choose Solid Dot Center Hidden or Spline Type 0 0 as the starting point of the line Result When you start typing the ComEdit toolbar is displayed Press ENTER to establish the first point of the line at the origin To set the next point at exactly X 5 and Y 5 type 5 5 and then press ENTER Result A new line segment is drawn and it assumes Z from the missing coordinate 6 To place the next point of the line 10 units to the right and 5 units up in Y from the last point type 10 5 and then press ENTER Result A new line segment is drawn 7 To place the next point at exactly 5 feet 3 metres and 6 inches from the last point type 5 3m 6 and then press ENTER Result A new line segment is drawn WYSIWYG Reference Guide 105 CAD mode Release 16 0 8 When you are finished drawing the lines right click and then select Finish Line Plot types All objec
96. uag 179 Color gobos and accessorileS FFF GG GG GG GG 202 The FHODL CaS amp s su au 4 Ghee OEE UE Ce EN O IO o we Yw A SEM Aw Ao SR GR eS O do G 208 ROMON Y 4 eC YE NER EFO ee ee eee Ge oe eon gs FF YNN 211 7 Data mode 213 Ea COULD as 2u65 CY EC Yd se ee Sk BY YI CD O Y ee Gow Sees o DC DY TOM 215 SpreadsheetS FFI es 216 WYSIWYG Reference Guide 7 Contents 8 9 10 ll Index Design mode Layout tabs Design toolS ug COMNCCOS yamap y NWR CN Palettes ET O 0 O O OY dees eee eons oe Creating looks Rendering Presentation mode Layout tabs REDONS aco cada eee Ow oe eee eS een GE New Plots ee ees La OU 2 ce RY GO o tee hea Goa ee YS o Images Worksheets Pipe tapes Live mode Layout tabs Connecting to consoles AutoPatch Visualization GL GG GG GG a AutofocuS 0000 GG GG LG GG GI I a Rendering WYSI Link Link mode Layout tabs Setting up WYSILink WYS Link mode ETCLink functions 00s Using the SuperPro Monitoring Tool SuperPro Monitoring Tool Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys Using AutoFocus with the HogPC Setting up AutoFocus to work with the HogPC Release 16 0 wysiwyg gt gt Chapter 1 I ntroduction This chapter introduces you to the WYSIWYG Reference Guide provides information for troubleshooting
97. used to transfer documents to AutoCAD or other compatible drafting applications Entities that can be exported The WYSIWG objects that can be exported are detailed in the following table The resulting DWG DXF entities are also shown WYSI WYG object DWG DXF entity Line 3D Polyline Spline Spline Point Point wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode WYSI WYG object DWG DXF entity Circle Circle Arc Arc Text Text Pipe Line Dimension Lines and MText All other objects PolyFace Mesh Note You cannot export truss Limitation The slope near the end of two lines may be slightly off To export to DWG DXF in 2D 1 2 6 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the File menu choose 2D DWG DXF Export In the xport dialog box navigate to the location where you want to save the exported file Ensure that the destination appears in the Save n box Export x Save in E Desktop e a c E My Documents b My Computer foe My Network Places File name J rititles Save as hype DwG ACAD DD Cancel EE In the File name box type the name of the exported file From the Save as type drop down box choose the exported file type There are a number of choices available for file type based on AutoCAD versions Click Save Result The Se ect DWG Settings dialog box is displayed Select DWG Settings x Scale DWG DF is in Meters Milimeters Feet ie Inches Custom Ji DXFUntTe fl Fee
98. wheel Click the custom color box or use the greyscale arrow to adjust your selection The fixture s output depends on its capabilities If the fixture has CMY or color mixing capabilities the output is the exact color you selected If the fixture is only equipped with a color wheel or a non mixing scroller the fixture will output the closest color to that selected based on the available colors on the wheel The same principal works if you select a color from the library by clicking the Library button The wheel scroller selection drop down list is as discussed for the gobo wheel All of the available colors are displayed in the order in which they appear on the wheel or scroll wysiwyg March 2006 Design mode Focus tool The focus tool works with fixtures that have variable pan and tilt parameters You must focus conventional fixtures in CAD mode To use the focus tool In the focus trackpad click hold and drag the mouse to control the position of the light beam The Home button resets the fixture to pan 50 and tilt 5090 To send the fixture s beam to a specific location click the Focus button and then click in your wireframe drawing Use the focus position drop down list to focus the beams of light toward one of the focus positions that you created in CAD mode Focus position drop down list Note The Focus tool does not take into account the current viewing position or fixture settings In one orientation dragg
99. working in CAD you are working in a 3D environment even in WYSIWYG Report Objects are drawn as 3D objects with width depth and height values using the Cartesian coordinate system of 3 working axes X Y and Z The point where the 3 axes meet is called the origin and the value of X Y and Z is O respectively 0 0 0 By default the origin is set at the center point of the WYSIWYG venue that you insert Inserting venues Is discussed in Drawing a venue on page 123 You can reset the origin to another point in your drawing you can set a user origin so that a different point will assume the values 0 0 0 To set the user origin 1 From the Tools menu choose Set User Origin Tip You can also use the Origin tool on the 7oolstoolbar n 2 Click a point on your drawing or type in the coordinates X Y Z that will assume the values 0 0 0 This point will remain 0 0 0 until you change it again To reset the user origin From the Tools menu choose Reset User Origin Result This resets the origin back to the WYSIWYG default Coordinate notation When entering coordinates in WYSIWYG you can specify a location or distance in either inch fractions to the sixteenth of an inch or millimeters For example you can specify a measurement of 1 6 3 16 which translates to 1 foot 6 and 3 16 inches To set default options 1 From the Options menu choose View Options 2 Click the Draw Options tab a wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode
100. workstations can be configured to run any combination of WYSIWYG Report or WYSIWYG Design In addition one workstation can run WYSIWYG Perform Note The following specifications are subject to change Software features Includes all the features of WYSIWYG Report Design or Perform 2D and 3D plotting of set and lighting designs Multiple working views including front back sides top bottom and isometric Comprehensive 3D library of fixtures accessories truss colors gobos props and so on Fully integrated paperwork and CAD systems Accurate simulation of conventional and automated fixtures OpenGL technology for improved beam simulation Light emitting surfaces allow simulation of lasers neon LEDs projection screens and so on Easy hook up to consoles and other DMX sources Auto Focus protocol lets WYSIWYG send color and focus data to consoles Rendering generates a photo realistic picture of your cue or lighting look Renderings include bounce and reflection from surfaces Animated renderings are available though certified service providers Multi monitor support 12 months of software and library updates included Upgrade suggestions Modes A faster processor improves responsiveness and rendering times Memory requirements depend on the size of the show Insufficient memory can seriously affect performance Add memory if there is excessive disk activity A high performance OpenGL accelerator card significantly improves
101. yoke positioning in relation to the hang structure where O is down hung 90 is side hung and 180 is over hung for example m Weight This is the fixture s weight A fixture s weight can only be modified through the Library Browser H Lamp Type This is the lamp type m Notes This is a custom notes field m Footnotes This feature is currently disabled m of Data Channels This is the total number of DMX channels required by the fixture of Color Frames This is the number of color frame slots that the fixture has m of Lamps This is the number of lamps required by the fixture m Circuit Type This describes what type of device the unit should be plugged into for example regular dimmer scroller power supply E Wattage This is the wattage in watts of the lamp 7 Model This is the fixture type m Cost This is the fixture s cost or rental cost This field is used to estimate a show budget A fixture s cost can only be modified through the Library Browser For more information on setting costs refer to page 189 a Status This is the fixture s status relative to your drawing If the fixture is HUNG it is in your drawing If a fixture is UNHUNG it is in the flight case In fixture count reports all fixtures are counted regardless of their status unless a filter is applied m Console This identifies which console is controlling the fixture This field references the binding setting
102. you can further set up how the item will appear within the placeholder by modifying the open contents wysiwyg gt March 2006 Presentation mode To adjust the contents 1 With the item selected from the Edit menu choose Open Contents Tip You can also click the Open Contents tool on the Layout Pres Edit toolbar ra Result A new window opens displaying your drawing and the item placeholder PlotObject Al x 2 Adjust the positioning of the placeholder as desired 3 Close the window New Plot items New Plot items are inserted into your layout using the options specified when you created the item You might want to modify these options if you wish to display or print the New Plot item in black and white for example To modify content properties of New Plot items 1 Select the New Plot item on the layout 2 From the Edit menu choose Content Properties Tip You can also click the Content Properties tool on the Layout Pres Edit toolbar Es Result The View Options dialog box is displayed For an explanation of the options that are available refer to Modifying the properties of a plot on page 269 Note Any options that you modify here are also updated in the New Plots view that you inserted Image items Special considerations should be given to printing images on layouts To maintain the integrity of the image WYSIWYG can maintain the aspect ratio of the image so as not to distort it To maintain aspect ra
103. you to view only the channels owned by that node Node Manager refer to Node Manager on page 340 About Dimmer see About Dimmer below About Dimmer Rack see About Dimmer Rack on page 339 About Dimmer The About Dimmer dialog box provides specific information about an individual dimmer such as the rack number slot number and type of dimmer The name of the connected node EDMX source and the source for setting the level are also displayed wysiwyg March 2006 WYS I Link Link mode To access dimmer information 1 From the WYSILink menu choose About Dimmer Tip You can also use the About Dimmer tool on the WYSILink toolbar oe Result The About Dimmer dialog box is displayed Dimmer i Status aK View Errore EDM Source Untitled Emphasis Console EDM Level 255 Level Source DMX Port A Output Level 255 Node Name Dimmer Room OMe Mode Type D20 amp F Rack H li Slot H li Scale ji Actual Load Recorded Load 0 2 To obtain dimmer information type or select the dimmer number and then click About Dimmer Tip You can also access the About Dimmer command in CAD Data and Live modes by right clicking on a fixture symbol This will open a slightly different dialog box Properties FR About Dimmer Intensity Dimmer E Ownership Wie Eras aK Status EDMX Source Ne EDMX Source EDMXLevel D Level Source Dix Part A Output Level n Node Name Type D20AF Rack St B
104. 00 and so on Click OK to close the Properties box Click Connect Result The status of the console changes to connected 315 Live mode 316 Release 16 0 15 Click OK to exit the Device Manager Note Once the console is running and connected to the WYSIWYG drawing operate the console as you would tn the live venue Run up channels and record cues using the console Remember that WYSIWYG does not store or save cues this is done in your console s memory Once the console information is set up you can set WYSIWYG to automatically connect to the console every time the file is opened Working with a console To set the console to connect on load 1 From the Live menu choose Device Manager Result The Device Manager dialog box is displayed Select the console Select the Connect on load check box Click OK to close the Device Manager To edit the patch binding settings 1 From the Live menu choose Device Manager Result The Device Manager dialog box is displayed Select the console Click Properties Select the port for which you want to change the patch binding Click Unbind Rebind as desired follow steps 9 through 12 in To connect to a console on page 314 O o FR O N To remove a console from the Device Manager 1 From the Live menu choose Device Manager Result The Device Manager dialog box is displayed Select the console that you want to remove Click Delete Result The console is rem
105. 169 between 33 and 6690 and it plays if the value is set between 170 255 between 66 and 100 Third channel Position If you have set a value within the bottom third level of the second channel between 1 and 33 then you can use the third channel like a slider advancing the video either backward or forward to the exact position that you want to see If the value on the second channel is set to any level above 84 between 33 and 100 then the third channel is disabled Ensure that the console device is connected to the patched video source For details on connecting a console see To connect to a console on page 314 To play the video from start to finish perform the following steps a Set the first channel to a value between 128 255 above 50 b Set the second channel to a value between 255 170 between 100 and 6690 To pause the video perform the following steps a Set the first channel to a value between 128 255 above 50 b Set the second channel to a value between 255 170 between 100 and 6690 and play the video to the spot where you want to pause it Then move the second channel to a value between 169 85 between 66 and 3390 to pause the video at this spot To control the progress of the video manually perform the following steps Set the first channel to a value between 128 255 above 5090 Set the second channel to a value between 84 1 between 33 and 190 oo Slid
106. 2 Type a name for the camera and a value in degrees for the field angle The default value for the field angle is 53 13 3 Click on the drawing to place the camera WYSIWYG Reference Guide 139 CAD mode 140 Release 16 0 4 Drag the cursor to aim the camera and then click to place the target Result The camera is inserted into your drawing and available in the camera selection list for shaded views and renderings Tip Use the missing coordinate tool while placing the camera and target Note The target of your camera Is easily identifiable in Wireframe views as defined by the marker points of the camera drawing Camera drawinos are invisible in shaded views because you are looking through the camera For this reason in this view you can choose to display the target For more information on displaying the target refer to Modifying shaded views on page 71 or see Using the Camera toolbar on page 140 Using the Camera toolbar After you have drawn a camera you can use the Camera toolbar in Shaded views to view your drawing through the camera of your choice You can also use this toolbar to guickly access the camera properties page and change properties such as the camera name and field angle To use the Camera toolbar 1 In CAD Design or Live mode click the Ouad or Shaded tab 2 Right click in the toolbar area and select Camera Result The Camera toolbar appears Click to reset Select the the camera Camera fro
107. 4 Click OK Setting up the HogPC Note For proper functionality install the HogPC software on your computer after you install WYSIWYG If the HogPC software was already installed before you installed WYSI WYG repair the installation using the HogPC installer or the Add Remove Programs utility in the Windows Control Panel To set up the HogPC Launch HogPC Load the show for which you want to use AutoFocus to cue Right click in the HogPC panel and then choose Config Select MIDI Yoke NT 2 for Input and MIDI Yoke NT 3 for Output and then click OK In the HogPC panel click Setup next to the Pig button Oo Ff o N Result The display changes in the first monitor window 6 Click nput Panel and then click M D n at the top You can now close the Input Panel setup window if desired Setting up WYSIWYG Due to some incompatibilities with certain motherboards MIDI Drivers are not installed with WYSIWYG even when you perform a full installation Therefore you must install them manually a wysiwyg March 2006 Using AutoFocus with the HogPC Note Close WYSIWYG before starting the installation To install MIDI drivers 1 Oo Ff o N 6 From the Start menu choose Settings and then choose Control Panel Click the Ada Remove Programs icon Scroll down to WYSIWYG and then click the Change Remove button Once the installer launches click the Modify option button and then click Next From th
108. 5 Click Set Current to activate your new scene Note If the current layer is not in the current scene you will not be able to add any objects 6 Click OK i wysiwyg gt gt March 2006 CAD mode Tip The Scene toolbar gives you guick access to all existing scenes and the Scenes database Click the tool on the left end of the Scene toolbar to access the Scene database ET Note In order for fixtures to be displayed in scenes both the layer on which the fixtures reside and the layer on which the respective hang structure resides if different must be included in the scene You cannot display fixtures without their hang structures WYSIWYG Reference Guide 161 CAD mode Release 16 0 y o gt CAD tools Break The Break command allows you to break an object into smaller components To break an arc into arcs 1 Select the arc that you want to break From the Tools menu choose Break and then choose Arc into arcs Type the number of desired break arcs and then click OK Result The arc is broken egually into the number of arcs specified To break an arc into lines 1 Select the arc that you want to break 2 From the Tools menu choose Break and then choose Arc into lines 3 Type the number of desired break lines and then click OK Result The arc is broken equally into the number of lines specified To break a circle into arcs 1 Select the circle that you want to break From the Tools menu choose Break and t
109. 6 0 View Options x General Draw Options View type Show Details okeane f Fler C Side 2 Front W Scrollbars On Right Front Back sometric m View Type The view types available are as discussed in Plot types on page 106 Tip The view type can be toggled using the tools on the CAD Options toolbar H Scrollbars On Select this check box to display the scrollbars on the bottom and left side edges of the wireframe view Click to clear this check box to turn the scrollbars off Show Details tab Options on the Show Details tab affect what and how fixture truss text and point information is displayed This tab is similar in function to the Show Details tab available in User Options For more information on the Show Details tab refer to Show Details tab on page 96 View Options h x General Draw Options View Type Show Details Fixture data shown on plot lw Unit W Channel Tw Spot I Colour W Lamp I Focus TT Gobo Circuit Patch Position D Purpose T Lens T Notes Dimmer Intensity lw Show Test Labels Point Size WW Enable Tooltips E Draw Symbols W Show beams for selected fixtures Show truss croass members Fixture tooltips lw Unit W Channel Tw Spot I Colour W Lamp I Focus TT Gobo Circuit Patch Position Purpose Parn Titt T Lens Notes l Spn FT Dimmer T Use User Details Use User Details
110. 6 0 Click on the shortcut for your new look Use the design tools to create your new lighting look You can set the color intensity zoom iris and add gobos If you are using moving lights you can also set the position of the lights 9 To create the next look in the Looks shortcut area right click and then select New Look 10 Inthe Name box type the name of the new look 11 In the Fade time box type the fade time in seconds for this look 12 Click OK 13 Scroll to the bottom of the Looks shortcuts list 14 Click on the shortcut for your new look 15 Use the design tools to create your new lighting look You can set the color intensity zoom iris and add gobos If you are using moving lights you can also set the position of the lights 16 Ensure that the Fade looks button is enabled so the look fades instead of jumping directly to the next look Tip If the button is not enabled then you can jump from one look to the next by clicking the look shortcuts in the shortcut bar Even if the button is enabled you can always jump to the next look by right clicking the look shortcut and selecting Jump to 17 To watch the fade from the first look to the second look click the shortcut for the second look The image fades over the period of time that you specified for the second look Tips For a more realistic view of the fading between looks click the Shaded tab a To jump directly to a specific look righ
111. A Ambient Light Use the slider to set the ambient light level This adjusts the overall light level where 0 is complete black and 100 is a bright room This does not affect the intensity of the fixtures in your lighting look d Shade Type Shade type does not affect the outcome of your rendering Rather it allows you to set your beam quality preference as you work through the Render Wizard Pan tool moves objects The Pan tool does not affect the outcome of your rendering Rather the tool rotates the model on the target if checked or rotates the camera around the target if unchecked Both settings help you to compose your image p Step 2 Output File Properties Render Wizard Step 2 Output File Properties Output Save As External Image PlEname Bitmap Size Horizontal X 320 Vertical Y 240 lt Back Finish Add Shortcut Ready Options in Step 2 affect where your final rendering is stored a Saveas Saves the final rendering as an external or an internal image If saved as an external image the result is stored on a drive as a bitmap bmp jpeg jpg or Targa file Click Browse to specify the file name and format If saved as an internal image the result is stored as an image in Presentation mode b Bitmap Type a value in pixels for the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the final image wysiwyg gt March 2006 WY
112. C The height of the room In WYSIWYG the default value is 300 Arena An arena venue Is a basic stadium space The following entries describe the parts of the arena The origin is set at the center of the venue on the floor or ice rink WYSIWYG Reference Guide 125 CAD mode 126 Release 16 0 A The width of the arena In WYSIWYG the default value is 1700 m B The depth of the arena In WYSIWYG the default value is 2500 C The total height of the arena In WYSIWYG the default value is 60 0 m D The width of the floor or ice rink In WYSIWYG the default value is 60 0 m E The depth of the floor or ice rink In WYSIWYG the default value is 1300 7 F The height of the stands or seating the portion of the total height that is occupied by seating or stands In WYSIWYG the default value is 40 0 Tent There are two types of tents that you can create in WYSIWYG frame tents and circus tents H Frame tents These tents are square or rectangular in shape and usually have two center poles Each wall is made of a single piece of fabric supported by as many poles as you specify 7 Circus tents These tents are styled after the classical Big Top of the circus They are more rounded in shape than the frame tent the walls comprising multiple sections each supported by as many poles as you specify The roof is held up by one center pole When drawing either type of tent you can specify many different pro
113. Cast ee Reference Guide software Lighting Design Software Manage Design and Simulate ee wysiwyg gt gt Reference Guide Product Release 16 0 March 2006 cast ee software Cast Group of Companies Inc 2002 2006 All rights reserved WYSIWYG Cast Software WYSIWYG Report WYSIWYG Perform WYSIWYG Design and Autofocus are trademarks of the Cast Group of Companies Incorporated All other trademarks and logos are the property of their respective owners March 2006 b Summary of changes Summary of changes The following table summarizes the changes included in the Release 16 WYSI WYG Reference Guide March 2006 Change location Chapter 4 page 58 Chapter 4 page 59 Chapter 5 page 117 Chapter 5 pages 136 139 Chapter 5 page 140 Chapter 6 page 225 Chapter 6 page 228 Chapter 6 page 229 Chapter 8 page 238 Chapter 8 page 242 Chapter 8 pages 248 249 Chapter 10 page 315 Chapter 10 pages 317 319 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Description of change Added the new Camera toolbar Updated Design toolbar to include Moving Scenery design tool Added section on new feature Importing floorplans Added sections on new moving scenery feature including drawing movement axes attaching axes to patch universes and attaching objects to axes Added section on using the new Camera toolbar Added section on patching movement axes in Data mode Added s
114. Channels 76 ABS fe 55 6 68 v 2 S 13 16 2 0 0 For more information on the status bar refer to Status bar on page 64 Simulation options The Simulation options affect how fixtures respond in Live mode and how the beams are displayed in shaded views Turning options off will yield faster simulation performance while compromising aesthetics For optimal results increase the processing power of your computer To change the simulation options 1 From the Options menu choose User Options Result The User Options dialog box is displayed WYSIWYG Reference Guide 323 Live mode 324 2 Release 16 0 Click the Simulation tab User Options x User Draw Defaults Show Details Simulation Smoke Cone Resolution 10 None Edge Lines Show at 30 a StickBeams Details I Colours IM Gobos IM Center 4 Focus T Convex Gobos Continuous Wheels lw Footprint Complex Gobos Tw Spin Wheels Shaded Beams Iw Gobo Rotation D Beam Angle lw Lrossfades lw Effects W Bitmap Gobos Make your selections and then click OK to exit a The smoke level affects the density of the cones of light b The cone resolution affects the shape of the footprint The higher the number the more elliptical the footprint the lower the number the more square the footprint Five is the fastest while 40 is a near perfect circle or ellipsis c Select the StickBeams check box to draw the center of the light beam for each fixtur
115. D drawing and vice versa However to make any drawing modifications you must return to CAD mode WYSIWYG Reference Guide 215 Data mode b o t Release 16 0 Spreadsheets 216 I ntroduction The Data mode displays your fixture information in spreadsheet format WYSIWYG compiles many spreadsheets that are accessible from the columns shortcut bar All of these spreadsheets contain the same information but are sorted and filtered differently Each column in the spreadsheet represents one fixture attribute The following information is compiled Data fields Note Data fields identified with an asterisk are non editable fields Spot This is an assigned identifier number usually used for automated fixtures A spot number is required for automated fixtures when using AutoFocus Channel This is the assigned control channel number you will use at your control console to control the fixture For moving lights the channel number recorded in WYSIWYG is the starting channel number Position This is the hanging position for the fixture Positions must be entered in the Position Manager Unit The unit number identifies the fixture s location on its respective hanging position Type This is the fixture name Lens This is the lens type Hookup This identifies the component of a multi circuit fixture or other device such as a scroller for example intensity control Purpose The purpose is a custom
116. Data Error Error Status Motification Trigger Reflect in Notification Status Bar Dialog Indicator Dimmers gt Circuit Fatches gt Circuit Channels gt Circuit Fatches gt Dimmer Channels gt Dimmer Channels gt Patch Spots gt Patch Missing Position Missing Unit Missing Circuit Mame Migsing Circuit Missing Dimmer Missing Patch Missing Channel Missing Spot Migsing Colour Missing Gobo VT TT TT TT S 80 80 lt 1 81 81 XI XI VT 1 TT TT S 80 80 41 5181 XI lt I For more information on data errors refer to Errors on page 231 Regional settings tab Options on the Regional settings tab set the geographic location of your show You can either select the country and city or enter the latitude and longitude of the location These settings are primarily used for renderings that use environmental options wysiwyg gt gt March 2006 Managing your WYSIWYG document Show Options x Document Summary Show Info Object Defaults Object Settings Report Data Eror Regional Settings Select City Country Canada City Toronto lw Custom Custom Longitude Latitude Time zone PAETA Curent Time GMT Time Ss Cancel E Custom Select this check box to enter the latitude and longitude values in the Latitude and Longitude boxes respectively Click to clear this check box to select a country and city from the Country and City drop down lists respectively m Time Zone After
117. Entering and modifying objects in the Flight Case on page 200 I nserting color in Data mode To insert color in Data mode 1 Click in the color field of the fixture for which you want to assign color 2 Right click and choose Pick value from the list WYSIWYG Reference Guide 219 Data mode 220 Release 16 0 Use the pull down menu to select a color among those you have already used in your plot or click Library to open the color library Tip You can bypass steps 2 3 and type in the value if you already know the color that you want to assign for example R54 L112 and so on WYSIWYG accommodates multiple color entries for one fixture as follows a Colorl amp Color2 yields two color frames with one gel in each a Colorl Color2 yields one color frame with two gels in it a Colorl Color2 yields one color frame with one split gel in it Data filters Data filters are used for locating or isolating selective blocks of information When a data filter is applied to a spreadsheet only the units that met the filter criteria are displayed Filters are applied to columns of data To apply a data filter 1 2 In the spreadsheet right click on the column heading you want to filter Choose Add Data Filter Result A dialog box is displayed showing the column name and the available filters Specify Filter Ei E3 Filter Filter column Unit Text ad Contains text Exact match Cancel
118. Focus position properties Options on the Focus Position tab affect the alignment and style of the selected focus position General Appearance Light Emission Point Focus Position Fixture Hang Structure Truss Label Focus Positior Italics aera pamine M Align to View w Show Label Horizontal Justification f Left Centre Right Vertical Justification Top C Cente Bottom x EE vss gt pm You can modify the justification height and presentation of a focus position For a description of the justification and presentation type properties refer to the Text label tab on page 152 Focus positions are unique in that you can adjust the focus position coordinates without actually moving the focus position on the drawing The X Y and Z coordinate is the coordinate of the location in 3D space where the focus position is to lie Ouick focus Ouick focus assigns a focus position or Pan and Tilt angle to the selected fixture WYSIWYG Reference Guide 183 CAD mode 184 Release 16 0 To assign a focus position 1 From the Tools menu choose Guick Focus Tip You can also click the Quick Focus tool on the Tools toolbar Click on the desired focus position This will set that position as the destination for the next fixtures you select Click on each fixture that you want focused to that position Right click anywhere in the wireframe view and then choose Finish Guick Focus To assig
119. G Network and WYSIWYG Learn systems are composed of a server and The Server is a small application that installs the SuperProServer service This service is reguired to detect the WYSIWYG Learn or Network dongle a list of current services on a workstation can be viewed under Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services You need to install the WYSIWYG Server on only one computer on the network A Learn or Network Client enables the software to function over the network The Client must be installed on all desired workstations WYSIWYG Learn can run up to 10 clients However the number of clients for WYSI WYG Network is restricted based on the configuration purchased March 2006 Installation configuration activation and registration A typical WYSIWYG Network Learn setup is illustrated in the diagram on the following page All computers running Network Learn components must be on the same network and therefore have the same network ID and subnet mask Network dongle Learn Network Client Learn Network Client Network services Windows XP Services are supported in Windows XP Services start running aS soon as your computer is turned on regardless of whether the user is logged in The service begins automatically each time the workstation is restarted and runs in the background without any prompting from the user The service may also be started manually the choice is available during the installation process Wi
120. G reports For more information on the display of this data refer to page 217 m Catalog The code that is used by the manufacturer to identify the fixture m Manu The manufacturer s code for those fixtures that are Autofocus compatible Conventional fixtures do not have a manufacturer s code The default value is O u Prod The product code for those fixtures that are Autofocus compatible Conventional fixtures do not have a product code The default value is O m Use default Select this check box to indicate that the default settings for Prod and Manu 0 0 are to be used m URL The internet address of the manufacturer m Open If an internet address is shown click this button to open the Web page of the manufacturer WYSIWYG Reference Guide 189 CAD mode 190 Release 16 0 Options tab The boxes on this tab indicate various options about the selected fixture such as the number of channels and the available channels Based on the fixture selected the options shown on this tab vary For example if you choose a light like the Vari Lite VL5 the options on the left side of the window affect those on the right side In this case based on the options that you select on the left side the hookup for this fixture may differ EE Mode 4 Circuits Control Dimmer Estemal Number of Channels IE Shortcut Close Insert Multiple u Mode Select the mode in which you want to configure the fixture
121. In the dialog box that opens browse to the location where you want to save the file Ensure that the destination appears in the Save n box In the File name box type a name for the file In the Save as tyoe box choose the saved file type There are a number of choices available Click Save Note WYSIWYG allows you to save an object or group of objects contained within your document as a separate file To save an object 1 2 Ensure the object s to be saved are selected From the File menu choose Save As Result The following dialog box is displayed Save As x Full Document Selected Objects Fasent 2 se 000 as Basepaint f Select Fasepaint with mouse Cancel Click Full Document to save the current document to a new file name file type or new destination You are prompted to enter the destination and file name of the file Click Selected Objects to save the selected object s as a separate WYSIWYG wyg document Click Use 0 0 0 as Basepoint to align the incoming drawing at 0 0 0 with the existing drawing Click Select Basepoint with mouse to use the mouse to select the basepoint for the merge of the CAD drawings Click OK wysiwyg March 2006 Managing your WYSIWYG document Template files The WYSIWYG Save As command lists a file type called WYT WYSIWYG template files are similar to the type of template file you may use on your word processor to set up fax cover sheets me
122. Insert menu choose Image Tip You can also use the mage tool from the Layout Pres Insert toolbar 287 Presentation mode 288 Release 16 0 2 Click and drag a window placeholder on the page where you want the item to appear Result The Se ect mage View to be referenced dialog box appears Select Image iew tyybe referenced Ei x Cancel 3 Select the image that you want to add to the layout and then click Select Result The image appears within the placeholder as drawn To insert CAD items onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose CAD Tip You can also use the CAD item tool from the Layout Pres Insert toolbar 2 Click and drag a window placeholder on the page where you want the item to appear Result The CAD item which is referenced from CAD mode appears within the placeholder as drawn By default CAD items appear in plan view and at a scale of l 16 1 To insert data items onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Data Tip You can also use the Data tool from the Layout Pres nsert toolbar 2 Click and drag a window placeholder on the page where you want the item to appear Result The Se ect Data View to be referenced dialog box appears Select Data Yiew to be referenced fs E Ed All Data Sortable Focus Channels Eenes Dimmers Hanging Positions Purpose Fixture Type Colour Circuit Hame Circuit Number wattage Gobo 3 Selec
123. Note Since these files are saved outside of the show document they can be applied to reports in any WYSIWYG show files To apply a heading file 1 Select the report for which you want to apply the heading file 2 Right click and choose Redesign headings Result The Report Headings Editor opens 3 From the File menu choose Open Result You are prompted to save changes 4 Click No Result The Load heading file dialog box is displayed 5 Browse to find the heading file that you want to apply wysiwyg 2 March 2006 Presentation mode 6 Click Open Result The saved heading file is applied Save and close the Report Headings Editor You are prompted to load the new heading file name Click Yes You are prompted to apply the headings to all the reports in the document Click Yes to apply the change to all reports Click Wo to change only the chosen report Column widths You can change the column widths in the report A double headed arrow appears when you float the cursor between the column separations at the top of the report Double click the column headings to have the column resize to fit auto fit the contents Show information The edit fields in the show info window are venue show designer and assistant The entries in these fields appear in the headings of all reports and in the WYSIWYG default title block for plots To input show info 1 From the Options menu choose Show Options 2 Click the Show nfo tab Show O
124. Plots View O a A Scenes toolbar oom fit Loom in o0om out oom window Pan Current scene Standard toolbar 3 New document i Open Li Save i Print preview Print E View options WYSIWYG user interface 61 WYSIWYG user interface 62 Tools toolbar vw Group Ungroup Move ats Rotate mm Mirror gt Break un Convert 2 Divide Bl Extrude 1 Fillet wy Distance so Origin i Quick tools Quick focus 1 Dimension Universes toolbar Universe View toolbar Zoom fit oom in Zoom out 0om window Pan Left Right Up Down Previous Next Render Wizard Refresh Frame popup As Bes E S 3AF WYSI Link toolbar Current device Node manager Wwy S Link o Monitor Al Gl e About Error dimmer About mode rack Release 16 0 wysiwyg March 2006 WYSIWYG user interface To hide and display toolbars using the toolbar list 1 Right click in the toolbar area Result The toolbar list is displayed Click on the name of the toolbar that you wish to display A check mark to the left of the toolbar name indicates it is currently displayed Repeat to display or hide multiple toolbars Tip From the toolbar list select 7oo bars to open the Application Options dialog box In this box you can choose multiple toolbars and configure other screen options such as the status bar and tooltips To hide and display to
125. Point Size box is the size at which points are printed While it is possible to print your drawing directly from the CAD mode it is preferable to print plots from the Presentation mode Presentation mode includes the ability to lay out your plot with multiple views reports borders and title blocks Refer to Printing layouts on page 306 for more information about printing plots WYSIWYG Reference Guide 91 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 16 0 Print Preview command Print Preview displays the document as it will look when printed This allows you to double check that the printed output is exactly what you want Print Setup command The Print Setup dialog box allows you to choose the print destination the page orientation and size and paper tray if applicable The print destination may be a physical printer or it may be a file type or fax program for example Paper size and source options will correspond to the printer type selected Send command The Send command allows you to send your document to someone by e mail You must be connected to the Internet to use this feature WYSIWYG will create a new message in your default mail program with the current WYSIWYG file attached Recent file shortcuts The list of recent files at the bottom of the File menu gives you guick access to the last four files opened This list will continually update as show documents are opened If the file you are looking for is not on this lis
126. Radiosity Quality Fast Medium Best Bounces 19 3 lt Back Finish Add Shortcut Ready Options in Step 5 affect the radiosity level Radiosity is defined as the combined processes of emission transmission and absorption of rays or reflecting beams of light When using Radiosity it is not necessary to use ambient lighting a Radiosity To generate a rendering that uses radiosity select the Radiosity check box and then choose from the available radiosity options Fast radiosity results in a rendering with constant flat lighting Each subsequent option shows more calculated lighting The number of bounces determines how many levels of reflection are permitted 255 Design mode 296 Release 16 0 b Disable Ambient Light Select the Disable Ambient Light check box to ignore the ambient light settings from step 1 Step 6 Environmental Options Render Wizard Step 6 Environmental Options r Environmental Lighting Date YYYY MM DD 2003 E 23 Time HH MM AM 4 146 PM GMT Difference 00 00 Long 0 00 Lat 0 00 Light Quality Clear Sky Overcast Soft Shadow l Enable soft shadow lt Back Finish Add Shortcut Ready Options in Step 6 affect the presence and quality of environmental or outdoor lighting Note that for environmental lighting to have an effect your show must not be contained within a venue a Environmenta
127. SILink is offline If an error is generated and corrected while WYSILink is offline these messages will not appear in the Message Log If an error has been generated when WYSI Link Is offline and the message is not cleared the Pending message will appear in the Message Log when WYSI Link comes online WYSIWYG Reference Guide 333 WYSI Link Link mode Release 16 0 Errors are indicated not only in the Message Log but also in the Wireframe and Data views Fixtures assigned to dimmers that have an error are highlighted in red in the spreadsheet and by a red symbol in Wireframe views Message Log options Message log options affect how messages are processed and received To access message log options 1 From the WYSILink menu choose Message Log Options Tip You can also use the Message Log Options tool on the Message Log Options toolbar Result The Properties dialog box is displayed 2 Click the Message Log Options tab Properties 2x Display Log Options Message Log Options Message options r Shaw I messages a Ending Messages on CM GE ee Pending messages only 1 dayls r Auto Save Options w Auto Save Al messages Auto save interval ho minutes l Show message notification box Play a sound when new messages arrive M Enable filtering sorting and column managing at startup OK Cancel Use the Message Log Options to configure the Message Log a Use the Delete se
128. SIWYG Reference Guide Design mode Step 3 Atmospheric Options Render Wizard Step 3 Atmospheric Options Atmospheric Options C None Haze C Smoke Keseesoceseo Density nyn 0 20 100 lt Back Finish Add Shortcut Ready Options in Step 3 affect the atmospheric conditions in your rendering a Atmospheric Options The options that you set here affect the atmospheric conditions that are visible in your final rendering To simulate atmospheric dust or fog select Haze For additional opacity select Smoke a Density Use the slider to set the visibility of the haze particles A setting of 0 indicates that the particles cannot be seen A Granularity Use the slider to set the granularity of the smoke This setting affects how fine smoke particles are This option is available only if you choose Smoke under Atmospheric Options Step 4 Shadow Presence Options Render Wizard Step 4 Shadow Presence Options Shadows Shadows projected on objects m Presence Subtle Bold lt Back Finish Add Shortcut Ready Options in Step 4 affect the projection of shadows in your rendering a Shadows Select how you want shadows to be projected in the final rendering If you choose None then no shadows are calculated by WYSIWYG that is 293 Design mode 204 Release 16 0 objects in the path of the light beam
129. Select the fixtures for which you want to assign the specific color value 2 Click on the desired palette shortcut Result The fixtures are assigned the recorded copy value If the fixture has CMY or color mixing capabilities the output is the exact color that you selected If the fixture is only equipped with a color wheel or a non mixing scroller the fixture outputs the closest color to that selected based on the available colors on the wheel wysiwyg March 2006 Design mode b Creating looks Saving lighting looks Changes that you make with the design tools update the currently selected look The name of the currently selected look is displayed at the top of the working area Before making changes always check that the currently selected look is the one that you want to modify To create a new lighting look In the shortcuts bar click LooKs In the Looks shortcut area right click and then select New Look In the Name box type the name of the new look A N In the Fade time box type the fade time in seconds for this look This is the amount of time that it takes to fade to this look when you click on it from another look in the shortcut bar For more information see Cross fading between lighting looks below Click OK Scroll to the bottom of the Looks shortcuts list Click on the shortcut for your new look oN O o Use the design tools to create your new lighting look Tip To build o
130. YG gobo to be visible in wireframe views The associated gobo is used in lieu of the bitmap or jpeg image In shaded views and renderings only the custom gobo footprint is visible Custom gobos do not break up the cone of light To create a custom gobo 1 From the Library menu choose Gobo Wizard General gobo details x Enter general information for this gobo and specify paths where you can later find it Custom gobo name Add Modify Pelete W Make this item available to other documents 4 Pack Cancel Type the custom gobo name Add or modify the path Note The path is the location in the library where the gobo will be stored A gobo assigned to the path Custom Corporate_Logos would be available in the custom section of the gobo library in a sub category named Corporate Logos 4 To make this gobo available to other documents check the appropriate box wysiwyg March 2006 10 11 WYSIWYG Reference Guide CAD mode Click Next Type the path to the custom artwork file or use the browser to open the image The image file must be in either bitmap or jpeg format Result A preview of the image appears in the pane on the right and the image s attributes are recorded in the box on the left Click Next Result A short description of the next step appears You will need to choose an existing library gobo to be displayed when the custom artwork cannot be displayed Click Next Naviga
131. a Scale nis Actual Load 0 Recorded Load Cancel Note The Ownership box lists all network devices such as consoles and nodes that are attempting to control the specified dimmer About Dimmer Rack The About Dimmer Rack dialog box allows you to choose a specific dimmer rack on a specific ETCNet2 DMX node The status of the input ports A and B number of dimmer modules on the rack and the dimmer type are displayed on this dialog box WYSIWYG Reference Guide 339 WYSI Link Link mode Release 16 0 To access rack information 1 From the WYSILink menu choose About Rack Tip You can also use the About Rack tool on the WYSILink toolbar W Result The About Dimmer Rack dialog box is displayed Mode List Enter Rack i 5 Dimmer Room OMe Mode NO i e Online Yes Ambient Temperature 78F 25 8C Type SFA 2 Number OF Modules li 2 DM Part A Enabled Phase A volts i 21 DM Part B Disabled Phaze B volts ii 22 ii 22 Advanced Features Enabled Phase C volts Frequency BG 2 Select a node the rack number and then click About Node Manager In Live mode WYSI Link includes the Node Manager tab on the Device Manager dialog box In this dialog box you need to discover connected nodes before other functions will work To access the Node Manager 1 From the WYSILink menu choose Node Manager Tip You can also use the Node Manager tool on the WYSILink toolbar Result The Node Manager dialog bo
132. a DMX patch universe To move the object with a DMX control you first have to attach the movement axis to a named DMX patch universe that you have created in Data mode Note For information on creating a patch universe see To create a new patch universe on page 223 Click to select the axis that you want to attach to the patch universe Right click and select Properties Click the Axis tab Click the DMX Patch option button From the Universe drop down box select the DMX patch universe to which you want to attach the axis o fF Oo N In the Address box type the starting DMX address Click OK To attach a movement axis to a motion patch universe To move the object with a motion control system you first have to attach the movement axis to a named motion control patch universe that you have created in Data mode Note For information on creating a patch universe see To create a new patch universe on page 223 Click to select the axis that you want to attach to the patch universe Right click and select Properties Click the Axis tab Click the Motion Patch option button From the Universe drop down box select the motion control patch universe to which you want to attach the axis Oo Ff o N 6 From the D drop down list select the ID on the motion control system with which you want to associate this axis Note The motion control system must be connected to your computer for the ID to appear in this
133. a es Dot m p Center E ps Dash You can create a double line from a single line by modifying the properties of a line For more information on creating double lines refer to page 282 After you have drawn a line you can choose to add arrows to one or both ends of the line The default is none For more information on adding arrows refer to page 283 Note When you add objects such as lines to your plot they are not added to your drawing in CAD mode Drawing text Drawing text in a New Plots view is similar to drawing text in CAD mode You can access the Text tool from the Draw menu or on the New Plot Options toolbar T For more information refer to Drawing text labels on page 130 Notes m When you add an object such as text to your plot it is not added to your drawing in CAD mode m True type fonts are not supported in New Plots WYSIWYG Reference Guide 277 Presentation mode Release 16 0 I nserting symbols You can insert symbols that are not associated with any object in CAD mode This allows you to represent the fixtures when you draw a key or want to show the position of a boom in a plan view for example You can access the Symbol tool from the Draw menu or from the New Plot Options toolbar Ey To learn how to insert symbols see To insert objects from the library on page 120 In the New Plots view the Library Browser contains only the Symbol library Editing objects 2 8 A number of tools
134. a legend 298 Editing objects 142 Editing symbols 298 EDMX 88 EDMX address 195 Entering data in the spreadsheet 217 Environmental options 256 Errors 231 ETC interface tab 88 ETCLink 338 ETCLink functions 338 Ethernet 326 Exit WYSIWYG 82 Export to DWG DXF 114 Extrude 167 F Facet resolution 91 Facet splitting 91 Fading between lighting looks 247 Field angle 191 File menu 77 Fillet 168 Filter Data filter 220 Find tool 218 Fixture Details tab 272 Fixture layout 197 Fixture notation 197 Fixture properties Photometrics 190 Fixture snap 108 Fixtures 179 Flight Case 208 Floor mount 171 176 Floorplans adding 117 Hiding after importing 118 Flow control 83 Focus Design tool 241 Focus data field 216 Focus position 201 Focusing fixtures 182 Footnotes data field 217 Frame size 202 Frame tents 126 French curve 128 Front view 106 Full screen mode 52 G Gels 240 Inserting 203 wysiwyg March 2006 Inserting multiple 219 General object properties 146 Gobo data field 216 Gobo wheels Custom 204 Gobos Custom 206 Design tool 240 Inserting 203 Graphics 307 Grid options 95 Group By option 265 Group tab 143 Grouping 143 H Hang structure 171 182 Hanging 179 Hanging fixtures 179 Hanging truss 176 Hardware acceleration 85 Hatch style 200 Header Report 264 Hidden line 128 Hide Floorplan 118 HogPC Connecting Autofocus to 361 H
135. ace the next fixture To use pipe snap 1 From the Tools menu choose Snap and then choose Pipe Snap Tip You can also click the Pipe snap tool on the CAD Options toolbar 2 Insert fixtures as described above With pipe snap active the fixtures are automatically hung at the pre defined interval To set the snap interval 1 From the Options menu choose Show Options 2 Click the Object Settings tab Show Options E x Document Summary Shaw Info Object Defaults Object Settings Report Data Error Regional Settings Hang Options Tw AutoLnit lw Snap Interval jie lw Enforce Spacing fro Minimum Spacing Symbol Alignment T Line up symbols ra Line eight Emission poe Manu Joos O15 ua ga Weight Prad Shading Options Facet Splitting Facet resolution prse We git Cylinder Sphere Segments hs Segments js Cancel 3 Select the Snap check box if it is unchecked and then type the new value in the Interval box 4 Click OK WYSIWYG Reference Guide 181 CAD mode Release 16 0 To set an interval for a specific pipe 1 Right click the pipe Click Properties Click the Hang Structure tab Properties i l BJR General Appearance Light Emission Hang Structure Fipe Hame Lx B Tw AutoLnit Hang Options lw Snap Number of fixtures n Fixture weight 0 00 lbs cence aeb Click to clear the Use Document Defaults check box Select
136. ails tab define the information to be shown in the tooltips when tooltips are enabled WYSIWYG Reference Guide 229 Data mode View Options il Inverze Dis lay Show Details To Unit FM Channel Spot E Cocu WP Lamp PO Focus Ti Gobo creut FF Patch WD Postion IO Purpose I PanecTilt Lens TS Notes WU Spit E Dimmer Cancel Release 16 0 m Use User Details Select this check box to reference the settings in User Options under the Options menu Click to clear the check box and specify the tooltips that you want displayed 230 wysiwyg gt March 2006 b gt t Errors Introduction Data mode WYSIWYG sports an on the fly error checking engine This means that as you are putting your lighting design together WYSIWYG is continually checking for data errors such as multiple dimmers in one circuit multiple channels in one dimmer and various missing information At any time you can view the error reports that are available on the rrors shortcut bar Error reports that have errors displayed will have an exclamation mark after their name You can edit fix these errors on the spot editing data on the error reports works the same way as the data spreadsheets explained in the previous section As soon as you fix an error in an error spreadsheet the entries are disabled to show that it has been fixed An indicator on the status bar signals you when your document contains errors This feature ca
137. ale The scale ratio in inches and feet at which the key should be printed If the scale that you want to use for printing is not displayed select Custom On paper The scale ratio that you want to use on a paper copy of the layout Real World The real measurement for the scale ratio that you specify in the On paper box For example you might want to use a scaling of one inch in a paper copy of your layout However this one inch measurement translates to a realistic measurement for example 3 feet Layout Tools Placeholders You can move and resize placeholders at any time To resize a placeholder 1 2 Click to select the presentation item Click and drag the marker points of the placeholder to resize it Note Resizing a placeholder affects the content that is displayed You might have to edit the scale of the contents or revisit open contents To move a placeholder 1 2 Click to select the presentation item When a small grey rectangle appears on your cursor click and hold the left mouse button and drag the placeholder to the desired location Release the mouse button Tip Use the gridlines of the presentation view to line up placeholders To copy a placeholder and its contents 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Click to select the presentation item When a small grey rectangle appears on your cursor press and hold the CTRL key Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the copied item to the des
138. alled on your computer is displayed in the Current Level box The serial code of your dongle is shown in the Serial Code box In the Upgrade Code box type your upgrade code and then click Upgrade Exit WYSIWYG and then restart your computer Launch WYSIWYG Result The new level of software Is displayed in the upper right corner of the WYSIWYG user interface Note If you would like to purchase an upgrade but are unsure of who to contact click More nfo to obtain a list of WYSIWYG dealers 42 wysiwyg gt March 2006 Installation configuration activation and registration y o t Subscriptions I ntroduction Your subscription to WYSIWYG is valid for a specific period of time You can easily view and renew your subscription from within WYSIWYG Obtaining subscription details Details of your subscription are stored within WYSIWYG To obtain details From the Help menu choose About WYSIWYG Result The month and year that your subscription expires is displayed in the Subscription Expire Date box DT 3 x About Licenze Agreement Www Version 1 00 05 155 Release L CAST Lighting Limited Toronta Canada Copyright 1994 2002 all rights reserved Serial Code Subscription Expire Date J un 002 Renewing your subscription Your WYSIWYG subscription is valid for a specific period of time You can continue to use WYSIWYG beyond your subscription expiry date however you will not be a
139. am Files WYSIWYG Server wysiwyg March 2006 5 8 9 Click Next Installation configuration activation and registration Result The Se ect Program Folder window appears WYSIWYG Learn Network Setup Ea Select Program Folder Please select a program folder Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below ou may type a new folder name or select one from the existing folders list Click Next to continue Program Folder WYSIWYR Network Serve Existing Folders Administrative Tools dobe Adobe Acrobat 4 0 Dell Applications Dell Solution Center lnetallehreld lt Back Cancel El Select a program folder for the shortcut The default is WYSIWYG Server Click Next Result The Start Copying Files window appears ARIAL Learn Network Setup Ed Start Copping Files Review settings before copying files Setup has enough information to start copying the program files If you want to review or change any settings click Back If you are satished with the settings click Next to begin copying files Current Settings WB Dongle Service will be started automatically lnetallehreld WwswyB Network server will be installed in C Program Fester Siwr G Network Serm Ww Sw Network Server program group will be created under Start menu lt Back Cancel w My N nil Review the installation settings and then click Next to beg
140. ample press TAB to enter the missing coordinate References to manuals appear in italic font For example for additional information on working with recorded loads please refer to your Sensor CEM User Manual Introduction Release 16 0 b Troubleshooting Introduction If you have problems using your software please consult the following resources 7 the contents of this manual or the online Help available from within WYSIWYG m the Cast Software Web site at www cast soft com If these resources are insufficient please contact Technical Support Help from Technical Support For assistance with a problem contact Technical Support directly at one of the offices identified below When calling for help please have the following information ready m the level of WYSIWYG that you are using Report Design or Perform m software version from the Help menu choose About WYSIWYG a the kind of computer that you are using processor and speed amount of memory graphics card operating system 5 DMX interface type if applicable North America Cast Software Technical Support 35 Ripley Avenue Unit 1 Toronto ON M6S 3P2 Canada Phone 1 877 989 2278 Fax 1 416 597 9594 E mail techsupport ocast soft com Web site www cast soft com United Kingdom A C Lighting Ltd Technical Sales amp Support Centauri House Hillbottom Road High Wycombe Bucks HP12 4HO UK wysiwyg March 2006 In
141. an choose between applying a custom color or a custom texture you cannot choose both In addition to either color or texture you can also apply material Choose one of the following options m Use Layer Rendering Color Check this option to set the object s color for shaded views and renderings to the same as the properties of the layer on which the object resides For more information on layer properties refer to Layer properties on page 158 m Use Custom Color Click this option and then use the color button to set a specific color for the object s m Use Texture from Library Click this option to apply a texture from the library to the selected object s In the resulting window navigate to and select the desired texture You can apply textures to venues drape lines surfaces risers and walls Click the ellipsis button to change the selected texture file WYSIWYG Reference Guide 147 CAD mode Release 16 0 148 Use Texture from File Click this option to apply to the selected object s a texture that you have created and saved in either bitmap or jpeg format In the resulting window navigate to and select the desired file You can apply textures to venues surfaces risers and walls Click the ellipsis button to change the selected texture file If you have chosen a texture option then you can also set the properties of the texture as follows Tile Click this option button if you want to have the t
142. an easily reverse the error by using the Undo tool available in WYSIWYG The name of the Undo tool changes based on what the last action was for example if the last action was a Paste operation the Undo tool will be Undo Paste You can use Undo to reverse the last series of actions until the tool is greyed out If you decide that you did not want to undo an action use the Redo tool Similar to the Undo tool the name of the Redo tool changes based on what the last undo action was 142 wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode To use the Undo tool From the Edit menu choose Undo Tip You may also use the Undo tool on the Edit toolbar 3 Result The last action you performed is reversed To use the Redo tool From the Edit menu choose Redo Tip You may also use the Redo tool on the Edit toolbar Result The last undo action you performed is reversed Grouping ungrouping Grouping objects together ensures that they will always be selected as one For example you may want to group an object and its corresponding focus position If you relocate the object in the drawing the focus position will automatically follow as will all the light beams pointing at it saving you time and work To group objects 1 Select the objects to be grouped 2 From the Edit menu choose Group Tip You may also use the Group tool on the 7oolstoolbar ws To ungroup objects 1 Select the grouped objects 2 From the Edit menu choose Ungroup Tip You m
143. anager Window Testing the connection Before performing this procedure ensure that all three applications MIDI OX HogPC and WYSIWYG are open To test the connection 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide In the Device Manager select the Hog Il and then click Connect The status changes to Connected Repeat step 1 for the standard MIDI device and then close the Device Manager Resize your WYSIWYG window so that you can see at least part of the MIDI OX window From the Live menu in Live mode open all the Designer tools Intensity Focus Color Gobo Prism Zoom and Iris 363 Using AutoFocus with the HogPC Release 16 0 5 In WYSIWYG select at least one of the fixtures in your show and then click Fu in the Intensity tool Result The selected fixture s intensity is displayed In addition HogPC s first monitor window should display ntensity Full in the bottom left hand corner Note Even before you click Full you should see various codes MIDI data displayed in MIDI OX s Output Monitor if everything was set up according to the instructions above 6 You can now minimize not close MIDI OX and start programming your show using WYSIWYG s AutoFocus features a wysiwyg March 2006 Index Symbols Assistant variable 265 Data variable 265 Designer variable 265 File variable 266 Group variable 265 Headings variable 265 Scene variable 265 Show variable 265 Title variable
144. and automated fixtures OpenGL technology for improved beam simulation Light emitting surfaces allow simulation of lasers neon LEDs projection screens and so on AutoPatch transmits the entire show patch regardless of channel count Rendering is available in Design and Live modes but is limited to 76 800 pixels Upgrade suggestions A faster processor improves responsiveness and rendering times Memory requirements depend on the size of the show Insufficient memory can seriously affect performance Add memory if there is excessive disk activity A high performance OpenGL accelerator card significantly improves the performance of real time simulation Note You cannot upgrade from WYSIWYG Report or Design to WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition You can however upgrade from WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition to WYSIWYG Perform removing any console restrictions Modes The following working modes are available in WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition CAD DATA DESIGN PRES LIVE wysiwyg March 2006 The WYSIWYG suite of software products Refer to the respective chapters of this guide for detailed explanations about the features in each mode WYSIWYG Reference Guide 23 The WYSIWYG suite of software products Release 16 0 b WYSI WYG Learn 24 I ntroduction WYSI WYG Learn is a special configuration of WYSIWYG that allows an educational institution to run ten instances of the software on a Local Area Network The
145. and lists contact information if you need further assistance In this chapter About this manual 11 Troubleshooting 12 Welcome to WYSIWYG 14 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Introduction Release 16 0 wysiwyg gt March 2006 b Introduction About this manual Introduction This manual provides instructions for the installation and operation of the different levels of the WYSIWYG application WYSIWYG is available at the following levels WYSIWYG Report WYSIWYG Design WYSIWYG Perform WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition WYSIWYG Learn WYSIWYG Network All levels are discussed in this manual For a detailed description of the levels refer to Chapter 2 The WYSIWYG suite of software products All the levels use the same user interface described in Chapter 4 WYSIWYG user interface However you can perform different tasks in each mode For example you draw in CAD mode and edit in Data mode These modes may have different features based on the level of WYSIWYG that you are running Text conventions The following text conventions are used in this manual WYSIWYG Reference Guide Menus and menu commands appear in Arial bold For example from the Edit menu choose Layers User interface elements such as buttons tools shortcuts and dialog boxes appear in 7ahoma Oblique For example to draw a riser click the Riser tool on the Draw toolbar Keyboard keys are indicated in ALL CAPS For ex
146. aneously In Wireframe view adjusts the viewpoint so that the extremities of the drawing fit the window Zoom Previous a Resets the view to the previous pan and zoom settings Zoom Next ae If you used the Zoom Previous tool Zoom Next sets the view to the next pan and zoom settings Allows you to specify the area of the drawing to be viewed For more information on using this tool refer to the procedure below Z00m Window aU To use the Zoom Window tool 1 In Wireframe view from the Zoom menu choose the Zoom Window tool 2 Click the left mouse button and drag a window around the area into which you want to zoom 3 Click the left mouse button again to capture the second point of the window Result The view changes to the area that you have selected View shortcuts View shortcuts record the plot type as well as the zoom and pan settings of a specific point of view You can use the shortcut to get back to that exact view point the next time you need to To record a view shortcut 1 Set up the active window for the plot type zoom and pan settings you wish to record Right click on the Views shortcut bar and then choose New View Type a name for the new shortcut and then click OK Result The shortcut is recorded and available on the Wews shortcut bar WYSIWYG Reference Guide 67 WYSIWYG user interface 68 Release 16 0 To modify the properties of a view shortcut 1 Right click on the Views shortcut ic
147. annot install WYSIWYG on a hard drive that has been formatted in the FAT32 file system 400 MB of free disk space 1024 x 768 or better resolution OpenGL accelerated display adapter with 16 MB video memory Free USB port Minimum hardware requirements for WYSIWYG Perform Pentium or compatible processor 1GHz or better Windows ME XP operating system 256 MB of RAM 512 MB preferred NTFS formatted hard drive Note You cannot install WYSIWYG on a hard drive that has been formatted in the FAT32 file system WYSIWYG Reference Guide 400 MB of free disk space 1024 x 768 or better resolution OpenGL accelerated display adapter with 16 MB video memory WYG it 2 DMX reception device except when used with certain consoles contact the console manufacturer for details 31 Installation configuration activation and registration Release 16 0 32 m MIDI output port to use with AutoFocus E Free USB port Minimum hardware requirements for WYSI WYG Network WYSI WYG Learn 5 Pentium III or compatible processor 300 MHz or better m Windows ME XP operating system m 64 MB of RAM n NTFS formatted hard drive Note You cannot install WYSIWYG on a hard drive that has been formatted in the FAT32 file system m 2 MB of free disk space m Windows ME XP USB or ECP parallel port m Network interface card running TCP IP For WYSI WYG Perform workstations E Use a WYG it 2 or compatible DMX reception device except when used with c
148. ar around the screen They can be placed on the edges of the work area top bottom left or right and can also be dragged off the edge of the work area and into their own window This window remains on top of the WYSI WYG screen and can be dragged anywhere on your display The following toolbars are available listed in alphabetical order WYSIWYG Reference Guide 57 WYSIWYG user interface 58 CAD Options toolbar Plan Left a tw Right g Front 6m Back i Isometric Ed WorkPlane Plan da WorkPlane Side 2 WorkPlane Front 4 Missing coordinate 5 Interactive a Grid snap Points Mid Points End Points 23 Center Assembly Pipe Focus Ortho X Y Ortho Y zZz DrthoZ Camera toolbar Click to reset select the the camera Camera from when you this list choose None Click the Properties button to change the camera properties ComEdit toolbar Data toolbar Fixture Ti E Color select Gobos Accessory ith Find Le Replace Quick tools Release 16 0 wysiwyg March 2006 Design toolbar Intensity and focus Intensity designer tool Focus designer tool Iris designer tool oom designer tool Color designer tool Gobo designer tool Prism designer tool Video designer tool ODA ER Gi S Render wizard xf Fade looks Da Moving Scenery designer tool Draw toolbar F Point w Solid line a Center line w Hidden line w Dotted line
149. are available in the New Plots view to help you manipulate objects Note Orthographic mode is available in New Plots from the Edit menu and also from the New Plots Options toolbar When ortho mode Is active you can manipulate objects either vertically or horizontally For more information on this mode refer to Ortho on page 107 Selecting objects Objects are transposed from CAD mode and can therefore be selected independently of that mode for example moving a pipe in New Plots will not cause it to also move in CAD mode Fixture symbols are grouped with the hang structure to which they are mounted Selecting and moving the hang structure will also move the mounted fixture symbols Similarly accessories are grouped with the fixture symbols to which they are attached and will also move with the fixture symbols You can also select an individual fixture symbol separately from the hang structure if you want to move or modify it independently The methods for selecting an object are similar to those for selecting an object in CAD mode For more information on these methods refer to Selecting on page 142 Copy When you copy and paste an object in a New Plots view a second representation of that same object is created If you subseguently update the data for this object in either CAD or Data mode for example gel color or channel number all representations of that object in all New Plots views are updated Copied objects
150. are not added to the drawing in CAD mode nor to the spreadsheet in Data mode You can copy and paste objects between New Plots views To copy an object 1 Select the object to be copied 2 From the Edit menu choose Copy 3 From the Edit menu choose Paste 4 Click in the plot where you want to place the object Cut When you cut an object in a New Plots view it is not removed from CAD mode However cutting an object in CAD mode removes it from all New Plots views wysiwyg gt March 2006 Presentation mode Cutting an object adds it to the clipboard You can subseguently paste the object into a New Plots view You can cut and paste objects between New Plots views To cut an object 1 Select the object to be cut 2 From the Edit menu choose Cut 3 From the Edit menu choose Paste 4 Click in the plot where you want to place the object Delete Deleting an object in a New Plots view does not delete the original object in CAD mode However deleting an object in CAD mode does delete the representation of that object in all New Plots views To delete an object 1 Select the object to be deleted 2 From the Edit menu choose Delete Result The object is removed from all New Plots views Note If you accidentally deleted an object you can recover it by choosing Undo Delete from the Edit menu Move The Move command in the New Plots view supports both absolute and relative moves in a manner similar to CAD mode For
151. art Operations Description Hot Key Console modify C Unpatch U Modify view V ToolTips on off Y Mid Operations Description Hot Key Abort mode A ToolTips on off Y Appendix C WYSIWYG Reference Guide Using AutoFocus with the HogPC AutoFocus is the protocol that WYSIWYG uses to talk back to a compatible console One of the consoles that is compatible with this protocol is the Hogll The offline editor for the Hogll HogPC is also compatible with the AutoFocus protocol although it reguires additional setup Normally AutoFocus is enabled through the WYG it2 or other hardware interface However since the HogPC operates internally you can establish a connection through software Note HogPC and WYSIWYG must be running on the same computer to enable the connection In this appendix Setting up AutoFocus to work with the HogPC 361 399 Using AutoFocus with the HogPC Release 16 0 Fae wysiwyg March 2006 Using AutoFocus with the HogPC b Setting up AutoFocus to work with the HogPC Introduction To establish a connection between AutoFocus in WYSIWYG and the HogPC you must install and configure two additional pieces of software called MIDI YOKE and MIDI OX After this software has been configured you can set up the HogPC and WYSIWYG to work with the new software Additional software WYSIWYG can only send out MIDI data streams through the MIDI device set up in the Windows Sound Devices Control Panel
152. aso a Name Select a new name for the hang structure from the Name drop down list Click the ellipsis button to open the Position Manager and create new names a AutoUnit Select this check box to automatically assign a number to each fixture that you hang Fixtures are automatically renumbered if you add a new fixture into the middle of a row of fixtures This option is available for pipes only and does not apply to truss m Snap Select this check box to hang fixtures on the pipe at a certain interval as specified in the nterval box m Interval Type the distance between fixtures in this box This option is used for pipe snaps m Use Document Defaults Select this check box to use the interval for pipe snap as defined on the Object settings tab in Show Options For more information on this tab refer to Object Settings tab on page 90 m Number of fixtures The number of fixtures on the hang structure m Fixture weight The total weight of fixtures on the hang structure The weight measurement accounts for fixture weight only and does not consider cable or other safety ratings wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode Drawing pipes Pipes are single member hang structures Pipes can be set to be drawn from the center or from the start The first pipe drawing mode Draw from Start reguires pipes to be drawn by specifying the start point and the end point from one extremity of the pipe to the other The second pipe
153. asurement units H Precision Select the appropriate option buttons to specify measurement precision of the dimension line Based on your choice for measurement units you can choose to display the drawing resolution in centimeters millimeters whole numbers or fractions Textures You can apply textures to different objects such as venues surfaces risers and walls Surfaces are created using the Surface tool or by extruding a line The textures provided with WYSIWYG emulate various types of surfaces such as brick or cloth You can also use your own bitmap or jpeg files as textures to emulate projection screens or to cover a surface with a texture specific to your show When customizing an object you can apply either a color or a texture you cannot apply both WYSIWYG Reference Guide 153 CAD mode Release 16 0 Notes m The availability of textures depends on the type of installation performed Textures are installed in a Full installation from the CD If you performed a Typical installation the textures will not be immediately available Run the installer again and choose Modify to load the texture files If you downloaded WYSIWYG from the Cast Web site you will need to download and install the textures file separately m The following procedure details how to apply a texture to a surface but it can also be used to apply a texture to a venue riser or walls by right clicking and then selecting Properties
154. ate symbol i E orn Edit Symbol PAE ST HD PT S USITT Par USITT P USITT Par USITT P USITT Ein USITT 61 USITT 6x9 USITT Ge Heloise Heloise Mac 500 Mac 500 USITT 6x1 USITT Ge Iris 3 front Ini 3 front TAD CAD ID KD nan 1 2 fi 4 2 2 B 5 lt Back Cancel E Each symbol type that exists in your CAD drawing is displayed for possible inclusion in the legend The counts of each symbol type are updated automatically as fixtures with the same symbol type are added or deleted from the CAD drawing Options in Step 2 affect the symbol information that is displayed in the legend a Show this symbol in legend By default all symbols are displayed in the legend Click to deselect this check box if you do not want the highlighted symbol in the table to be displayed in the legend Order the display of symbols by clicking the Move Up and Move Down buttons 297 Presentation mode Release 16 0 b Rotate symbol Select this check box if you want the symbol to be rotated in the legend The symbol will be rotated 90 degrees c Edit Symbol Click if you want to make modifications to the symbol information that is displayed name wattage count or notes Follow the steps in Editing Symbols to perform the modifications Editing symbols When you click Edit Symbol the following dialog box appears Edit Symbol 7 Use custom name Cancel Symbol Hame USITT Par 64
155. ave the correct dongle attached and the Product Configuration Successful window appears WYSIWYG Product Configuration Wizard ajx You have successfully configured WYSIWYG To close this wizard and proceed with the choice you selected click Finish You may change these settings in the Future by accessing Application Options under the Options menu Click Finish The product that you chose launches and the Activate or Register window appears based on the level of product that you have purchased a If you have purchased a new box product containing a new version dongle skip to the product registration process For details see To register WYSIWYG on page 40 WYSIWYG Reference Guide 39 Installation configuration activation and registration Release 16 0 a If you are upgrading from WYSIWYG 3 X continue with the next procedure To activate WYSIWYG on page 40 To activate WYSIWYG Note This procedure is only applicable if you are upgrading from WYSIWYG 3 X If you are upgrading from a newer release or If you have just purchased the latest release then you can skip directly to the registration process For details see To register WYSIWYG on page 40 1 If you previously owned WYSIWYG 3 X and have just upgraded to the new version of the product the first window that appears is the WYS WYG Upgrade dialog box WYSIWYG Upgrade You curenti own one of these products SIPaper Wy SICAD
156. ay also use the Ungroup tool on the 7oo s toolbar Mt Note You can group together objects located on different layers but the resulting group can only exist on one layer To change or view the layer of a group 1 Select the object s for which you want to view the grouping 2 Right click and select Properties Tip At any time to access an object s properties you can click on the Properties tool on the Edit toolbar P 3 Click the Group tab Result The layers for the objects in the group are listed with the layer for the group highlighted Note By default the group assumes the current layer when initially created To group the objects on a different layer select the layer from the list Click OK Moving WYSI WYG supports two types of move commands relative and absolute WYSIWYG Reference Guide 143 CAD mode 144 Release 16 0 Absolute coordinates are relative to the origin of the drawing An absolute move is defined as moving an object from one specific point to another A relative move is defined as moving an object to a destination relative to its original position To move an object using the mouse 1 Select the objects to be moved Hover the cursor over the object until a grey box appears and then click and hold Drag the object to the new position and then release the mouse button to finish the move To move an object using absolute values 1 2 Select the objects to be moved From the Edit
157. b affect your file saving settings It is important to save your work often during your work session WYSIWYG has an Auto Save function that will help to Keep your data safe however it is always a good idea to get in the habit of saving your show document to an external disk periodically during your work session Application Options General File Options Direct OpenGL Toolbars Auto Save Options T Auto Recover Auto Recover save interval l minutes lw Keep backup files Document Saving Save extemal textures within the document r Document Loading I Reload last document on startup Default to Read Only r DWG Import Options Reset DWG import association Compatibility Render Options ETC Interface Auto Recover Select this check box to save your document at the intervals specified in the Auto Recover save interval box If for some reason WYSIWYG closes unexpectedly such as in the case of a power loss your document can be recovered This recovery will only be up to date as of the last Auto Save so it is recommended that you do not set this interval to be too long wysiwyg March 2006 Managing your WYSIWYG document Keep backup files select this check box to save a copy of your document with the bak extension every time you save the file The backup copy is one save behind the saved copy and is saved in the same folder as the original document Each new backup copy replaces the prev
158. ble to access the quarterly software updates until you renew your subscription Contact your local WYSIWYG dealer to purchase a renewal for your subscription Cast Software provides you with the subscription code that you require To renew your subscription 1 From the Help menu choose Renew Subscription Subscription x How to Renew Your WYSIWYG Subscription Your WYSMVYG subscription is valid for a specific period of time You can continue to use WY SWYG beyond the expiry date however you will not be able to upgrade to the next version of WY SIWY G until you have renewed your subscription Subscription Expire Date Japr enn Serial Code BWEFST 3P Subscription Code Example CE AN CFE Cancel More Info WYSIWYG Reference Guide 43 Installation configuration activation and registration Release 16 0 A4 o fF O N The date when your WYSIWYG subscription expires is displayed in the Subscription Expire Date box In the Subscription Code box type the code The code is 10 alphanumeric long Verify that you have entered the correct information Click Renew Exit WYSIWYG and then restart the software for the renewal to take effect Note If you would like to renew your subscription but are unsure of who to contact click More nfo to obtain a list of WYSIWYG dealers wysiwyg gt March 2006 b Passwords Installation configuration activation and registration I ntroduct
159. bols used in the layout To add a legend to a layout you must first use the Legend Wizard to create the legend The legend that you create can consist of the symbol name wattage count and any other special notes You can create multiple legends per layout To create legend items 1 Right click in the Wizards shortcut bar and then select New Legend Result The Enter new Legend name dialog box is displayed ln wysiwyg March 2006 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Presentation mode Type a name for the legend and then click OK Result The legend shortcut is stored in the shortcut bar and the Legend Wizard opens Step 1 Legend Layout Legend Laynut x W Display Title Title fitue lw Display column headings Cancel Options in Step 1 affect the layout of your legend a Title Select the Display Title check box if you want to display the name of the legend Type a title in the Title box if you want a title other than the default name to be displayed b Columns Select the Display column headings check box if you want columns to be displayed in the legend Choose the columns that you want displayed by selecting the appropriate columns from the list The Symbol and Name columns are displayed by default Order the display of columns by clicking the Up and Down buttons Step 2 Legend Symbols Editor Legend Symbols Editor x Move Up lw Show this symbol in legend mg Move Down Rot
160. by the values of the second sort key and so on for the third sort key For example the standard Instrument Schedule sorts fixtures by position as Key 1 and unit number as Key 2 When a column is selected as a key the visible option will be checked and greyed out Columns that are sort keys must be visible Detail Level Specify how many rows each fixture spans For example if you select Fixtures a three cell cyc light will take up one row If you select Circuits that same fixture will take up three rows one for each cell circuit To issue a report for truss select 7russ in the Detail Level box 263 Presentation mode 264 Release 16 0 Word Wrap Select tf you want to see all the text on a line To create a new report A Oo N Click the Reports shortcut tab Right click in the reports shortcut area and then choose New Report Type the name of your new report Click OK Result Your report shortcut is placed at the bottom of the list Tip It is recommended that you clone an existing report and modify it rather than creating a new report Redesigning headings You can customize the fonts styles and layouts used in the headings and text of your reports These settings can be applied to the headings of all reports in your document as desired To change the heading format 1 Right click the report and choose Redesign headings Result The Report headings editor dialog box is displayed showing the headings
161. channels coordinates coordinate measurement and Ortho The status bar can be turned on or off from the toolbar list You can also customize the contents of the status bar from the Application Options window For more information on setting the options of your drawing refer to Application Options window on page 83 Prompt line The prompt line displays the current status of a command within your drawing If you are currently working with a command that requires multiple steps the placement of a pipe for example the prompt line displays a message indicating the next step required to accomplish that task The prompt line also displays a short description of a command when you point to it using your mouse Selected object In this display O stands for the number of objects currently selected The F stands for the number of fixtures selected and the C stands for the number of circuits currently selected Otte Oa Unused channels Although there is never a limitation on how many fixtures can be patched tn a file there is a limitation on the number of DMX channels that can be simulated in Live mode WYSIWYG will not simulate the DMX values being received on channels exceeding the Perform channel count of your system WYSIWYG Perform is available in 500 1000 2000 5000 and Unlimited channels WYSIWYG Unlimited has 50 000 channels The unused channels displayed on the status bar track the remaining channels for Simulati
162. choose WYSIWYG Template files wyt Click Save Merge command The Merge command is used to combine multiple show documents into one All file types that can be opened directly by WYSIWYG can also be merged Therefore an existing WYSIWYG document can be merged with mi other WYSIWYG documents P DWG DXF files a Lightwright2 files To merge documents 1 Open or create the destination document From the File menu choose Merge In the dialog box that opens choose the source file You can change the types of visible files using the File type box 4 Click Open WYSIWYG Reference Guide 79 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 16 0 If you are merging CAD drawings the Merge dialog box is displayed Select the point that is used as the starting point for the merging of the two show documents Merge x Basepoint Use 0 0 0 as Basepoint Select Basepoint with mouse Cancel 5 Click Use 0 0 0 as Basepoint to align the incoming drawing at 0 0 0 with the existing drawing 6 Click Select Basepoint with mouse to use the mouse to select the basepoint for the merge of the CAD drawings Click OK If you clicked Select basepoint with mouse in step 6 then you must click in the document or enter the coordinates to set the basepoint Close command The Close command closes the current show document and returns you to the Welcome window To close a show document 1 From the File menu choose Close 2 When pr
163. ck Found AF 3 INFD Would you like ta perform one of the following actions to the block Replace with Fixture Ba far all Convert into Library Item Explode x rea Exploding the block Exploding the block does the same thing as the explode command in AutoCAD that is it breaks the block into its components You must be careful of blocks that are made up of other blocks as WYSIWYG will only explode down one level Converting blocks into library items Converting a block into a library item imports the object and creates a duplicate of it to add to the objects library for future use Note that the block will only be available in the library of the current document To make it available globally see To create a custom library item on page 122 Substituting fixtures for blocks Converting a block into a fixture replaces the DWG DXF block with a WYSIWYG fixture of your choice If you find that you are always replacing a particular type of block with a specific fixture you can set an option in WYSIWYG so that the substitution will automatically occur each time you import the block For example if you have files in which the PAR64M block is always a PAR 64 fixture with an MFL bulb you have the option of telling WYSIWYG to automatically import the block in that way To do this select the Remember for future imports check box in the Library Browser that is displayed To change this option edit the import Ist fil
164. click and choose Properties 186 wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode 3 Click the Fixture tab 2 General Appearance Light Emission Fixture a Acclaim Cyc 4 w ay General PointofView 4 B c qo Postion SCE Layout Spt 0 Pan ooo Unt mw foo o Ost Spin ooo o Pupe Focus Poston Nee y Lamp FEL a Angle 0 00 Leng None Angle 0 00 From the Lamp drop down list select the lamp that you want to focus In the Ang e box for the lamp type the rotation angle The angle determines the degree of rotation of the lamp within the housing 6 Click OK when finished Fixture properties All fixtures in WYSIWYG have properties Properties are the characteristics or attributes that shape and define a fixture Fixture properties can be divided into two categories m the properties that are common to all fixtures in WYSIWYG m the properties that you define by assigning attributes to a fixture Fixtures also have many non visible attributes some of which can be edited These include Alias found as Type in the reports Cost Weight and AutoFocus codes General fixture properties In WYSIWYG there are five tabs that appear in the properties dialog box for every fixture Appearance E Version E Data 5 Options m Photometric Each tab is explained in this section WYSIWYG Reference Guide 187 CAD mode 188 Release 16 0 To view fixture properties that are common to all fixtures Fr
165. controlled by a designer tool when the DMX source is disconnected therefore you must first disconnect the applicable console device from within Live Mode before using any of the Video Designer Tool commands WYSIWYG Reference Guide 241 Design mode Release 16 0 Video Source name Rewind to beginning Progress slider Pause Advance to end Click the Shaded tab to view the video screen s that you have drawn Click the Video designer tool icon to open the tool window From the drop down list select the video source A N Use the controls shown in the graphic above to play pause or stop the video You can also use the slider to manually advance or rewind the video at your desired speed Note When you press the Pause button the frame of the video that is playing at the time is held on the video screen when you press the Stop button the video stops playing and the screen goes blank Moving Scenery tool After drawing movement axes and attaching objects to them you can use the Moving Scenery Designer tool to make the object move along each axis You can simulate moving scenery by setting up looks containing movement axes in Design mode Once you create the look and specify its fade time use the Moving Scenery Designer tool to customize the look by selecting the appropriate movement axis and the object s starting position on it Then create a second look repeating the same procedure to se
166. cts in Data mode and New Plots You cannot modify data such as fixture attributes directly in a New Plots view instead you must edit this data in Data mode Data that is modified in the spreadsheet view in Data mode is also updated in CAD mode and in all New Plots views Links There are three types of links in the New Plots view positional properties and attributes The position link tracks the movement of objects that are brought in from the original CAD drawing By default this link is in place until one of the objects from the original CAD drawing is moved relative to its origin The properties link tracks the changes to properties for objects that are brought in from the original CAD drawing These properties include the layer line color and line thickness of an object By default this link is in place until you modify one or more of these properties WYSIWYG Reference Guide 273 Presentation mode Release 16 0 The attribute link tracks the changes to the attribute layout of fixtures By default this link is in place until you move rotate or otherwise manipulate the layout of a fixture attribute For more information on attribute layout refer to Attribute layout on page 2 5 When a link to an object is broken all subsequent changes that are made to that object in CAD or Data mode will not be reflected in a New Plots view You must reestablish the relationship or link to ensure that changes made in CAD or Data mod
167. cusing fixtures you can click and drag in the wireframe view If you are using WYSIWYG in the theatre launch this command and then look to the stage to position your lights Working in an Isometric view you can use the snap tools to focus fixtures to points on your set pieces If you set the intensity to a specific value the right click menu option At Full and Focus changes to At and Focus where is the specific value that you set Select multiple fixtures by dragging a window around them If you drag the window from right to left across projected beams you can select the fixtures that produced the beams To select fixtures by type draw a box using the right mouse button You will be prompted to isolate one or more types of fixtures Use the Concept shortcuts to create and select groups of fixtures Use the Palette shortcuts to save and send color commands 327 Live mode Release 16 0 y ab Rendering Introduction At any time in Live mode you can generate a rendering of a lighting cue or static look The Render Wizard calculates the rendering based on the DMX values being received at the moment when you click Finish To render a lighting look 1 In the working area of the screen display the lighting look that you want to render 2 From the Design menu choose Render Tip You can also click the Render Wizard tool in the Design toolbar Pa Result The Render Wizard opens and guides you through a series of option
168. cy level click the Use Custom Transparency option button and then type the desired transparency level in the box provided or use the arrow to select a value Use Custom Transparency Click this option button if you want to set a transparency level for the color or texture that you have chosen or if you want to override the default transparency level of the selected material Then type the desired transparency level in the box provided or use the arrow to select a value Light Emission tab Options on the Light Emission tab affect the light emission properties for the selected object s Light emission is defined as the ability for objects to glow or emit light and can be used to simulate LEDs lasers neon light boxes projection screens and so on wysiwyg March 2006 z E Properties US Yn 7 x General Appearance Light Emission Set Piece Fixture Hang Structure Truss Black Box WYSIWYG Reference Guide Light Emission Fised Manual DM Patch CAD mode CICIO faa None A fi Intensity ja Spot n None Sets the selected object to not have any light emitting properties Fixed Manual Sets the selected object to have light emitting properties based on the intensity level set on the ntensity slider Click the color box to choose the color of the light emission Once this option is set the object will have light emitting gualities in all shaded views and renderings
169. d 299 304 Library item 121 Line 151 Patch universe 228 Pipe 175 Point 151 Report 262 Spreadsheet 221 Symbol 200 Text label 152 Wireframe view 68 Proscenium Arch 124 Purpose data field 216 Q Quick focus 183 Quick Tools using to apply color to multi source fixtures 192 Quick tools 191 192 R Radiosity 255 Reading the patch 227 Redesigning 264 Redesigning headings 264 Redo 142 Regional profile 84 Regional settings 92 Relative 144 Relative coordinates 65 Rename fixture type 189 Render options 87 Render shortcuts 250 Rendering 211 250 328 Replace tool 218 Replacing fixtures 179 Report headings 264 Reports 262 Reset origin 102 Right view 106 Riser 131 Rotate 279 Rotate tool 144 Rotating 144 Rotation axis 137 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Index S Saturation 257 Save 78 Save As 78 Saving a lighting look 247 Scenes 160 Scenes toolbar 61 Schedules 262 Screen layout 49 Screens drawing 134 Scrollbars 70 Scrollers 205 240 Scrolls 204 Selecting objects 142 Send the show document through e mail 82 Set Piece tab 150 Setting display size for shortcuts 55 Settings regional 92 Shaded views 71 Shortcut 53 Shortcut bar Create Shortcuts Concepts 244 Images 307 Layouts 284 Library Objects 121 Lighting looks 247 Palette 246 Patch Universes 223 Render 250 Reports 264 Spreadsheets 222 Worksheets 308 Shortcuts 53 arranging 55 d
170. d of to a printer When you print WYSIWYG prompts you to enter a file name and path The Print command prints the active window using the options you specify Print What options Extents prints the entire drawing View prints the currently displayed view in the active window Window allows you to draw a window around the area you wish to print Last Window prints the portion contained in the last window you drew for a Window print If you have not used or previewed a Window print yet this option is unavailable Scaling options a Fit will print the drawing to the scale required to fill the available print area based on the selection in the Print What group box When you select this check box the drawing will print to fit a If the Fit check box is deselected you must choose the scale from the drop down list Standard scales are displayed in this menu If the scale you want to use is not displayed choose Custom a When Custom is selected you must enter the ratio Type the ratio in the On Paper and Real World boxes The value in the On Paper box is the scale ratio that you want to use on a paper copy of the document The value in the Rea World box is the real measurement for the scale ratio that you specify in the On Paper box For example you may want to use a scaling of one inch in a paper copy of your document This one inch measurement translates to a realistic measurement for example 3 feet The value in the
171. der Wizard provides interactive editing and advanced visual effects To render a lighting look 1 In the working area of the screen display the lighting look that you want to render Result The Render Wizard opens and guides you through a series of options Click Next and Back to navigate through the Render Wizard 3 Click Finish Result WYSIWYG generates the rendering of your lighting look or cue If the rendering is saved internally it is available as an image in Presentation mode 2 From the Design menu choose Render Tip You can also click the Render Wizard tool in the Design toolbar Each of the steps prompts you to set a number of related options When you are finished setting the options on one page click Next to proceed to the next step Click Finish to complete the rendering Note If you click Back to change an option in a previous step you can click Finish without having to go through each of the steps again During any step up to step 6 you can click on the image and change the perspective using the arrow CTRL and PAGE UP PAGE DOWN keys or the mouse The Render Wizard calculates the rendering based on the state of the image composition and light settings at the moment when you click Finish Saving render settings You can save the options that you set in the Render Wizard as a shortcut for guick access to these settings at a future time There are two ways of saving a Render shortcut E from the Render Wiza
172. dividual menus are explained within the context of each mode chapter The menu bar is dockable It has a grab bar on the left that is used to move the menu bar around the screen It may be placed on the edges of the work area top bottom left or right It may also be dragged off the edge of the work area and into its own window This window remains on top of the WYSIWYG screen and may be dragged anywhere on your display Menu commands can be accessed using a mouse keyboard or by using hot keys To access menu commands using the keyboard 1 Press ALT n where n is the underlined letter in the menu name Result The menu will be displayed 2 Press the key corresponding to the underlined letter in the command that you want to execute Note Some commands have shortcuts that do not require menu selection In those cases the shortcut keys are listed to the right of the command in the menu Example To undo the last command press CTRL Z Toolbars Toolbars provide button access to most commands This is in lieu of selecting the commands through the menus in the menu bar Toolbars like menus are mode sensitive However unlike menus you can customize how the toolbars are displayed and which toolbars are open for each mode Toolbars that are greyed out in the toolbar selection list are not used in the current mode Toolbars are typically found directly under the menu bar and have a grab bar on the left that is used to move the toolb
173. documents the items are only saved within the one document In either case the items are saved and visible in the document regardless of which computer or application the document is opened in Custom conventional fixtures must be created from the WYSIWYG welcome screen and are saved directly to your application s library The new conventional fixture is available for you to use in all documents created using this application If used in a show document the custom conventional fixture is available in the document regardless of which computer or application the document is opened in WYSIWYG Reference Guide 121 CAD mode 122 Release 16 0 Custom color gobo wheels and scrolls are only saved in the document and cannot be saved to the application s library They travel with the document but if you need to use the same wheel or scroll on another show you must regenerate it every time Note Once created custom library items custom gobos and custom conventional fixtures cannot be deleted The only way to delete them is to delete the appropriate cdb file saved in the WYSIWYG library folder This file is generated for each category of custom item it is not generated for each item When you delete the gobos cdb file for example you delete all your custom gobos To create a custom library item See To create a custom library item on page 122 To create a custom fixture See To create a custom fixture on page 122
174. drop down list If the system is not currently connected you can also type the ID directly into this drop down list box 7 Click OK To attach an object to a movement axis Notes a You can attach one or more objects to each axis however each object can be attached to only one axis at a time a When you attach an object to a linear axis the distance from the axis to the object does not affect the object s movement the object will always follow the path of the axis regardless of where you have placed the axis or object wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode a When placing the object to be rotated in your drawing note that its position relative to the rotational axis is important The distance from the central point of the axis to the object represents the size of the circle in which it will rotate To have the object rotate in a very tight circle for example a dancer doing a pirouette or a spinning object place the object directly on the center point of the axis 1 Place the object that you want to attach to the axis at the appropriate position in your drawing either by adding a new object or moving an existing object to this location Select the object right click and then choose Properties On the Genera tab from the Attach to Axis drop down box select the axis to which you want to attach this object 4 Click OK To add a vertex to a linear movement axis To change the path of an existing linear axis you can
175. e This is the quickest way to simulate moving lights with the least beam clutter d Deselect the Co ors check box to ignore color settings and have all beams displayed as open white e Select the Focus check box to set the image in focus as the brightest in Wireframe views In shaded views the hard or soft edge can be seen when the focus parameter Is set f Select the Footprint check box to draw hard lines depicting where the light hits the set g Select the Shaded Beams check box to produce soft edge beam footprints on the set showing you the cosine distribution of your lights in shaded views The objects comprising the set must have their facets split To enable this setting select Facet Splitting on the Object Settings tab of Show Options For more information on this tab refer to Object Settings tab on page 90 h Select the Crossfades check box to show the physical limitations of the motors of the fixtures or electronic accessories This will be evident for devices such as moving heads or scrollers which might not be able to move as fast as the rate at which the console is changing values Crossfades also show you which fixtures use internal timing on a separate speed channel i Select the Gobos check box to simulate gobo details Gobo wheels often take a lot of processing power and can slow down the refresh rate of other fixtures updates unnecessarily If you are concerned about cue timing set the scene first with
176. e Export Use the browser to select a destination and a name for the image file that you want to export Ensure that either bitmap bmp or jpeg jpg is selected in the Save As Type box Click Save 307 Presentation mode Release 16 0 y Worksheets I ntroduction The Worksheet tab contains a spreadsheet much like many other spreadsheet programs You can enter data and create mathematical functions here as well as import and export data to other spreadsheet programs This functionality is useful when you are creating spreadsheets for crew requirements schedules budgets or any other show specific data For more information on using variables in worksheets refer to Using variables in reports on page 265 To import data Right click on the Worksheets shortcut tab and then choose New Worksheet Type the name of your worksheet Click OK From the File menu choose Import Use the browser to find the file containing the data that you want to import Click Open o o A O N To export data 1 Select the worksheet that you want to export From the File menu choose Export Use the browser to select a destination and a name for the worksheet file that you want to export Ensure that the desired export file type is selected in the Save As Type box 4 Click Save i wysiwyg gt gt March 2006 Presentation mode y o t Pipe tapes I ntroduction WYSIWYG enable you to make Pipe Tapes w
177. e Layer mn E WIBUHNE PODEST Select Al M BUHAE RUCK AND BLIHNE_TREFFE w E FASTER Clear All M BUHNE_TREPPE_BACKS TAGE MIBUHNE PODEST_BACKS TAGE i BUHAE EMPORE M BUHNE_TREPPE_EMPORE lel Click OK If you have blocks in your drawing you have the option of exploding the blocks converting them into a library item or substituting WYSIWYG fixtures for the existing blocks Note 3D solids are automatically placed inside blocks by AutoCAD and assigned an abstract block name for example X1 The number of blocks that are found are dependent upon the number of solids that were in the AutoCAD file You will be prompted to determine what action to take for each type of block WYSIWYG Reference Guide 113 CAD mode 114 9 10 11 Release 16 0 For more information on these options see Exploding the block on page 112 DWG Block Load x Block Found AF 3 INFO Would you like to perform one of the following actions to the block Replace with Fixture Ba far all Convert into Library ltem Explode OF Cancel After you have made your selection click OK If you decided to substitute fixtures for blocks in step 8 you are prompted to select the fixtures from the WYSIWYG library If you chose Select Basepoint with mouse in step 4 click to place the drawing I mporting scenario You do not need to import everything in your file at once You can import ite
178. e Select Components window select the MIDI Drivers check box Click Next Result Based on your method of installation you are prompted for the installer file a If you installed WYSIWYG from a CD you must place the WYSIWYG CD in your CD ROM drive b If you downloaded the WYSIWYG installer from the Web the install file must be present on your hard drive for the installation to complete Please note that you will only be able to install the MIDI drivers from the installer that you originally used for example if you used the Web installer you will not be able to install the drivers using the CD and vice versa Click Finish when the installation is complete To set up MIDI drivers 1 Launch WYSIWYG Load the file with which you want to use AutoFocus Switch to LIVE Mode add the Hogll in the Device Manager and then bind the ports as you would normally Before closing the Device Manager click New and then select Standard M D from the Devices gt All or from the Devices gt Manufacturer gt Generic tree Click nsert Note The Standard MIDI device appears in the list even if the drivers are not installed Therefore it is important that you follow the steps outlined above to ensure that the drivers are installed You now need to unbind AutoFocus from the HogPC and then bind it to the Standard MIDI device To do so with Standard M D still selected click the Bind Autofocus button at the bottom of the Device M
179. e Symbol button The following dialog box appears Symbol Select Cancel S Ministrip 26 Inch front E i Ministrip 26 Inch Side h Ministrip 51 Inch oa Ministrip 51 Inch Front h Ministrip 76 Inch oe Ministrip 6 Inch front z Ministrip side z Orion ae Orion E a Orion Front a Orion 4 side Onion front i Orion side From the list on the left side choose the new symbol When you are finished making your choice click Se ect WYSIWYG Reference Guide 301 Presentation mode 302 Release 16 0 Step 2 Symbol Layout Symbol Layout Key Test 1 10 Inch Fresnel K eu Spot 10 Inch Fresnel Unit 10 Inch Fresnel Key Unit 10 Inch Fresnel Channel 10 Inch Fresnel ey Channel 10 Inch Fresnel Circuit 10 Inch Fresnel ey Circuit 10 Inch Fresnel Colour 10 Inch Fresnel ey Colour 10 Inch Fresnel Gobo 10 Inch Fresnel Key Gobo 10 Inch Fresnel Patch Visible Line Weight C Use Body Colour __ 0 0100 Text Colour C Italics Horizontal Justification Left Center Right Vertical Justification OTop Center Bottom A Height US c Angle 0 00 Shape None w Size pa For each attribute there are two entries in the list box One is for the attribute itself the other is to label the attribute The label is distinguishable by the qualifier Key for example the attribute Focus and the label Key Focus
180. e are reflected in a New Plots view Reestablishing the link returns the object to its original state before the link was broken For example reestablishing the link of a fixture that has been moved off a pipe moves the fixture back to its original position on the pipe To reestablish links 1 Select the object for which you want to reestablish a link 2 From the Edit menu choose Restore Links Result The Links dialog box is displayed Links _ x Position Link Properties Link Te Atthibute ink Note The Position Link check box is deselected This means that an action occurred that broke that link To reestablish the link select the Position Link check box 4 Click OK Result The positional link is reestablished Vertical hang structures 2 4 In the New Plots view non horizontal hang structures such as booms and ladders can be rotated around their base to show all mounted fixtures The rotation can be top bottom left or right To rotate the position of a vertical hang structure 1 Select the hang structures that you wish to rotate 2 Right click and choose Rotate Position Result The Rotate Position dialog box is displayed Rotate Position x Please enter a dinection and angle to rotate Cancel Direction i Right Left t Top Bottom Rotation Angle a0 wysiwyg March 2006 Presentation mode 3 Select the direction in which you want to rotate the hang structure
181. e file types you may not have the proper decoder installed on your PC Install the appropriate decoder and then try viewing the file again For help on installing the decoder consult the developer of the video file type For live video streams your capture device must be using WDM drivers as wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode After you draw the screen and attach the video source you use the Video Designer Tool in Design mode to start the playback or stream For more information see To use the Video tool on page 241 You can view the video in any of the shaded views using the controls on the Video designer tool to pause fast forward rewind or stop the video You can also patch the control of the video source to a console device This means that you can use the console device to control the progress of a live video stream or a video file by making the video play pause or rewind you cannot use WYSIWYG to change different aspects of the video itself To control the video source the DMX patch is given three channels For details on controlling the video with the console device in Live mode see To control a DMX patched video source with a console on page 316 Notes a Before you render your drawing you can either pause the video at the precise image you want to see in the final rendering or you can let the video run while the Render Wizard processes the information in your drawing In this case the Render Wizard capt
182. e in WYSIWYG Report m CAD 2D m DATA H PRES 2D Refer to the respective chapters of this guide for detailed explanations about the features in each mode WYSIWYG Reference Guide 17 The WYSIWYG suite of software products Release 16 0 b WYSI WYG Design Introduction WYSIWYG Design builds on the feature set of Report and adds the ability for lighting professionals to explore their designs in a 3D environment 3D CAD tools shaded and isometric views and photo realistic rendering tools are added as well as the ability to create and store images of lighting looks using the integrated design tools WYSIWYG Design is also available in an educational edition This product WYSIWYG Design Educational Edition is a fully functional version of Design that is available to Students and faculty at a special price Note The following specifications are subject to change Software features Includes all the features of WYSIWYG Report 3D plotting of set and lighting designs Multiple working views including isometric Comprehensive 3D library of fixtures accessories truss colors gobos props and so on Extended library includes textures and materials Library objects are multi layered for realistic texturing Objects have variable translucency Fully integrated paperwork and CAD systems Loading and exporting of DXF DWG Excel BMP and JPG file types Print all view types including 3D views bitmap files jpeg files soreadshe
183. e next time you launch WYSIWYG clear this check box Note If you clear this check box you can always set it again in the Application Options window For details see page 84 3 Click Next Result The Product Selection window appears enabling you to choose the product level that you want to launch WYSIWYG Product Configuration Wizard Product Selection Which product would you like to rum 4 standard dongle installed on this computer Console Edition Select this option if you wish to run Console Edition You must be connected to your compatible console bo run WYSIWYG Your dongle must be installed on this computer Network Product Select this option if you wish to run a WYSIWYG Network product Learn Network AWT nr CSP Your dongle must be installed on this computer or this computer must be connected to a network on which there is a network dongle Demo Select this option if you do not have a dongle and wish to run ws in Demonstration mode You will be able to use all Functions of the program except the Save and Print Functions Viewer Select this option if you do not have a dongle and wish to run WwsTw in Viewer mode You will be able to view WYSIWYG Files and print plots and reports however you will nat be able to edit therm 4 Select the product that you want to launch you must have the correct dongle installed to launch the program and then click Next Result The program verifies that you h
184. e selected layer The chosen color is used for all objects that reside on the selected layer unless otherwise modified To modify the object color for rendering refer to the General tab on page 146 Object Counts tab Entries on the Object Counts tab indicate the total number of objects that reside on the selected layer Values on this tab are read only Layer Properties 7 General Object Counts Camera Console Cylinder Fixture Focus Pos n Sphere 0 Are Library Item Line Circle Pipe Point Riser Set Fiece Group Surface n TIT HYNA UN Label Truss Cancel Deleting layers You must remove all objects from a layer before you can delete it You cannot delete the current layer To delete a layer 1 O o A O Select all the objects on the layer that you want to delete and then delete them or move them to another layer From the Edit menu choose Layers Result The Layer Database dialog box is displayed Ensure that the layer you want to delete is not set as the current layer Select the layer in the list Click Delete Click OK Tips WYSIWYG Reference Guide a The Layer toolbar gives you quick access to all existing layers and the Layers database Click the tool on the left end of the Layer toolbar to access the Layer database Wii 159 CAD mode Release 16 0 a Use the layer list in the Layer toolbar to quickly set the current layer If objects are selected whe
185. e that is created in the Library folder usually C Program Files WYSIWYG Library once the first fixture Is set to be remembered for future imports Note WYSIWYG creates a pipe for every imported fixture since fixtures in WYSIWYG need to hang on a hang structure If however fixtures are on a straight pipe represented by a straight line in the CAD file WYSIWYG will convert the entire line into a pipe After you have made your selection click OK If you decided to substitute fixtures for blocks in step 7 you are prompted to select the fixtures from the WYSIWYG library Merging a DWG DXF document To merge a DWG DXF document From the File menu choose Merge From the Files of Type drop down list select the DWG or DXF type Files of this type appear in the browser window wysiwyg gt March 2006 CAD mode 3 Click the file name in the browser and then click Open Result The Merge dialog box opens Merge x Basepoint Use 0 0 0 as Basepoint Select Basepoint with mouse Cancel 4 Choose the basepoint Result The Se ect DWG Settings dialog box is displayed Select DWG DW X Settings x Scale Layer Dw GDF is in Meters Millmeters Feet Inches Custom i DXxFUntTe fl Feet xf ceu Select the unit type used in the DWG DXF drawing Click the Layer tab and then choose the layers that you want to import from the DWG DXF drawing Select DWG Settings FE Scal
186. e the third channel up and down to control the progress of the video forward and backward To control a DMX patched movement axis with a console After you have patched a movement axis in Data mode you can use the applicable console device in Live mode to control the movement of any objects that are attached to the axis To control the object the DMX patch is allocated two channels with the following controls WYSIWYG Reference Guide First channel Move The first channel is for coarse movement and can be used to advance the object quickly to any position along the entire path from start to finish Second channel Move Fine The second channel is used for further refining the object s position that you set with the first channel Adjust the slider on the second channel to move the object very slightly either forward or back from its current position The movement achieved with this channel is so fine that it is best viewed on linear axes that are quite long Note that for rotation axes the movement is so slight that you may not be able to See it 317 Live mode 318 Release 16 0 1 Ensure that the console device is connected to the patched movement axis For details on connecting a console see To connect to a console on page 314 2 To move the object quickly along the movement axis adjust the slider on the first channel stopping at the position where you want to leave the object 3 To move the object in fine i
187. e to add arrows on the line You can specify a width and length for the arrows by entering values in the H and V boxes respectively 5 Double Line Select this check box to change the selected line to a double line Indicate how far apart you want the double lines to be by entering a value in the Distance box Circle The properties are the same as when the object was originally drawn For more information refer to Drawing circles on page 129 Arc The radius and angle properties are the same as when the object was originally drawn The only property that ts different is the addition of arrows to either side of the selected arc Properties bi ks New Plot Object Arc Radius am eo Star Angle n 00 End Angle 180 00 ATA Located at w Start l End Arrow Size H nai we 121 Carcel Amy wysiwyg March 2006 Presentation mode m Arrows Select where on the arc you would like to add arrows You can specify a width and length for the arrows by entering values in the H and V boxes respectively I nserting New Plots into layouts Once you create your New Plot you can insert it into the Layouts view For example you might want to insert it into a Layouts view so that you can add a legend key or report to your plot For more information on inserting a New Plot see To insert New Plot items onto the layout on page 290 Printing New Plots If you have a large plot you can tile
188. e you want to use for printing is not displayed select Custom The default values are 1 4 1 0 imperial measurement or 1 50 metric measurement On paper The scale ratio that you want to use on a paper copy of the plot view Real World The real measurement for the scale ratio that you specify in the On paper box For example you may want to use a scaling of one Inch in a paper copy of your plot This one inch measurement translates to a realistic measurement for example 3 feet Follow User Scene Select this check box to use the scene that is displayed in the drop down list on the Scene toolbar Click to clear the check box and then select wysiwyg March 2006 Presentation mode the desired scene from the Scene drop down list For more information on scenes refer to Scenes on page 160 m Units The units of measurement for the plot The coordinates at the bottom of the plot change according to the selection This setting does not affect the printed output u Print in Black and White Select this check box if you want the plot to be displayed and printed in black and white Tile Printing tab Options on the Tle Printing tab affect the printout of the plot View Options kita New Plot View Properties Tile Printing Fisture Detail Tile Printing l Show page guides l Show page number Tile Options i Top Lett Centre Split Centre m Show page guides Select this check box
189. ease 16 0 4 Release the mouse button to place the focus position Flight Case properties The Flight Case properties affect which fixture attributes are shown To modify the Flight Case properties 1 From the Options menu choose View Options Tip You can also use the View Options tool on the Standard toolbar Fal Click the Show Details tab Select the fixture attributes that you want displayed in the Flight Case Note The Unit Number is displayed by default however you can select all the attributes if you want 210 wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode y ab Rendering I ntroduction At any time in CAD mode you can generate a rendering of your set Note that renderings in CAD mode are primarily intended for rendering your set with environmental lighting but without theatrical lighting However if there are any fixtures selected on your plot they are displayed in your rendering To render a lighting look 1 In the working area of the screen display the lighting look that you want to render Result The Render Wizard opens and guides you through a series of options Click Next and Back to navigate through the Render Wizard 3 Click Finish Result WYSIWYG generates the rendering of your lighting look or cue If the rendering is saved internally it is available as an image in Presentation mode 2 From the Design menu choose Render Tip You can also click the Render Wizard tool in the Design toolbar Note Fo
190. ect that you have drawn and think you might want to use again Note You cannot save fixtures hanging structures such as pipes and truss and splines as components of custom library items To create a custom library item 1 2 N O O A 10 11 12 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Select the objects to be saved as a custom item From the Library menu choose Create New Library Item Tip If the menu item is greyed out one or more of the objects selected cannot be included in the custom library item Pick a base point for the item This will become the insertion point for the item Result The Library Item Wizard opens displaying a rotating shaded view of your new item Type a name for the new library item To make this item available to other documents check the appropriate box Click Next Add or modify the path Note The path is the location in the library where the item will be stored An item assigned to the path Custom Tables would be available in the custom section of the items library in a sub category named Tables Click Next Type all pertinent information including manufacturer weight and any notes Click Next Type your name Click Finish Result The custom item is placed in the item library as per the path specified in step 3 141 CAD mode Release 16 0 b Editing objects Selecting Before you can manipulate objects you must select them Selected objects are easily identifiable a
191. ect the Auto ncrement check box WYSIWYG will assign the next seguential number based on the properties and reguirements of the previous fixture 4 When the dialog box is set up the way you want it click OK WYSIWYG Reference Guide 191 CAD mode Release 16 0 5 The cursor will show a O indicating that Quick Tools have been activated Click on each fixture in the order you want any auto incrementing values to be assigned Note The attributes to be assigned to the next fixture are logged in the bottom left hand corner of the status bar O Tus Ti h wireframe A uad FIi Next Fixture Channel 14 Purpose Blue top light Patch 4 1 6 When complete right click and choose Finish Quick Tools Note To change the values at any time right click and choose Change Options Tip Use the Clear All button to reset all the values and deselect all quick tools Quick Tools u Ouick Spot enters a spot number in the Spot box m Quick Unit enters a unit number in the Unit box m Quick Purpose enters a fixture purpose in the Purpose box m Quick Focus enters a focus position or pan and tilt angle for the selected fixture m Quick Channel enters a channel number in the Channel box m Quick Patch enters a patch universe assignment in the Patch box u Ouick Dimmer enters a dimmer number in the Dimmer box m Quick Circuit enters a circuit name and number in the Circuit Name and Num boxes m Quick Color enters a gel color number for the selected
192. ect to move backwards along the axis from finish to start and then begin over again in a continuous backwards loop If you have chosen any moving Mode value that is any value except Static you can specify the length of time in seconds over which you want the full range of motion to take place Type this value in the Duration box The larger the number you type in this box the slower the object moves Click New Axis to add the axis information to the axis list box wysiwyg March 2006 10 Click Save to save your settings Note If you make any changes to the axis settings and save the changes you can revert to the previous settings by clicking Load 11 To see the object moving along the axis you must first ensure that the Motion Data mode Control Console or the motion control system that you are using is connected and that the patched axis Is bound For details see To connect to a console on page 314 and To control a motion control patched movement axis with a motion control system on page 318 Reading the patch Each box in the patch universe represents one DMX channel Fixtures are represented by colored bumps or bars that span the number of reguired DMX channels The color of the bar is the same as the fixture s CAD layer The number in the top left corner is the DMX address The spot number and fixture type are identified across the bottom of the box es The fixture parameter controlled by each
193. ection on reading the patch for moving scenery Added new graphic and descriptions for updated Display tab added procedure on adjusting width of patch cells Added new Moving Scenery designer tool content Added new section on Moving Scenery designer tool Added new section on viewing moving scenery Added note about connecting to a DMX or motion control console Added procedures on controlling patched axes with DMX consoles and motion control systems Summary of changes Vi Release 16 0 wysiwyg gt March 2006 Contents amp ab Contents 1 Introduction 9 ADOUL THIS Tic iU al i tae owe Been eps ade red bee we ee ew Gn eee GE Br do om 11 TROUDIGSNOOUMG lt i Bateau ekeke eau ra Obnaeeadeente eee seek een oe 12 Welcome to WYSIWYG saana aa a ee 14 2 The WYSI WYG suite of software products 15 WYSIWYG se ET ca ca acta a aaea A gt EC NR ee ee ee ee Boe eg ee D 17 WYSIWYG Design i005 5406 i ee bb bade One Sse oe aw Oe ewe eS ee ee 2 18 WYSIWYG PEON aa o oo oe ow eee Hee OH CEH Ew eS ee One AUU Uh Ee ee ee oH 20 WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition FE es 22 WYSIWYG LEa s eand s buns chee ee ea be eee eee pe ee Oe ee Oe oe ee oe 24 WYSIWYG INCIWOFRK perpres unter Eee eRe eee bh oe ha CURE eee wee hee NAU 26 WYSILINKs 2c64 400 5584605 Fedde ho dota boeee eee dae eA haaa odds he 27 3 Installation configuration activation and registration 29 ASCA lt lt eet du 6 64 t Spee v4 EA FPA NN ee oe
194. eet printing requirements Their content properties are detailed below To modify content properties of CAD items 1 2 3 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Select the CAD item right click and then choose Content Properties or click the appropriate tool on the Layout Edit toolbar Result The View Options dialog box is displayed View Options x General CAD Rotation CAD Printing View type Showy Details Mame Follow User Scene Scene All Layers Modify options as desired When finished click OK 291 Presentation mode 292 General tab Release 16 0 Options on the Genera tab affect the scene that is displayed in the CAD item Only fixtures and objects on the active layers are displayed in the layout m Follow User Scene Select this check box to use the scene that is displayed in the drop down list on the Scene toolbar Click to clear the check box and then select the desired scene from the Scene drop down list For more information on scenes refer to Scenes on page 160 CAD Rotation tab Options on the CAD Rotation tab affect the angle at which the CAD item is printed View Options General DAD Rotation CAD Printing View type Show Details Angle E degrees m Angle Type an angle value in degrees if you want the drawing in the CAD item to be printed on an angle This feature is helpful for printing booms CAD Printing tab Options on the CAD Printing tab
195. elete 54 new 54 ordering 54 setting display size 55 Show details 96 Show information 267 Shutter cuts 184 Side view 106 Simulation Channels 64 Simulation options 96 211 328 Simulation views Hot keys 356 Snap 65 95 107 Soft goods 134 Soft shadow 256 Solid line 128 Sphere 133 Spin data field 217 Spline 128 Split gels 219 Spot 149 Spot data field 216 369 Index Spreadsheets 216 Standard toolbar 61 Status bar 64 Status data field 217 Stock 204 Streaming video reading the patch for 227 Subscriptions 43 Surfaces 131 Symbols 91 96 197 278 294 T Tag data field 217 Tape printer 309 Template 79 Tents 126 Text label 130 277 Textures 85 153 Tile printing 271 286 Tile Printing tab 271 Tilt data field 216 Time zones 93 Title block 267 286 Toolbars 57 86 Tools CAD 162 Design 238 Tools toolbar 62 Tooltips 96 294 Tophats 202 Troubleshooting 12 Truss Hanging truss 176 Rotating truss 177 Truss cross members 96 294 Truss snap 108 176 Type data field 216 U Undo 142 Ungrouping 143 Unit data field 216 Universe Patch 223 Universes toolbar 62 Unused channels 64 Upgrades 31 42 USB serial converter 84 USITT symbols 200 V Variables in reports 265 Vertex 162 167 adding to a linear axis 139 Vertical hang structures 274 Vertical justification of a line 152 Video 370 Release 16 0 patching in the patch view 224 Vid
196. ent 5 Any fixture added to a document will not initially be part of any concept WYSIWYG Reference Guide 245 Design mode Palettes 246 Release 16 0 I ntroduction You can create palettes of color to facilitate color selection A palette is a reference to a specific color and can be used on all color changing fixtures and scrollers Creating palettes Creating a Palette shortcut is helpful if you want to save your favourite CMY color mixes for later use Note You can create palettes in Design mode only To create a palette 1 Select the fixture from which you want to capture the color Note You can create a palette from only one fixture Right click on the Pa ette shortcut bar and then choose New Palette Type the name of the palette and then click OK Result The CMY value is saved as a palette in the Palette shortcut bar This value can be a CMY mix a color from the color wheel or scroll or a combination of color sources Updating palettes You can modify a Palette shortcut by modifying or replacing colors as reguired To update a palette 1 Select the fixtures from which you would like to record the palette 2 Right click on the Pa ette shortcut that you want to modify and then choose Update Result The Palette shortcut is updated with the new CMY values To apply a palette Applying a color palette is the eguivalent of setting up color parameters for the selected fixtures except it is much faster 1
197. ent is currently open you will be prompted to save changes to that document before another show document is opened Only one show document may be open at a time To open an existing document 1 From the File menu choose Open 2 Select the file and then click Open You can open the following file types WYSIWYG files wyg WYSI WYG template wyt WYSIWYG backup files bak Wysiwygv2 files wys DWG files dwg DXF files dxf LW2 files lw2 DWG DXF Export This command exports the current show document to a DWG or DXF formatted file type DWG and DXF formats are used to transfer documents to AutoCAD or other compatible drafting applications To export to DWG or DXF format For details see To export to DWG DXF in 2D on page 115 WYSIWYG Reference Guide 77 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 16 0 78 Save command The Save command saves the open document to the same file name and location folder disk and so on under which it was previously saved If you are saving the document for the first time this command will perform the Save As function To save your document From the File menu choose Save Tip You can also use the Save tool on the Standard toolbar A Save As command The Save As command Is used to save the current document to a new file name a new file type or new destination such as a floppy disk To save the current document 1 2 From the File menu choose Save As
198. ently used in your file for you to choose from 3 To make a new selection click Library to open the appropriate library Note This feature is only available in certain fields Tip This feature is especially useful for fields such as color gobo or other parameters that reference library items for which you do not know the exact value Find and replace tool The find and replace tools are used for locating and modifying data and are column specific The tools only search for data in the column where the tool was activated and not throughout the entire spreadsheet To use the find tool 1 Select a cell in the column in which you want to use the Find tool 2 From the Edit menu choose Find Tip You can also use the Find tool on the Data toolbar gi 3 Type your search criteria a Select the Match whole word only check box to search for data matching exactly what you have typed as opposed to data containing parts or all of what you have typed Select the Match case check box to enable a case sensitive search where uppercase and lowercase letters will affect the results 4 Click Find Next Result Cells that match your search criteria are highlighted with the first match active To use the replace tool 1 Select a cell in the column in which you want to use the Find and Replace tool 2 From the Edit menu choose Replace Tip You can also use the Rep ace tool on the Data toolbar 3 Type your search criteria Enter a value to
199. eo source configuring new 135 controlling with a console device 316 Video tool 241 View full screen 52 View Options Error 233 Flight Case 210 Layouts 285 Patch universe 228 Report 262 Shaded views 72 Spreadsheet 221 Wireframe views 68 View shortcuts 67 View toolbar 62 Viewer 98 Viewing moving scenery 248 249 Views tools shortcuts 54 W Wattage data field 217 Weight data field 217 Welcome window 49 Wheels 205 240 Window New 52 Wireframe views 66 Workplane 106 WYSI Link 332 WYSI Link toolbar 62 338 WYSIWYG activating 40 Design 18 Perform 20 24 27 Report 13 17 starting for the first time 38 WYSIWYG Learn 24 34 WYSIWYG Network 26 WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition 13 22 WYSIWYG Viewer 98 Y Yokes mountable 202 Z Zoom 238 Zooming 67 Z00m tools 66 wysiwyg
200. ers on page 220 Select the Group By check box to divide the spreadsheet into sections pages one section page for each value in the Key 1 field 221 Data mode Release 16 0 Creating a new spreadsheet To create a new sheet In the shortcut bar click the Co umns tab Right click in the shortcut bar and choose New Spreadsheet Type a name for the new spreadsheet and then click OK A Oo N a Scroll to the bottom of the list of Column shortcuts Your new spreadsheet name should be at the bottom of the list Click on the shortcut to view your spreadsheet Note It may be easier to clone an existing spreadsheet and modify it than to start a new one from scratch See To clone a shortcut on page 55 for more details wysiwyg March 2006 Data mode amp Patch Introduction The Patch view is a graphical representation of the patch field It is used for two purposes m to create and or edit a patch for the lights video or moving scenery in your drawing u to monitor incoming DMX levels when using WYSIWYG Perform for simulation ce Theatre Dance plot wysiwyg File Edit Library Options Help Dah Ra Bw P Bt BAK oe He nO M2 o Views now BY x er r e al mm o immer A aA letsgenta Colour Whe Diffusion Strobe Beam Ready PUA A als te Bal Unused Channels SNAP i TT Working in the patch view You can view one patch universe at a time As you add new patc
201. ertain consoles contact the console manufacturer for details m MIDI output port to use with Autofocus enabled consoles Minimum hardware requirements for WYSI Link E Sensor dimmer rack with Control Electronic Module CEM software version 3 11 or later m ETCNet2 DMX Node with RFU Link option software version 2 1 1 or later I nstalling WYSI WYG The installation procedure for WYSIWYG is the same regardless of the level that you have purchased A guide to the installation appears when the CD is inserted into your PC s CD drive This guide displays buttons for all the installation options a Install WYSIWYG u Install WYSIWYG Network Server see Installing WYSIWYG Learn or WYSIWYG Network on page 34 m Quick Start Guide E Quick Start Tutorials m Reference Guide m Release Notes m Install Adobe Acrobat Reader wysiwyg March 2006 Installation configuration activation and registration E WYSIWYG Install cas t a wysiwyg production design suite Click MSTALL WYSIWYG to install the software Follow the steps in the Installation Wizard as prompted If the installation wizard does not automatically open 1 2 3 Access the CD ROM drive of your computer Double click the icon for the Wyginstall program Follow the steps in the Installation Wizard Installing an I n Place update If you already have a previous release of WYSIWYG installed on your computer you can easily update to
202. es The following working modes are available in WYSIWYG Report m CAD 2D m DATA m PRES 2D The following working modes are available in WYSIWYG Design E CAD 7 DATA a DESIGN E PRES The following working modes are available in WYSIWYG Perform CAD wysiwyg March 2006 WYSIWYG user interface 7 DATA E DESIGN m PRES m LIVE Note Emphasis adds the mode button Emphasis WYSILink adds the mode button Link Layouts Beneath the work area in each mode is a series of layout tabs A layout Is a configuration of work views Views and layouts are mode specific The layouts are not editable and there are no options for saving custom layouts To this end WYSIWYG Supports pop out frames and has multi monitor functionality thus providing alternative tools for customizing your work environment These features are discussed below Click the appropriate layout tab to change layouts Views Views are the windows in the work space The windows are pre configured on the screen based on the layout as discussed above The WYSIWYG views include wireframe wireframe selection only flight case shaded Spreadsheet patch error report image plot and worksheet The layouts and views available in each mode are discussed at the beginning of each chapter For more information see Wireframe views on page 66 and Shaded views on page 71 Popup frames You can place a view in a popup frame so that it remains ac
203. ess in the box below to set a specific line thickness for the object The line weight is used to determine how thick the pen should be when printing a copy of the document The applied line thickness is only visible in Print Preview mode and when printed Appearance tab Use this tab to specify the appearance of the different components that make up the currently selected items Based on the items that you have selected the options in this tab differ You can use this tab to customize objects by adding different materials colors or textures to each element of the item For example if you have selected a library object such as a podium you can apply different materials colors and textures to each part of it the body and the top portion General Appearance Light Emission Elements Color Texture Use Layer Rendering Color f Use Custom Color Use Texture from Library 1 Wee Texture from File a as E Testure Position Testure Tile Dimensions Texture Rotation f Tile foon Degrees Stretch Material Vamished Wood 1 aN Default Transparency i Use Material Transparency 0 Transparency iz specified as a percentage with ZZ Use Custom Transparency On meaning opaque Select All Select None Cancel Note You can apply textures only to venues surfaces risers and walls You can apply transparency to everything When customizing the selected element you c
204. ether they have been assigned a position or not If you create focus positions in the Data mode by typing labels in the focus box of the spreadsheet those focus positions will appear under the Focus Positions branch of the Flight Case Unhung fixtures assigned to those focus positions will appear under their respective Flight Case headings To learn more about inserting objects in Data mode please refer to Chapter 7 Data mode March 2006 CAD mode Entering and modifying objects in the Flight Case You can insert fixtures and focus positions directly into the Flight Case using the Library Draw menu or appropriate tools on the Draw toolbar You can change a fixture s assigned position by selecting the fixture in the Flight Case and dragging it to another position within the Flight Case You can change a fixture s assigned focus position by selecting the fixture and dragging it between Focus Positions within the Flight Case Transferring objects from the Flight Case to the drawing The items that appear in the Flight Case can be transferred to your drawing by clicking and dragging To hang fixtures from the Flight Case 1 Open the Flight Case Click and hold on the desired fixture Drag the fixture into the wireframe view and place it on a hang structure Note If a fixture appears in the flight case under a position branch that fixture must be hung on that position Fixtures with no position or unassigned fixtures
205. ets and logos Integrated design mode allows creation of static lighting looks without a console Rendering generates a photo realistic picture of your lighting look Rendering wizard provides options for smoke shadows ambient light and so on Renderings include bounce and reflection from surfaces OpenGL technology for improved beam simulation Multi monitor support 12 months of software and library updates included Upgrade suggestions Modes A faster processor improves responsiveness and rendering times Memory requirements depend on the size of the show Insufficient memory can seriously affect performance Add memory if there is excessive disk activity A high performance OpenGL accelerator card significantly improves the performance of real time simulation The following working modes are available in WYSIWYG Design wysiwyg gt gt March 2006 The WYSIWYG suite of software products E CAD 7 DATA a DESIGN E PRES Refer to the respective chapters of this guide for detailed explanations about the features in each mode WYSIWYG Reference Guide 19 The WYSIWYG suite of software products Release 16 0 b WYSI WYG Perform Introduction WYSIWYG Perform builds on the feature set of Report and Design and adds the ability for lighting professionals to pre cue entire shows in real time Users can create their productions in 3D along with all the necessary paperwork A console can then be connected to the compute
206. ew object properties are inherited from the original object in CAD mode but can be manipulated independently of that mode For example manipulating the properties of an object that is brought into a New Plots view does not affect the object s properties in CAD mode It does however break the properties link for the modified object Objects can also be drawn in a New Plots view These objects inherit the properties of the layer on which they are drawn You can modify these properties as reguired Since these objects are not added to the drawing in any other mode modifying the properties in a New Plots view has no external affect Objects that are brought into New Plots from CAD mode 290 There are general properties for each object that is brought into a New Plots view from CAD mode You can modify these general properties as required General tab Options on the Genera tab affect the selected object s color and line thickness properties Properties E x General Layer Cyc ERS T Fixtures Follow Spots H F ieee aU M Use Layer Line Thickness Macs jom Fig lw Use Layer Colour Pipes Scenic Venue Cancel Apply u Layer A list of the layers in your document is displayed Click on a list item to change the layer on which the object will be drawn a Use Layer Color Select this check box to set the object s color for wireframe views to be the same as the properties o
207. example if it contains a stage note the width of the stage before you import the graphic into your drawing 1 In either the Wireframe or Ouad tab in Plan view click File gt Import Floorplan Result The Open window appears 2 Navigate to your floorplan file select it and then click Open You can import floorplans that are saved in bitmap bmp JPEG jpg or Targa tga format Result The floorplan is placed in your drawing and a window appears listing instructions for setting the scale of the drawing Import Floorplan a a 2 x To set the scale of your imported Floorplan you must click on each end of any component and then specify how big the item really is For example if your Floorplan contains a stage click on one end of the stage and then click on the other end In the Window that appears type the actual width of the stage To start measuring click OK Cancel WYSIWYG Reference Guide 117 CAD mode 118 Release 16 0 Click OK to close the instruction window Choose an item in your drawing whose measurements you know and then click on one end of the item For example if you Know the dimensions of the stage click on one corner of it Click on a second end of the item For example If you had clicked on one corner of the stage click on a second corner of it Result The Import Floorplan window appears prompting you to enter the length of the line that you have just drawn Type the
208. ext Segments that are not straight for example arcs become straight line segments A spline must contain fit data for it to be imported Stretched scaled blocks are not supported Blocks to be converted to library items cannot imbed other blocks Blocks to be replaced by a fixture cannot imbed other blocks Tips It is recommended that you do not import 2D 3D solids whenever possible Instead use 3D Face and 3D Surface entities It is recommended that you explode Polyface Mesh or Polygon Mesh entities in AutoCAD before importing to WYSIWYG so you can access each face in WYSIWYG Opening a DWG DXF document Before you begin Clean up the CAD file by removing all unnecessary layers such as doors windows and architectural details Generally you want to remove items that you do not need to see or will not use in the plot Use the Purge command in AutoCAD to remove layers blocks and so on that are not wanted or needed You may want to do this several times since layers and wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode blocks are sometimes linked to other parts of the drawing and the Purge command might not pick them up the first time The more unwanted items you can remove the smaller the file size will be and the easier faster it is to import To open a DWG DXF document 1 2 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the File menu choose Open From the Files of Type box select the DWG or DXF type Files of this type appear in
209. exture repeated over the selected element in a continuous series of sguares or rectangles and then type the size of the frame in which you want the texture to appear in the Width and Height boxes Based on the size that you enter WYSIWYG calculates how many times the texture is repeated or tiled to completely cover the selected element Stretch To have the texture stretch over the entire element surface click this option button Based on the aspect ratio and the rotation angle WYSIWYG evaluates the surface with all of its edges and stretches the texture so the best fit Is used Texture Rotation f the texture has text or another recognizable image in it you might need to rotate the image to get it right side up Type the rotation angle in this box Proceed with the following properties settings Material Click the ellipsis button to choose a material for the selected elements Click Default to remove the selected material from the element and return to the default material For more information on materials refer to Materials on page 155 Use Material Transparency All materials in WYSIWYG specify a level of transparency that varies from one material to the next For example glass is more transparent than brick The transparency level of the selected material appears beside this option button with 0 being completely opaque If you select Defau t the transparency level is set to 0 opaque To customize the transparen
210. f the layer on which the object resides For more information refer to Layer properties on page 158 Click to clear the check box and then use the color button to set a specific color for the object m Use Layer Line Thickness Select this check box to set the object s line thickness to be the same as the properties of the layer on which the object resides For more information refer to Layer properties on page 158 Click to clear the check box and then type a thickness in the box below to set a specific line thickness for the object The line weight is used to determine how thick the pen should be when printing a copy of the document The applied line thickness is only visible in Print Preview mode and when printed wysiwyg gt March 2006 Presentation mode Objects that are drawn in New Plots Objects such as lines arcs symbols circles and text that are drawn in a New Plots view have general properties that are inherited from the layer on which they are drawn Along with the general properties a tab appears in the properties dialog box for each type of object that is selected When you select multiple objects of different types tabs appear for each type of object selected For more information refer to Drawing objects on page 123 New Plot Object tab Options on the New Plot Object tab affect the selected object s color and line thickness properties Properties E E4 New Plot Object Line
211. fer to Pipe properties on page 175 To draw a pipe 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the Draw menu choose Pipe Hew Pipe x Length B0 0 Trim Height por O Cancel Interactive 173 CAD mode 5 Tip Release 16 0 In the New Pipe dialog box find the name of the pipe If you need to create the name of the pipe click the ellipsis button to open the Position Manager Click New and then type the name of the pipe In the Length box type the length of the pipe if different from the default The default value is 60 0 In the 7rim Height box type the desired trim height for the pipe The default value is 20 0 Note Pipes ignore the missing coordinate setting when drawn using this method Click OK You may also use the Pipe tool on the Draw toolbar Sss To draw a pipe from center in interactive mode 1 2 From the Draw menu choose Pipe Set the height of the pipe that you are about to draw by pressing the TAB key and then entering a value for the missing coordinate if applicable Click to place the center point of the pipe Drag it to the proper length and then click to place the end point of the pipe Notice that the pipe extends in both directions mirrored at center Right click on the pipe that you have just drawn and then click Properties Click the Hang Structure tab From the Name drop down list select the name for this new pipe If the name is not already in
212. find and a value to replace it with Select the Match whole word only check box to search for data matching exactly what you have typed as opposed to data containing parts or all of what you have typed Select the Match case check box to enable a case sensitive search where uppercase and lowercase letters will affect the results 4 Click Find Next Replace or Replace All Result a If you click Find Next cells that match your search criteria are highlighted with the first match active a If you click Replace cells that match your search criteria are highlighted and the first match is replaced with the value specified in step 3 You can continue clicking Replace to replace each match in turn as wysiwyg March 2006 Data mode a If you click Replace All all matches are replaced with the value specified in step 3 and no cells are highlighted I nserting fixtures in Data mode Any fixtures inserted in Data mode are assigned the status unhung and are placed in the Flight Case The Flight Case allows you to drag and drop unhung fixtures onto your drawing For more information about the Flight Case refer to The Flight Case on page 208 To insert fixtures in Data mode Click the Fixture tool on the Data toolbar Navigate to the desired fixture In the Multiple box type the number of fixtures of that type required A Oo N Click nsert Result The fixtures are inserted below the last entry i
213. fixtures m Quick Gobo enters a gobo number for the selected fixtures m Other enters an accessory type for the selected fixtures Notes 1 When typing values type the exact value or use the browse button to open a selection dialog 2 The entry in the patch box must fulfill the requirements of patch notation which is universe For more information regarding patch notation refer to Reading the patch on page 227 For more information about the data fields refer to Data fields on page 216 When using the quick tools to insert a color or gobo WYSIWYG automatically inserts a default color frame or gobo holder which is already defined in the fixture Remove the default frame and add a new one using Add Accessory For information on adding accessories refer to To insert an accessory on page 202 5 When you are applying a color to a multi source fixture a dialog appears listing the circuit names to which you can apply the Quick Tool color selection To apply the same color to multiple circuits listed in this dialog press CTRL and then select the desired circuits Press Select when you are finished Fixture specific properties Customize the properties of a fixture by assigning specific attributes such as point of view patch information and lens type 192 wysiwyg gt March 2006 To edit view fixture attributes Select the fixture that you want to view or edit Right click and select Properties
214. for example 45 degrees and then press Enter Note As you type the value appears in the box in the lower left hand corner of the window When you are finished rotating the truss click to insert it From the Tools menu click Snap and then choose Assembly To place the second piece of truss click the truss name in the library and then without clicking in the drawing drag the new piece of truss near one of the ends of an existing piece of truss until it snaps into position Note To change the truss type return to the library double click on the name of the new desired truss type and continue placing truss pieces 177 CAD mode 178 12 13 Release 16 0 To rotate this second piece of truss click X for a clockwise rotation and Zfor a counter clockwise direction until it aligns with the first piece of truss Tip You can also click S to rotate the truss from one end to the other based on its center point When you are satisfied with its position click to insert the truss into the drawing wysiwyg gt March 2006 b ES CAD mode Hanging and focusing fixtures Introduction Fixtures are objects on the plot and appear in 3D in shaded views When you insert a fixture into the plot it must be hung from a hang structure WYSIWYG has an extensive library of fixtures to choose from Inserting fixtures into your drawing Is as easy as pointing and clicking You can insert fixtures directly from the Libra
215. formance OpenGL accelerator card significantly improves the performance of real time simulation The following working modes are available in WYSIWYG Perform 20 CAD DATA wysiwyg March 2006 The WYSIWYG suite of software products E DESIGN 5 PRES E LIVE Refer to the respective chapters of this guide for detailed explanations about the features in each mode WYSIWYG Reference Guide 21 The WYSIWYG suite of software products Release 16 0 b WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition 22 Introduction WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition is a version of WYSIWYG Perform intended for distribution with a specific console or family of consoles Users purchasing a compatible console will receive this edition of WYSIWYG Perform to create shows and begin pre cueing activities The Console Edition of WYSIWYG Perform includes most of the functionality of Perform with certain features restricted or removed Note The following specifications are subject to change Software features Includes all the features of WYSIWYG Perform other than printing or exporting in any format 3D plotting of set and lighting designs Multiple working views including front back sides top bottom and isometric Comprehensive 3D library of fixtures accessories truss colors gobos props and so on Fully integrated paperwork and CAD systems Live mode is restricted to visualizing one patch universe at a time Accurate simulation of conventional
216. fy item properties on page 291 Legend tab Options on the Legend tab affect the scaling and content of the placeholder WYSIWYG Reference Guide 299 Presentation mode 300 Release 16 0 Properties FER Keys Legend Print Options General Legend fine 01 fieo hy paper Real ond Legend Select the legend that you want to be displayed on the layout A list of all the legends you have created is displayed in the drop down list Print Options The scale ratio in inches and feet at which the legend should be printed If the scale that you want to use for printing is not displayed select Custom On paper The scale ratio that you want to use on a paper copy of the layout Real World The real measurement for the scale ratio that you specify in the On paper box For example you might want to use a scaling of one inch in a paper copy of your layout However this one inch measurement translates to a more realistic measurement for example 3 feet You may want to add a key to your layout to provide a definition for the fixture notation used in the layout To add a key to a layout you must first use the Key Wizard to create the key The key you create consists of the symbol of one given fixture and identifiers for the various attributes notated around the symbol You can create multiple keys per layout To create key items 1 Right click in the Wizards shortcut bar and then select New Ke
217. g in a New Plots view is similar to navigating in CAD mode The arrow keys are available to help you move in the direction that is noted on the key As well scroll bars along the side and bottom of the window will move you horizontally and vertically along the window For a complete list of the navigation tools that are available refer to Keyboard and mouse control on page 66 Command line The ComEdit toolbar is available to help you enter coordinates when placing objects such as lines in a New Plots view For more information on command line refer to Command line on page 105 Creating a new plot Plots are 2D schematics of your CAD model for printout You can generate as many plots as you like Once generated the view type of the New Plot or schematic is set and cannot be changed There are five plot types available Plot Type Description Plan Plot Generates the schematic from above looking down wysiwyg March 2006 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Presentation mode Plot Type Description Left Section Plot Generates the schematic looking from the left side through the venue Right Section Plot Generates the schematic looking from the right side through the venue Front Elevation Plot Generates the schematic looking from the front side through the venue Back Elevation Plot Generates the schematic looking from the back side through the venue To create a new plot type 1 2 Click the New P ot
218. ge 79 Message Log 333 367 Index Message Log Options toolbar 61 Metric units 103 Micro Layouts 284 MIDI 326 Mirror tool 145 Mirroring 145 Missing coordinate 104 Model data field 217 Modes 49 Modifying wireframe views 68 Motion control system moving objects with 318 Mountable yokes 202 Move 279 Move Page 272 Move tool 143 Movement axes drawing 136 Movement axis adding vertex to linear 139 attaching objects to 138 attaching to a DMX patch 138 attaching to a motion patch 138 changing path of 139 drawing linear 137 drawing rotation 137 moving objects on with a console device 317 moving objects on with a motion control system 318 patching to DMX console device 225 patching to motion control system 225 Moving head 195 Moving mirror 195 Moving scenery reading the patch for 228 viewing 248 249 Moving Scenery tool 242 using 242 Multi source fixtures applying color to 192 Multi source light applying color to with Quick Tools 203 Navigation shortcuts 53 New Back Elevation Plot 269 New Front Elevation Plot 269 New Left Section Plot 269 New Plan Plot 268 New Plot View Properties tab 270 New Plots 268 Attribute layout 275 Creating a new plot type 268 Drawing objects 277 Editing objects 278 Inserting into layouts 290 295 Manipulating object properties 280 Modifying properties of a plot 269 Objects 272 Objects drawn in New Plots 281 Printing 283 368 Relea
219. gobos and then turn off this option to obtain a faster refresh rate j Select the Convex gobos check box to simulate convex gobo fixtures Some complex gobos that include shapes similar to a C have to be pre processed to make them appear correctly This can often reduce the refresh rate wysiwyg gt March 2006 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Live mode k Select the Complex gobos check box to simulate complex gobo fixtures Most gobos are drawn in a complex and a simplified form The complex forms are far too slow for real time simulation and should only be used in rendering I To simulate gobo rotation select the Gobo Rotation check box This option can Slow down the refresh rate substantially as gobos can be rotating even when the fixture s intensity Is at zero m To simulate effects such as prisms select the Effects check box This might increase the number of lines that WYSIWYG has to draw thus slowing down processing power n Select the Center check box to draw a point from the fixture to the point on the Stage where the center of the beam hits If the fixture has CMY color mixing the line will change color to match the output from the console o Select the Continuous Wheels check box to show you automated wheels rotating into place as they would on the real fixtures The effect of the wheel rotating 360 degrees rather than snapping in steps will be shown p Select the Spin Wheels check box to simulate spin wheel
220. gs tab on page 90 Deselect this option to set object specific facet options m Facet Splitting Select this check box to ignore the document defaults and set object specific facet properties Specify the size of the triangles in the Facet Resolution box The more triangles you have the more realistic the cosine distribution is However this also decreases the simulation speed Object specific properties As explained above objects also have properties that are particular to the type of object For example fixtures have unit numbers but do not have a radius When an object is selected and its properties are displayed a tab appears in the properties dialog box for that type of object When you select multiple objects of different types tabs appear for each type of object selected The following objects are defined m points 5 lines m text labels m dimensions 7 library items For all other types of objects venues circles arcs risers cylinders spheres and cameras refer to Drawing objects on page 123 In these cases the properties dialog offers the same options that were given when the object was initially drawn Hanging structures properties pipes truss floor mounts and so on are fully defined in Hang structures on page 171 Fixtures and lighting specific object properties are fully defined in Hanging and focusing fixtures on page 179 wysiwyg gt March 2006 CAD mode Point tab Options on
221. h universes in either a spreadsheet view or a CAD drawing using Ouick Tools their shortcuts are created automatically You can also create new patch universes directly from the shortcut bar To create a new patch universe 1 Click the Patch layout tab 2 Right click in the patch shortcut area and choose New Patch Result A dialog box Is displayed prompting for the type of universe that you want to create and the name of the new universe Enter new Patch Universe name Patch Universe Type w DMX Motion Control Cancel WYSIWYG Reference Guide 223 Data mode Release 16 0 224 3 Type the name of the patch universe Patch universes can be named anything For example A Dimmers Dim Movers Scrollers and so on 4 Select the type of patch universe based on the type of console or system that you are using either a DMX console or a motion control system 5 Click OK Result The patch shortcut appears in the Patch tab Notes To change delete or modify a patch universe right click the shortcut icon for the universe that you want to change Click on the command that you want to perform To display the contents of a patch universe click on the appropriate shortcut icon The name of the universe Is displayed at the top left corner of the Wireframe view To patch fixtures in the patch view 1 Click and hold the desired fixture in the Wireframe view 2 Drag the fixture t
222. he legs Note The width is the distance from the extremity of the pipe to the inside edge of the leg The bottom elevation is the distance from the floor z O to the bottom of the legs 5 Select the Group to pipe check box to group the border and legs to the pipe When this option is selected all the components border legs and pipe are selected as one Note If at a later time you want to edit a border or leg individually you must ungroup the objects 6 Click OK Result Three surfaces are drawn and attached to the selected pipe Drawing focus positions For details refer to Drawing focus positions on page 183 Drawing screens Streaming video enables you to bring a live or pre recorded video stream into WYSI WYG and play it back while you set looks in Design mode and while you precue in Live mode To do so you must first use CAD mode to draw the screen upon which the video will play Once you draw the screen you can leave it blank assign a static image or you can assign a video source to it using the Video Manager You can select a video file or you can capture a live video stream from an external source such as a web cam or a video capture device that is installed on your computer provided that you have WYSIWYG Perform For video files you must select one of the following video file formats for playback u Motion Picture Experts Group MPEG m Audio Video Interleaved AVI Note If you cannot view thes
223. hem automatically detected By default WYSIWYG uses Open GL graphics technology in all simulation views If you want you can set WYSI WYG to use Direct 3D instead of Open GL in which case the following options are available Application Options Compatibility Render Options ETC Interface General File Options Direct3D OpenGL Toolbars a a Acceleration Colour Hardware Full i Emulation Ramp WYSIWYG Reference Guide Specify Hame Acceleration Colour Ramp Emulation Emulation Fi amp AGB Emulation Emulation Auto Detect WYSIWYG attempts to find a DirectX driver that corresponds to the options you have set for Acceleration and Color The driver that it chooses is highlighted in the list of available drivers below Acceleration Enables either hardware or software emulation acceleration Hardware acceleration uses the capabilities of the graphics hardware of the computer to display graphics Emulation uses the emulation library or software components to display graphics Color Enables either full or ramp color 85 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 16 0 86 Full displays the full color content of the fixture sources and the material of the object being lit This is the default option Ramp displays only the grey component of each fixture specified in a scene The color components of the fixtures are ignored You can also manually select a DirectX driver from the list of drivers The
224. hen choose Circles into arcs Type the number of desired break arcs and then click OK Result The circle is broken egually into the number of arcs specified To break a circle into lines 1 Select the circle that you want to break From the Tools menu choose Break and then choose Circles into lines 3 Type the number of desired break lines and then click OK Result The circle is broken equally into the number of lines specified To break a line at vertices 1 Select the multi segment line that you want to break 2 From the Tools menu choose Break and then choose Lines At Vertices Result The continuous multi segment line is broken at the segment intersections Each vertex is now an independent line To break a line into lines 1 Select the line or multi segment line that you want to break 2 From the Tools menu choose Break and then choose Lines into lines us wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode 3 Type the number of desired break lines and then click OK Result The line is broken egually into the number of lines specified To break a set piece into faces 1 Select the 3D solid that you want to break for example a riser 2 From the Tools menu choose Break and then choose Set pieces into faces Result Each face of the solid becomes an independent surface To break a set piece into lines 1 Select the 3D solid that you want to break a riser for example 2 From the Tools menu choose Break and then choose Set piece
225. hich are attached to a pipe at the beginning of a hang The pipe tape indicates to the electricians where to hang the fixtures and displays pertinent information about the fixtures such as circuit number dimmer number gel color and so on as specified by the user This tool significantly increases the accuracy between the WYSIWYG plot and the real installation Note Pipe tape printers are sold separately and are available through Cast Group To print a pipe tape 1 Connect the pipe tape printer to your computer through the serial port In CAD mode select the pipe for which you want to generate a pipe tape From the Tools menu choose Print Pipe Tape Result The Print Pipe Tape Setup dialog box is displayed Print Pipe Tape Setup FE Fisture details M Unt W Colour W Gobo W Lens M Lamp WW Accessories lw Focus W Point M Spin M Pan M Tit I Notes lw Spot Tw Channel I Purpose W Circuit lw Patch Header lw Show Info Bitmap File Joysinygbmp Pa W Fixture Count a Text Fil T W Circuit Count Eu El lw Lens Count I Weight Footer lM Show Info Bitmap File ysig bmp ES w Fixture Count W Circuit Count Text File m lw Lens Count lw Weight Save and Exit Cancel Show Tick Marks 4 In the Fixture details group box select the data fields that you want printed on the pipe tape for each fixture 5 To print show information such as venue lighting designer and show name select the Show nfo chec
226. hlight the release that you want to update and then click Next On the WYSIWYG Update window select Next AEL AL Update x Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for wys i w y The Install amp Field Wizard will update the installed version 1 05 2403 of Wr SIW TYG to version 1 B 213 To continue click Next lt Hank Cancel On the WYS WYG Update window click Yes to accept the terms of the license AEL AL Update License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PROGRAM IF ynu have acquired the software in packaging which has required you to agree to the term of a License Agreement upon opening of such packaging that license shall govern your use of the software lf not the following License Agreement shall govern your use nf the software This iz a legal agreement between you either an individual or corporate entity and Cast E Do vou accept all the terme of the preceding License Agreement If ynu select No the setup will close To install Wr Siw rG you must accept this agreement lRetallehreld No Result The updated files are copied to your computer After all the files are copied click FINISH to complete the update I nstalling WYSI WYG Learn or WYSI WYG Network Software components one or more clients The WYSIWY
227. ich offset values will be calculated Length Type new text to change the length of the selected pipe Trim Height Type new text to change the trim height If the pipe is vertical this value determines the lowest Z value of the pipe 175 CAD mode Release 16 0 Hanging truss Truss is a hang structure with multiple hanging members Truss differs from pipes in that it is built from library objects instead of being drawn WYSIWYG contains an extensive library of different truss types from many different manufacturers The truss library also contains floor mounts booms and ladders To hang truss 1 Open the Library Browser and then click the 7russ tool Tip You can also click the 7russ tool on the Draw toolbar to place truss ER Navigate through the library to find the type of truss you want to use Double click on the truss name Result A piece of truss attaches to the cursor Click on the drawing to place the first piece of truss Continue placing pieces of truss as needed Note To change the truss type return to the library double click on the name of the new desired truss type and continue placing truss pieces as normal Tip You can also use Truss shortcuts 6 Right click and choose Finish Placing Truss 7 Right click on the truss that you have just inserted and then click Properties 8 Click the Hang Structure tab 9 From the Name drop down list select the name for this new truss If the name is not already in the li
228. ick to set the radius for the circle Drawing arcs There are two ways in which you can draw arcs m non interactive mode in which you type the exact radius start and end angles of the arc m interactive mode in which you click and drag to set the arc WYSIWYG Reference Guide 129 CAD mode 130 Release 16 0 To draw an arc in non interactive mode 1 N O O FP O mp From the Draw menu choose Arc Tip You can also use the Arc tool on the Draw toolbar p In the Radius box type a radius for the arc The default value is 4 0 In the Start Angle box type the start angle The default value is 0 00 In the End Angle box type the end angle for the arc The default value is 180 00 Click OK Click on the drawing to place the arc Click elsewhere in the drawing to finish placing the arc To draw an arc in interactive mode Note To turn interactive mode on click the Interactive Mode button on the toolbar o Ff N From the Draw menu choose Arc Tip You can also use the Arc tool on the Draw toolbar W7 Click to place the start point of the arc Click to place the end point of the arc Click to place the middle point of the arc Click elsewhere in the drawing to finish placing the arc Drawing text labels To draw a text label 1 From the Draw menu choose Text Label Tip You can also use the 7ext Labe tool on the Draw toolbar T In the 7ext box type the desired text Type a height for the te
229. ies Note When you make a change to an attribute the results are previewed in the box on the right a Select the Visib e check box if you want the attribute to be displayed around the fixture symbol in your plot b Select the Use Body Color check box if you want the attribute label to use the same font color as the fixture symbol Leave the box unchecked and choose a color to set a specific color for that attribute c Adjust the line weight to increase or decrease the density of the label font d Select the talics check box to italicize the label font Note there are no options to change the font e Select the Position with fixture check box if you want the attribute s label to maintain its position in relation to the fixture symbol regardless of where the fixture is focused f Select the Rotate with fixture check box if you want the attribute s label to maintain its alignment in relation to the fixture symbol regardless of where the fixture is focused Note This option is only available if Position with fixture is selected g Set the horizontal and vertical justification for the text This is in relation to the insertion point or shape h Increase or decrease the height to modify the font size I Set the angle to specify the label alignment in relationship to the fixture symbol j Select a shape to be associated with this attribute if desired You can choose from none circle sguare octagon or diamond 199
230. iew m Manu Type the manufacturer s code for those fixtures that are autofocus compatible m Prod Type the product code for those fixtures that are autofocus compatible Facet Splitting Select this check box to enable facet splitting in shaded views Facet splitting splits objects in a plot into small triangles for a smooth beam fallout during simulation in a shaded view m Facet Resolution Type the size of the triangles The more triangles you have the more realistic the cosine distribution will be However this also decreases the simulation speed Note that this is applicable to Direct 3D only m Segments Type the number of segments into which you want to break a cylinder or sphere Report tab Options on the Report tab affect the default values for empty or non applicable cells in spreadsheets WYSIWYG Reference Guide 91 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 16 0 Show Options x Document Summary Show Info Object Defaults Object Settings Report Data Error Regional Settings Field Empty MAR Unit H Spot H Position H Purpose H Colour pw H ba H Gwo Af d Circuit H NA z Patch H Pa E Channel H Pa k las Af a A Cancel Data Error tab Options on the Data Error tab control what types of data errors trigger notification boxes and status bar notifications Show Options x Document Summary Show Info Object Defaults Object Settings Report
231. iews XZ for front and back views E To select the axes of movement with the toolbar buttons click the appropriate two buttons to select both of them For example to choose the XY axis click the Xand Y buttons H To deselect any ortho buttons that you have chosen press F8 to reset the same ortho selection as that which was previously made press F8 again Snaps Snaps are used to assist in the drawing and placement of objects When a snap setting is active the cursor will be drawn to the applicable snap point You can have multiple snaps active at the same time Snap selections can be made on the CAD Options toolbar or from the Tools menu All snap tools function as follows If no command is currently active you can adjust the running snap tool This means that the snap type is always active If you are in mid command and you select a snap tool it becomes a one time only snap type After the next click the snap returns to the running snap At any time you can toggle all snaps on or off by pressing F9 or double clicking on the SNAP text in the status bar m 4i Grid snap Aligns the placement of objects to grid points You can set the grid interval and angle in the Draw Options page of the View Options window WYSIWYG Reference Guide 107 CAD mode 108 Release 16 0 E Point snap Aligns the placement of objects to a point in the drawing m a Midpoint snap Aligns the placement of objects to the mid point of ano
232. if you want the printable outlines to be displayed on each sheet of paper that comprises the plot The solid outline is the chosen printer s paper size and orientation u Show page number Select this check box if you want the page numbers of the plot to be displayed in the center of each page The page numbers are for reference only and do not appear in the printed output a Tile options Click the appropriate option button to enable one of the following a op Left Click to place the top left corner of the plot in the top left corner of the first page and then arrange the remaining pages accordingly a Center Click to place the center of the plot at the center of a page and then arrange the remaining pages accordingly a Split Center Click to place the center of the plot at the corner of four pages and then arrange the remaining pages accordingly WYSIWYG Reference Guide 2 1 Presentation mode Release 16 0 2 2 Fixture Details tab Options on the Fixture Detai s tab affect the fixture data that is displayed on the plot View Options Mew Plot View Properties Tile Printing Fixture Details Fixture data shown on plot Mae E Chamel E spo E toou We lamp Focus P Gobo F ferent P Patch P Position 1 Eumpase Lene Uo Hoes Td uimme P Intensity W Use User Details n Use User Details Click to clear this check box if you do not want the currently selected fixture data displayed on the plot The default fi
233. igates you to the appropriate error report c Acknowledge the error and then click Options to reset the error notification triggers as described above Error spreadsheet properties Error spreadsheets may be sorted and modified in a similar manner as other spreadsheet views To modify an error sheet 1 2 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Click the Errors layout tab From the Options menu choose View Options Result The View Options dialog box is displayed View Options E x General Data View Options Data Error Options Follow User Scene Scene All Layers z For information on the General and Data View Options tab refer to Customizing Spreadsheets on page 220 On the Data Error Options tab set triggers for the error that is displayed in the Name box on the General tab For more information on triggers refer to To set error triggers on page 232 233 Data mode Release 16 0 aa wysiwyg gt gt Chapter 8 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Design mode Design mode was created to provide lighting designers with an avenue using the design tools and then save and render those looks to output photorealistic pictures In this chapter Layout tabs Design tools Concepts Palettes Creating looks Rendering for 237 238 244 246 247 250 experimentation Use it as a troubleshooting tool or as a creative tool to help you come up with cue concepts In Design mode you can create static
234. ill extrude vertically For splines you must specify the number of segments for the new surface in the 7 of Points box To extrude an arc Select the arc that you want to extrude From the Tools menu choose Extrude and then choose Arcs into Surfaces Type the distance to extrude the line The extrusion will occur parallel to the axis of the missing coordinate For example an arc shown in plan view will extrude vertically Type the number of segments for the new surface You cannot type the number 1 The higher the number the more circular the surface To extrude a surface into an extruded surface Tip Select the surface that you want to extrude From the Tools menu choose Extrude and then choose Surface into Extruded Surface Type the distance to extrude the surface The extrusion occurs parallel to the axis of the missing coordinate For example a surface shown in plan view will extrude vertically You can also use the Extrude tool on the 7oo s toolbar i Fillet The Fillet command joins two lines sharing the same end point or two apparent intersecting lines with an arc A fillet radius must be specified to achieve the desired fillet angle Apparent Intersecting Lines Lines sharing End Point Resulting Fillet with a 5 radius Resulting Fillet with a 5 radius wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode To set the fillet radius 1 From the Tools menu choose Fillet and then choose Specify fillet radius 2 _ Type
235. in an educational edition This product WYSIWYG Report Educational Edition is a fully functional version of Report that is available to Students and faculty at a special price Note The following specifications are subject to change Software features u 2D plotting of set and lighting designs plans sections and elevations m Comprehensive 3D library of fixtures accessories truss colors gobos props and so on 7 Extensive CAD tools m Excellent zooming and maneuvering abilities E Custom layers and scenes for complete control and management of information m Loading and exporting of DXF DWG Excel BMP and J PG m Tabular editing of lighting information including channel dimmer color and so on m Fully integrated paperwork and 2D CAD systems E Error checking of production paperwork and hookups m Reports including instrument counts and schedules patch sheets and so on 7 Printing of plots and reports up to 36 x 48 AO m Custom report and plot content and layout E Ability to print all view types including 2D CAD reports spreadsheets bitmap files jpeg files and logos m Multi monitor support m 12 months of software and library updates included Upgrade suggestions m A faster processor improves responsiveness 7 Memory requirements depend on the size of the show Insufficient memory can seriously affect performance Add memory if there is excessive disk activity Modes The following working modes are availabl
236. in the installation After all the files are copied click F N SH to complete the installation To install the Network Learn Client 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the WYSIWYG Installation window select nsta WYSIWYG Result The CAST license screen appears If you accept the terms of the license click Yes to continue The installation begins Click F N SH to complete the installation 37 Installation configuration activation and registration Release 16 0 b ae Configuration activation and registration Introduction After installing the product when you launch WYSIWYG for the first time the Product Configuration Wizard appears enabling you to choose the product level that you want to run You can choose from standard product levels such as Design and Report Network products or you can run the Demo or Viewer versions of WYSIWYG Note To run any of the products listed in the Wizard you must first have the appropriate dongle installed on your computer to run a network product you must have a network dongle installed on a computer that is accessible from your PC After you proceed through the steps of the Wizard you are prompted to activate your product only if you are upgrading from version 3 X to the latest version and then you are prompted to register the software You must activate and register the WYSIWYG software before you can start using it To activate the WYSIWYG software involves entering
237. ing the SuperPro Monitoring Tool Searching for a server If a server does not appear in the list you can search for it on the network To search for a server 1 From the View menu choose Find Result The Find Server dialog box is displayed Find Server x Serer Name List of servers to find Add Server Delete Serve Cancel 2 In the Server Name box type the host name or IP address of the server that you are looking for Click Add Server to add the server to the list of servers to find Click Find Server to search for the server If the server is found it appears in the server list in the left pane Note Once a server has been added to the list of servers to search for it remains on the list until you remove it To remove a server from the list select the server and then click Delete Server Refreshing the server list You can either manually or automatically refresh the server list using the Monitoring Tool To manually refresh the server list From the View menu choose Refresh To automatically refresh the server list 1 From the View menu choose Refresh Rate In the Refresh After box type the refresh rate in minutes Click OK Result The server list is automatically refreshed at the rate that you specify Additional help For further assistance in using the Sentinel SuperPro Monitoring Tool refer to the online Help available with the product WYSIWYG Reference Guide 349 Using the SuperPro Moni
238. ing to the right on the trackpad results in the beam moving left but rotating the fixture 180 degrees and dragging to the right should cause the beam to move to the right This effect occurs with both moving mirror and moving head fixtures Video tool Streaming video enables you to bring a live or pre recorded video stream into WYSIWYG and play it back while you set looks in Design mode and while you precue in Live mode To do so you must first use CAD mode to draw the screen upon which the video will play Note You can only incorporate live video if you have WYSIWYG Perform you cannot select a video from a live capture device if you have WYSIWYG Design After you draw the screen and attach the video source you use the Video designer tool in Design mode to start the playback or stream You can view the video in any of the Shaded views using the controls on the Video designer tool to pause fast forward rewind or stop the video To use the Video tool Once you have the video source attached to the screen you must use the Video designer tool to control it For more information on attaching the video source to the screen see To draw a screen on page 135 and To configure a new video source for streaming video on page 135 Note If the video control is patched and DMX connected in Live Mode then you will not be able to control the video using any of the Video designer tool commands in Design mode Video sources can only be
239. inserts To enter a value for the missing coordinate 1 Press TAB on your keyboard or click the Missing Coordinate tool on the CAD Options toolbar Enter the missing coordinate z kd Fa CAD coordinate foo Focus coordinate joo Head height oor Use only one missing coordinate Automatically adjust with command line Show head height circle Cancel In the CAD coordinate box type the value for the CAD coordinate In the Focus coordinate box type a value for the focus coordinate if you want to focus fixtures while inserting objects 4 If you want to use only the CAD coordinate for focusing and placing editing objects select the Use only one missing coordinate check box 5 To automatically adjust the missing coordinate with any 3D coordinate value that you enter on the command line select the Automatically adjust with command line check box 6 Select the Show head height check box to display the coverage of beams at the head height selected in the Head height box 7 In the Head height box type a value to check the light coverage at a certain height the height of the performer Note This box is enabled when the Show head height circle check box is selected 8 When you are finished with your selections click OK Example 1 Change to the plan view in your drawing Press TAB and then type a value of 0 for the missing CAD coordinate Insert a few objects on the stage All of these objects are drawn
240. into pipes Pipes mite lines Focus positione inte ponte Ponts mta focus positions lw Delete original objects T Put new objects on current layer 3 Select the desired conversion type from the available options by selecting the appropriate option buttons Select the Don t convert option button if you do not want to convert the circle into either an arc or a surface Note For circles select the Arcs or Surfaces option button and then type the number of points as discussed above 4 Select the Delete original objects check box if you want the original object to be replaced with the new converted one 5 Select the Put new objects on current layer check box if you want the new converted objects to be placed on the current layer as opposed to the selected object s original layer if different 6 Click OK Divide The divide command separates objects into egual parts The initial object is left intact if not deleted and the parts are identified by newly created objects such as points or lines To divide an arc into lines 1 Select the arc that you want to divide 2 From the Tools menu choose Divide and then choose Arcs into lines WYSIWYG Reference Guide 165 CAD mode 166 Release 16 0 Type the number of lines desired Result The arc is divided into equal parts by the number of lines specified The lines are automatically drawn from the center of the arc outward resulting in something si
241. ion You can set a password in WYSIWYG to password protect your dongle To set a password 1 From the Help menu choose Password Result The Change Password dialog box appears Change Password ea Current paszword Hew password Contin pazzword No password Cancel In the New password box type your new password The password can be any combination of letters numbers and characters As you type the password WYSIWYG displays an asterisk for each character that you type The length of the password can be between 6 and 20 characters In the Confirm password box re enter the password Click OK Result The next time that you launch WYSIWYG on the same computer you will be prompted to enter your password In the Enter password box type your password If you do not want to be prompted to enter a password every time you launch WYSIWYG select the Remember for next time check box To change a password 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the Help menu choose Password Result The Change Password dialog box is displayed In the Current password box type the password that you previously set You must type the current password if you want to change the password As you type the password WYSIWYG displays an asterisk for each character you type In the New password box type a new password In the Confirm password box re enter the password Click OK Note If you decide that you do not want to pas
242. ion on symbols refer to Symbols on page 197 E Show beams for selected fixtures Select this check box to automatically turn on beams when selecting a fixture on your drawing If you do not select this box the beam is not visible when you select a fixture E Show truss cross members Click to clear this check box to hide truss cross members on your drawing to reduce the clutter or to increase the speed of the display Select this check box to see the cross members 7 Point Size Select the default size for all points You can view a sample of the chosen size in the box to the right Simulation tab Options on the Simulation tab are only set for WYSIWYG Design and Perform These settings determine how detailed simulation views are and can affect the speed of beam Simulation in simulation views wysiwyg March 2006 Managing your WYSIWYG document User Options m Iv mj mj m mj m For more information on simulation options refer to Visualization on page 323 WYSIWYG Reference Guide 97 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 16 0 WYSIWYG Viewer 98 The WYSIWYG Viewer is a separate application that allows non WYSIWYG users to view and print your WYSIWYG wyg files It is beneficial to those individuals who are interested in viewing or printing a WYSIWYG file but who do not own a licensed copy of WYSIWYG Any file with a wyg file extension can be viewed and printed from the WYSIWYG Viewer Since Presen
243. ious backup copy If the main show document becomes corrupted you can open the backup file to recover your data The default settings for these options are Auto Recover enabled with an interval of 10 minutes and Keep backup files enabled Save external textures within the document Select this check box if you want the jpeg and or bitmap used as textures to be saved within your WYSIWYG document The textures will travel with the document and will be visible regardless of the computer on which the document is opened Reload last document on startup Select this check box to ensure that the last document that you have been working on in WYSIWYG is loaded automatically when you launch WYSIWYG Default to Read Only Select this check box to load documents in read only format This format is helpful if you are loading someone else s document and you do not want to accidentally make changes to it Reset DWG import association Click this button to reset the association of specific blocks in DWG files with certain pre selected fixtures When you import DWG files one of the options is to associate a block that is found in a DWG file with a specific fixture If you decide to remember this association for future imports all blocks with that name will be imported as the chosen fixture Direct3D tab Options on the D rect3D tab affect the setting of the DirectX components to be used for graphics You can select these components manually or have t
244. ired location Release the mouse button 305 Presentation mode Release 16 0 Ordering To facilitate overlaying and underlaying placeholders use the Bring to Front and Send to Back tools Think of placeholders as being piled on top of each other Bring to Front moves the selected placeholder and its contents to the top of the pile Send to Back moves the selected placeholder and its contents behind all of the others To overlay a placeholder 1 Click to select the presentation item 2 From the Edit menu choose Bring to Front Tip You can also use the Bring to Front tool on the Pres Layout Edit toolbar Th To underlay a placeholder 1 Click to select the presentation item 2 From the Edit menu choose Send to Back du Tip You can also use the Send to Back tool on the Pres Layout Edit toolbar Printing layouts 306 If you have a large layout you can tile print the layout across multiple smaller sheets of paper To set up how you want the layout arranged on the sheets of paper see Working with layouts on page 285 You can print a complete layout or specific pages of a layout based on the settings that you choose when printing To print a layout 1 From the File menu choose Print Result The Print dialog box is displayed Print Ea Frinter Name WMCBAINSHP LazerJet 4050 T PS Properties Shatus Ready Type HP Lazeret 4050 Seres PS Where HP4050T Comment Print to file i All
245. ist To learn more about scenes refer to Editing objects on page 142 Tip You can also change the current scene at any time by using the drop down list on the Scene toolbar Draw Options tab Options on the Draw Options tab affect the draw defaults This tab is similar in function to the Draw Defaults tab available in User Options For more information on the Draw Defaults tab refer to Draw Defaults tab on page 94 View Options x General Draw Options View Type Show Details fw Snap To I Grid Centre Snap Size 8 MidGrid D Assembly Pants JT Pipe Midpoints JW Focus Endpoints Pan 45 Tilt 19 lw Enable Grip Dragging Units y Metric C Imperial M Cross Hairs On Precision Background Colour L C Whole Fraction a Visible Grid Grid Interval joe Origin O o oo oo Angle jo cy C Onor Grid Colour Stile Standard Open Point 7 Use Document Settings Get Document Settings Use User Defaults Select this check box to reference the options selected on the Draw Defaults tab of User Options Click to clear the Use User Defaults check box to make specific changes for the active view Get User Defaults Retrieves the values set on the Draw Defaults tab of User Options View Type tab Options on the View Type tab affect the plot type of the active view WYSIWYG Reference Guide 69 WYSIWYG user interface Release 1
246. ixture is reserved for you in case you want to reinsert it m Show fixture notes when inserting Select this check box to display the fixture notes when you are hanging fixtures if applicable to the selected fixture m Pipe drawing mode Sets the preference for drawing pipes either from the start or from the center For more information on drawing pipes refer to Drawing pipes on page 134 m Missing coordinate Sets missing coordinate options For more information on missing coordinates refer to The missing coordinate on page 104 m Focus mode Allows you to choose to focus a fixture as you hang it in your drawing Specify one of the following options to set how a fixture will react after you hang it in a plot m WNone This setting indicates that you can continue to hang fixtures uninterrupted a Focus after hang If enabled you will be prompted to focus each fixture as you hang it Once the fixture is focused you can continue hanging other fixtures m Focus towards origin If enabled the fixtures that you hang are automatically focused towards the user origin as you hang them You can continue to hang other fixtures uninterrupted Draw Defaults tab Options on the Draw Defaults tab affect general preferences for snap grid and units settings 34 wysiwyg gt gt March 2006 User Options User Managing your WYSIWYG document 2 x Draw Defaults Show Details Simulation W SnanTo I Grid Centre S
247. ized by the motion controller then the object position is Shown as a question mark Note If the axis type is mismatched between that which you have drawn and the type that you choose in the Motion Control Console for example if the actual axis is linear but you choose rotational in the Motion Control Console then the cell in patch view turns to red Patch view properties You can view and modify patch universe properties such as the name display details and tooltip information that is displayed in a patch universe To view the properties of a patch universe 1 Right click on the patch icon and then select View Options Result The View Options dialog box is displayed View Options x Universe Display Show Details ID Conventionals Mame FORT amp Source Console Mini Console Fort TCPVIF Socket Bind UnBind Universe tab Options on the Universe tab affect the binding unbinding of the patch universe to a specific console or device output ID The name of the patch universe shortcut Name The full name of the patch universe or port ID Source The lighting control console or device and port to which the patch universe is bound Bind Associates the patch universe to a console or device output This applies only when a console or device has been inserted in the Device Manager wysiwyg March 2006 Data mode m Unbind Removes the association of the patch universe with the s
248. k OK To obtain a backup look status 1 From the WYSILink menu choose Backup Looks and then choose Status Result The BackUp Looks Status dialog box is displayed Backup Look Status FR Node List 2 View which ETCLink enabled DMX nodes have backup looks associated with them and if the looks are currently active Note Changes to backup looks will not be immediately visible You may need to wait up to 30 seconds for the change to take effect Load recording To record a load 1 From the WYSILink menu choose Load Recording and then choose Record Result The Dimmer Loads dialog box is displayed Dimmer Selection Select all non zero Specify i Cancel WYSIWYG Reference Guide 343 WYSI Link Link mode Release 16 0 2 Specify the dimmer for which you want to record a load or specify all non zero level dimmers Note Recording the load on a dimmer enables WYSILink to notify you when the dimmer s load has changed such as when a lamp fails 3 When finished click OK To check or clear a load 1 From the WYSILink menu choose Load Recording and then choose Check or Clear Result The Check Loads or Clear Loads dialog box is displayed Check Loads dialog box ELUd Dimmers to check Cancel Clear Loads dialog box Dimmers to clear i i Cancel 2 _ Type the number of the dimmers to check or clear You can specify a range of number using a dash for example 23 47 Use co
249. k box Show information is entered in Show options as described in Show information on page 267 6 To display a graphic in the header and or footer type a file name in the Bitmap File box or use the file browser to locate the file To display correctly the graphics selected must be monochrome bitmaps 7 _ To print a total count of the fixtures on the selected pipe select the Fixture Count check box The total count is broken down by fixture type 8 _ To print a total count of the circuits used by the fixtures select the Circuit Count check box 9 _ To display text in the footer and or header of the pipe tape type a text file name in the 7ext File box WYSIWYG Reference Guide 309 Presentation mode 310 10 11 12 13 14 Release 16 0 To print a total count of the number of lenses mounted in the fixtures select the Lens Count check box The total count is broken down by fixture type To print the weight of the fixtures on the pipe select the Weight check box To display tick marks on the pipe tape select the Show Tick Marks check box Tick marks are placed every foot or half meter based on the unit of measurement imperial or metric The tick marks are for reference purposes only When you have finished making your selections click Print to send the print job to the pipe tape printer Click Save and Exit if you want to save the settings but do not want to print the pipe tape at this time wysiwyg gt
250. l Lighting To generate a rendering that considers outdoor lighting conditions select the Environmental Lighting check box b Date and Time The date and time of the rendering determines the position of the sun and or moon and the resulting amount of light available The position of the sun is also determined by the geographic settings that are configured in Show Options and the north direction that is set in CAD mode For more information on regional settings refer to Regional settings tab on page 92 For more information on setting the direction that is north refer to Drawing a compass on page 140 c Light Quality The amount of light available determines the brightness of the resulting rendering Use the Light Quality slider to adjust the quality of light d Soft Shadow Click the Enable soft shadow check box and then use the slider to set the softness of shadows that are created by sunlight The softer the Shadow the less sharp the resulting shadow PREVIEW When you click Next in Step 6 the Render Wizard calculates a small preview of the rendering and shows it in the right hand view It will always zoom to fit the full size of the rendered view first but you can click in the view and zoom in and out using the PAGE UP PAGE DOWN keys Use the preview to fix any glaring errors in your rendering before you continue on to the final rendering wysiwyg March 2006 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Design mode Step 7 Pic
251. le into a circular surface you can convert lines into pipes and vice versa and you can convert points into focus positions and vice versa WYSIWYG Reference Guide 163 CAD mode Release 16 0 To convert a circle into an arc 1 Select the circle that you want to convert 2 From the Tools menu choose Convert and then choose Circles into arcs Result The circle is converted into a 360 degree arc The marker points can be dragged out to open the arc If desired To convert a circle into a surface 1 Select the circle that you want to convert From the Tools menu choose Convert and then choose Circles into surfaces Type the number of segments to make up the contour of the surface You cannot type the number 1 The higher the number the more circular the surface Result The circle is converted into a surface Notes m If you type 2 the circle is converted into a linear surface m If you type 3 the circle is converted into a triangular surface a If you type 4 the circle is converted to a square surface a This pattern will repeat for each increment in the number of segments To convert a line into a pipe 1 Select the line that you want to convert 2 From the Tools menu choose Convert and then choose Lines into pipes Result The line is converted into a pipe assuming all of the properties and characteristics of a pipe You can name it and hang fixtures on it To convert a pipe into a line 1 Select the pipe you wa
252. le is displayed at the top left of the WYSIWYG window For more information on setting the name of your file refer to File menu on page 77 NOW The current date and System settings in Windows time Note If you will be applying the report heading globally it is important that you include the Group variable in the heading This ensures that the page numbers are not lost in those reports in which Group By has been enabled Those reports that are not grouped by will be unaffected and will display a blank cell Saving heading files 266 Heading files are separate from the reports themselves and can be saved outside of the Show document in Excel format This saved heading file can in turn be applied globally to all reports This is a great tool for using the same header across multiple documents To save a heading file Redesign the headings of the selected report as described above Before closing the Report Headings Editor from the File menu choose Save as In the File Name box type a name for the Excel format heading file Click Save Close the Report Headings Editor o fF Oo N Result The heading file is saved in the WYSIWYG library folder unless otherwise specified You are prompted to load the new heading file name Click Yes You are prompted to apply the headings to all the reports in the document Click Yes to indicate that all reports will be modified Click No to change only the chosen report
253. length of the line and then click OK Result WYSIWYG adjusts the size of the floorplan based on the scale that you have entered to ensure that your drawing is accurate The floorplan appears in your drawing in plan view the only view in which you can see it Tip Once you import the floorplan you cannot delete it from your drawing However you can hide it from sight by right clicking on your drawing and selecting Hide Floorplan To show the floorplan again simply right click and select Show Floorplan wysiwyg March 2006 y a The Library Browser Introduction CAD mode An essential component of WYSIWYG is its extensive library You can view the contents of the library in the Library Browser Working with the Library Browser The Library Browser is dockable which means that it has a grab bar on the top that is used to move it around the screen You can place it on the edges of the work area at the top bottom left or right You can also drag it off the edge of the work area and into its own window This window remains on top of the WYSIWYG screen and may be dragged anywhere on your display Note If you experience difficulty undocking the browser hold down the Ctrl key while dragging the grab bar To open the Library Browser 1 2 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the Library menu choose Browse Library Tip You can also click the Library tools on the Draw toolbar Note You can also access the
254. lick the Create Shortcut tool at the top of the Library Browser a Result A shortcut to the object will appear on the appropriate shortcut bar Tip You can also right click on the object name and then select Create Shortcut To modify a shortcut for a library object 1 Right click on the shortcut and then select Properties Result The Properties dialog box appears An example of the accessories Shortcut Property dialog box is shown below Shortcut Property FT x Name Fari Slide Holder 24 mm Type Fani Slide Holder 240mm Properties Cancel 2 In the Mame box type a new name for the shortcut The name of the fixture color gobo accessories library or truss as listed in the library is displayed in the Type box 3 For fixtures you can modify the type of lens and lamp associated with the fixture by selecting the appropriate option from the Lens and Lamp drop down lists respectively Click Properties to view the properties of the library entry When you are satisfied with your selections click OK Custom library items You can create custom library items custom conventional fixtures custom gobos and custom color and gobo wheels or scrolls When creating custom gobos and custom library items you are given the option to make the item or gobo available to other documents in which case the item or gobo is saved to the application s library If you do not choose to make the items available to other
255. ll fit in a column If you overlay tools so that they are not completely visible click on the triangle in the tools title bar This expands or contracts the tool s window 5 If you click and drag a tool s title bar off the column it expands into its own window Using the Design tools Begin by selecting the desired fixtures To select fixtures Select a fixture or fixtures You can select multiple fixtures by holding the CTRL key while clicking on the fixture symbols You can also use concepts as described in Concepts on page 244 Tip You can also right click and drag a box around a section of your drawing to select fixtures This displays a context sensitive menu displaying all the fixture types contained within that box You can then easily select All Mac500 for example Result The selected fixtures are highlighted in green I ntensity tool To use the intensity tool The intensity tool provides many options for setting intensity levels Dial___ oft Full Intensity ineb fua Box al Click the buttons for the extreme settings of intensity Fu 10090 and Off 0 Use the dial to achieve any of the settings in between To use the dial click and hold the dial while you move the mouse up or down The chosen intensity level is displayed in the Intensity box as you move the mouse Alternatively you can enter a specific percentage by typing the number in the ntensity box and then clicking
256. ll represent the center of the circle around which the objects will be arrayed 4 In the dialog box that opens type the total number of copies desired this includes the original object 5 Specify the total angle in degrees to fill with copied objects WYSIWYG Reference Guide 169 CAD mode Release 16 0 6 Select the Rotate object check box if you want the copied objects to rotate as they are pasted around the center of the circular array as shown below lt lt v gt lt A NV 4 lt Polar array with Object rotation Polar array without Object rotation 7 Click OK Distance The distance tool allows you to measure the distance and angle from one point to another To measure a distance 1 From the Tools menu choose Distance Tip You can also use the Distance tool on the 7oo s toolbar p Pick the starting point for the measurement Pick the end point of the measurement Result The length and angle of the specified trajectory is displayed in the bottom left corner of the status bar Tip When selecting the starting and end points for the measurement use the snap tools for precision 170 wysiwyg e March 2006 CAD mode b o t Hang structures Introduction Hang structures are a very important part of creating a lighting plot in WYSIWYG All fixtures must be placed on a hang structure either a pipe or a truss This includes fixtures on set mounts or floor mounts Hang structures are not only a
257. ll selected click Properties Result The Properties dialog box is displayed Properties x Console Manufacturer Protocal CAST Model Mini Console Mame Mini Console Address Open Bid LlnEind Universe Conventio Gwe a From the Protocol drop down list select the protocol used by the console For example DMX SandNet Result The console model is displayed in the Model box The name of the console is displayed in the Name box In the Address box type the designated address of the console if applicable A list of the output ports from the console appears in the Ports list You must bind these outputs to WYSIWYG patch universes Click the appropriate port to highlight it Note Motion control systems have a single port named Motion Click Bind Note If you are working with a motion control system then you can bind only to motion universes if you are working with a DMX console then you can bind only to DMX universes Result The Patch Universe Select dialog box is displayed Patch Universe Select FR Console EDM EDM pat Not bound Conventionals PORT A Not bound Automated PORT B Not bound Select the desired Patch Universe and then click Se ect Repeat the above steps to bind all ports to their appropriate patch universes Note You cannot control a channel count exceeding that of the WYSIWYG Perform package that you purchased 500 1000 2000 50
258. lot like the CAD mode you cannot draw anything within the Design mode If you need to make changes to your drawing you need to switch over to the CAD mode You can see the output of fixtures in the wireframe and shaded views within the Design mode However you can only select fixtures within the wireframe views unless you use Concept shortcuts as discussed in the next section The design tools are individual toolbars that enable you to control certain parameters for selected fixtures Currently there are nine design tools a Intensity E Focus E Iris E Zoom a Color m Gobo a Prism a Video m Moving Scenery To turn the design tools on 1 From the Design menu choose the tool name to activate or deactivate the desired design tool 2 _ You can also toggle the tools on the Design toolbar Focus oom Gobo Video Wipe Ao o HWD Intensity Iris Color Prism Moving Scenery Note Design tools have the same properties as other toolbars and can be rearranged on the screen to improve the layout of the working area You can also resize design tools by stacking them into columns so that they take up less space on the screen wysiwyg March 2006 Design mode To rearrange and resize design tools 1 Open the desired design tools using the steps above 2 Click and drag one tool on top of another When you release the mouse the selected design tool lines up under the other Repeat step 2 for as many tools as wi
259. lue is 60 0 G The proscenium arch width In WYSIWYG the default value is 40 0 H The depth of the proscenium arch wall In WYSIWYG the default value is 20 wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode m I The height of the proscenium arch the dimension of the opening of the proscenium arch In WYSIWYG the default value is 20 0 m J The back of house BOH width the dimension of the auditorium from the extremity of house right to the extremity of house left at the back of the house In WYSIWYG the default value is 100 0 m K The auditorium depth the dimension from the proscenium line to the back of the house In WYSIWYG the default value is 100 0 m L The auditorium height the dimension from the ceiling of the auditorium to the floor of the auditorium at the edge of the stage In WYSIWYG the default value is 450 m M The front of house FOH width the dimension of the auditorium from the extremity of house right to the extremity of house left at the front of the house In WYSIWYG the default value is 680 7 N The auditorium slope height In WYSIWYG the default value is 120 Black Box A black box venue is an empty rectangular room The origin is set at the center of the room on the floor SA The following entries describe the parts of the black box m A The width of the room In WYSIWYG the default value is 60 0 a B The depth of the room In WYSIWYG the default value is 40 0 a
260. ly opaque If you select Defau t the transparency level is set to 0 Opaque To customize the transparency level click the Use Custom Transparency option button and then type the desired transparency level in the box provided or use the arrow to select a value m Use Custom Transparency Click this option button if you want to set a transparency level for the color or texture that you have chosen or if you want to override the default transparency level of the selected material Then type the desired transparency level in the box provided or use the arrow to select a value Click Apply Click OK Applying a material to a Library item element You can apply different materials to each element of Library objects using the Appearance tab in the Properties dialog box To apply a material to a Library item element 1 2 3 Right click the library item to which you want to apply material and then choose Properties Click the Appearance tab Properties Y j 1 E E General Appearance Light Emission Elements Color Texture Use Layer Rendering Color f Use Custom Color f Use Texture from Library a EE 7 Use Texture from File We E Texture Position Texture Tile Dimensions Texture Rotation f Tile idth foon Degrees Stretch Height Material Vamnished Wood 1 g Default Transparency i Use Material Transparency 0 Transparency iz specified as a percentage with 0
261. m download the MIDI Yoke installer from the appropriate link at the following Web site a Windows ME XP http www midiox com zip myokent exe Follow the instructions at http www midiox com midiyoke_ instxp htm to install MIDI YOKE in a Windows XP Home environment For all other operating systems refer to the Installation section of the main MIDI YOKE Web page http www midiox com myoke htm WYSIWYG Reference Guide 361 Using AutoFocus with the HogPC Release 16 0 Notes 1 Do not change any of the settings in the configuration window that appears after installation is complete 2 _ You must restart your computer to finalize the installation To configure MIDI YOKE Once your computer has restarted from the Start menu choose Settings and then choose Control Panel Click the Audio Devices icon or its equivalent name in your operating system and then click the Audio tab Select MIDI Yoke NT I as your MIDI Music Playback default device MI DI OX To install MI DI OX 1 Download MIDI OX by clicking http www midiox com zip midioxse exe 2 To install MIDI OX double click on the downloaded file and follow the instructions To configure MI DI OX 1 Once the software has been installed launch the application by double clicking on the M DI OX icon located on your Desktop From the Options menu select Devices Select M DI Yoke NT I as your MIDI Input Device and MIDI Yoke NT 2 as your MIDI Output Device
262. m in on your plot to see the gridlines 95 96 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 16 0 Show Details tab Options on the Show Details tab affect the amount of information that is shown on your drawing This includes how much data is shown on the plot User Options User Draw Defaults Show Details Simulation Fixture data shown on plot lw Unit W Channel Tw Spot I Colour Lamp I Focus TT Gobo Circuit T Patch Position Purpose Lens T Notes Dimmer Intensity W Show Text Labels Point Size lw Enable Tooltips E lw Draw Symbols W Show beams for selected fixtures I Show truss crass members Fixture tooltips T Unit Tw Channel IY Spot T Colour T Lamp Focus TT Gobo Circuit I Patch Position D Purpose PanryTilt T Lens Notes l Spin F Dimmer 7 Fixture data shown on plot Indicates the fixture data that you want to display on your drawing m Show Text Labels Select this check box to display text labels m Enable Tooltips Displays tooltips on your drawing Tooltips are the pop up messages that display specific information about a fixture when you hover over it Choose the information that you want to display in a tooltip by selecting the appropriate check boxes in the Fixture tooltips group box Tooltips are often helpful when trying to locate a specific fixture in a plot m Draw Symbols Select this check box to draw fixtures as symbols rather than as 3D objects For more informat
263. m when you this list choose None Click the Properties button to change the camera properties 3 From the drop down list select the camera through which you want to view your drawing Note To switch back to the default view click None and then click the far right button to reset the view To change the camera properties select the camera from the drop down list and then click the properties button Drawing a compass You can add a compass to a drawing to define the direction that is north This definition is important to set the position of the sun and or moon for renderings that use environmental options Note There can be only one compass in a file To draw a compass 1 From the Tools menu choose Define North 2 Click to place the starting point of the compass wysiwyg gt gt March 2006 CAD mode 3 Click to place the end point of the compass The end point must be directly north of the start point Result A compass is drawn centered on the start point and pointing towards the end point Notes To remove the compass from the drawing choose Clear Direction from the Tools menu To redefine north repeat steps 1 3 You do not need to remove the compass from the drawing when redefining north as there can be only one compass in a file Saving custom library items Custom library items are made of one or more objects including existing library items Save a custom library item for a complex obj
264. make the selected layer editable on the plot and in shaded views Modifying the property here changes it on the Layer Database dialog box m Opaque Click this check box if you want all objects on the current layer to be opaque beams of light will not pass through any of these objects m Plot Color Sets the layer s color for wireframe views This is the color that is used for objects that reside on the selected layer when printing the document unless otherwise modified To modify the object color refer to the General tab on page 146 m Use Document Line Weight Select this check box to set the layer s line thickness to the default value specified in Show Options For more information refer to the Show Options window on page 89 wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode Click to clear the check box and then type a thickness in the Line Weight box below to set a specific line thickness for the layer The value is used as the line thickness for all the objects that reside on the specified layer unless otherwise modified To modify the line thickness of an object refer to the General tab on page 146 Note The applied line thickness is only visible in Print Preview mode and when printed Use Plot Color for rendering select this check box to set the layer s color for shaded views and renderings to the same as the plot color specified above Click to clear the check box and use the color button to set a specific color for th
265. may be hung on any hang structure Release the mouse button Repeat for the remaining fixtures Tip You can hang all the fixtures on one position by dragging the entire position out of the Flight Case Selecting a fixture in your drawing and pressing the Backspace key will return the fixture to the Flight Case The fixture will retain the position assignment To insert a hang structure from the Flight Case If you drag a position from the Flight Case you will create a pipe Oo Ff o N Expand the Positions branch to see all the hang structures Click and hold on the position that you want to insert Drag the pipe onto the drawing Release the mouse button Use the pop up dialog box to answer the questions about the trim height and length of the pipe or use the nteractive button to draw the pipe in interactive mode Result If you do not choose interactive mode the pipe is inserted centered on the origin at the trim height specified Note Multiple positions can have the same name For more information about inserting pipes please refer to Drawing pipes on page 134 To insert a focus position from the Flight Case 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Expand the Focus Positions branch in the flight case to see all the Focus positions that have not yet been placed in the drawing Click and hold on the focus position that you want to insert into the drawing Drag the Focus position onto the drawing 209 CAD mode Rel
266. mediately to either the start or end of the movement axis um For very precise positioning in the box provided type the object s position as a percentage of its total range of movement For example if you want to see the object at the exact half way mark type 50 in this box and then click Apply WYSIWYG Reference Guide 243 Design mode Release 16 0 b a Concepts Introduction Concepts are custom groups of fixtures You can create concepts in CAD Data Design or Live mode in any view that allows fixture selection Creating concepts Creating a concept allows you to select a group of fixtures at the same time Concept shortcuts also enhance working with design tools in shaded views Since design tools work with the current fixture selection opening multiple concept shortcuts allow you to change different groups of fixtures rather than having to select them individually in the Wireframe view Note Concepts are saved on the Concept shortcut bar To create a new concept 1 Select the fixtures that you want to group If you are unfamiliar with selecting objects refer to Selecting on page 142 Click the Concepts shortcut bar Right click on the Concept shortcut bar and then choose New Concept Type the name of the concept and then click OK Result The concept is saved on the Concept shortcut bar Updating concepts You can modify a Concept shortcut by adding or removing fixtures as required To
267. menu choose Move Tip You may also use the Move tool on the 7oolstoolbar e Click to set the base point for the move or type the coordinates of the base point and then press ENTER Note When you start typing a box appears at the bottom left hand corner of the window showing the value that you enter Type the new coordinate location for the base point and then press ENTER To move an object using relative values 1 2 Select the objects to be moved From the Edit menu choose Move Tip You may also use the Move tool on the Tools toolbar Type 6 followed by the distances to move the object and then press ENTER For example to move an object 2 0 stage right X axis and 3 0 off the floor Z axis type the following and then press ENTER 2 0 3 To move an object using distance and direction 1 Select the objects to be moved 2 From the Edit menu choose Move Tip You may also use the Move tool on the oo s toolbar e 3 Type the distance that you want to move the object the lt sign and the direction as an angle positive or negative to move the object and then press ENTER For example to move an object 3 6 to the left type the following and then press ENTER 3 6 lt 180 Rotating You can rotate objects around a base point to place them on angles in your drawing wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode To rotate an object 1 Select the object s to be rotated
268. milar to a pie chart To divide an arc into points 1 Select the arc that you want to divide From the Tools menu choose Divide and then choose Arcs into points Type the number of points desired Result The arc is divided into equal parts by the number of points specified The points are placed along the arc at the calculated interval To divide a circle into lines 1 Select the circle that you want to divide From the Tools menu choose Divide and then choose Circles into lines Type the number of lines desired Result The circle is divided into egual parts by the number of lines specified The lines are automatically drawn from the center of the circle outward resulting in something similar to a pie chart To divide a circle into points 1 Select the circle that you want to divide From the Tools menu choose Divide and then choose Circles into points Type the number of points desired Result The circle is divided into egual parts by the number of points specified The points are placed along the circle at the calculated interval To divide a cylinder into circles 1 Select the cylinder that you want to divide From the Tools menu choose Divide and then choose Cylinders into circles Type the number of circles desired Result The cylinder is divided into egual parts by the number of circles specified The circles are stacked within the cylinder at the calculated interval To divide a cylinder into line
269. mmas to separate the entries For all dimmers specify all White space and capitalization is ignored a If you are checking a load a query is performed for the specific dimmer or dimmers and a comparison between the recorded load and the actual load is conducted m f you are clearing a load the recorded load information is cleared for the selected dimmers Note For additional information on working with recorded loads please refer to your Sensor CEM User Manual 344 wysiwyg e Appendix A Using the SuperPro Monitoring Tool V The Sentinel SuperPro Monitoring Tool is installed as part of the WYSIWYG Learn and WYSIWYG Network Server installation Using this tool you can view and track license distribution information for the dongles on your network In this appendix SuperPro Monitoring Tool 347 WYSIWYG Reference Guide 345 Using the SuperPro Monitoring Tool Release 16 0 346 wysiwyg amp March 2006 Using the SuperPro Monitoring Tool b SuperPro Monitoring Tool I ntroduction As part of the WYSIWYG Learn or WYSIWYG Network Server installation a Sentinel SuperPro Monitoring Tool is included that enables you to view and track information about the dongles on your network With this tool you can m keep track of how many licenses are in use on your network E view the maximum number of licenses that can be obtained from each dongle and therefore the maximum number of users both local and o
270. more information on this command refer to Moving on page 143 When you move a pipe you also move all its attached fixtures and accessories You also break the positional link between the pipe in CAD mode and the pipe in the New Plots view All fixtures and accessories that are attached to that pipe still maintain their link to the original objects in CAD mode even though they have also moved When you move a fixture off of a hang structure you fix its location in relation to the hang structure For example if you move a fixture off a pipe and then move the pipe 10 feet the fixture also moves with the pipe This action breaks the positional link of the fixture to the hang structure Note You can nudge objects up down left or right a certain distance by using specific Key combinations Use the ALT arrow keys to nudge an object a specific distance use the ALT SHIFT arrow keys to nudge an object a tenth of that distance Rotate The Rotate command in a New Plots view works in a similar manner as it does in CAD mode For more information on this command refer to Rotating on page 144 Note Rotating an object breaks its positional link Fillet The Fillet command in a New Plots view works in a similar manner as it does in CAD mode For more information on this command refer to Fillet on page 168 WYSIWYG Reference Guide 279 Presentation mode Release 16 0 Object properties In a New Plots vi
271. mos or letters Once you have drawn your venue with all of its llghting positions and everything else that is common to all shows save it as a WYT file in the Templates directory Each time you start a new drawing that file will be available as a template to start from You can also enter all your lighting equipment inventory into the F ight Case and save that as a template When users start their drawings with your template they will not have to choose from an endless list of fixtures but rather just what you have in stock This is also the ideal option for saving your preferred working settings Template files save all the shortcuts including custom reports plots and so on However toolbar settings are not saved in template files since they are saved by the application A list of most recently opened template files appears under the heading Create New Plot on the WYSIWYG welcome screen The more link will prompt you to open a template file from the WYSIWYG Templates directory To save a template file 1 In an active view and with no objects selected from the File menu choose Save As 2 In the dialog box that opens browse to the location where you want to save the file Ensure that the destination appears in the Save jn box To ensure that your template file is available on the WYSIWYG Welcome screen save your file to the WYSIWYG Templates directory In the File name box type a name for the file In the Save as type box
272. ms one by one or separately to ensure accuracy The following scenario may help you when importing DWG DXF files into WYSIWYG 1 After choosing to open a DWG DXF file switch to the Layers tab on the Select DWG Settings dialog box In this tab you can deselect the layers that you do not want imported in the first round For example you may only want to import the venue and all the layers related to it In the case of a 2D CAD drawing it is easier to extrude lines into walls and do everything else needed to complete the virtual venue It will also be guicker as WYSIWYG will have a lot less objects with which to work Once you have completed working on the venue you may want to merge in the hang structures If they exist in the CAD file Using the Merge command from the File menu you can open the same CAD file once again and choose the appropriate layer s from the Layers tab When WYSIWYG asks you to pick the insertion point make sure you select Use 0 0 0 as Basepoint This will ensure that everything in the new layer is placed accurately in the WYSIWYG plot Continue in the same manner with fixtures and the other objects Note that if in the CAD file the fixtures exist on different layers you may want to bring these in separately one by one as well Exporting DWG DXF files If you need to send your WYSIWYG drawings to someone using another drafting program you can export your file to the DWG or DXF file type DWG and DXF formats are
273. n a pan and tilt angle Note For more information on Ouick Tools see Ouick tools on page 191 o o A Oo N From the Tools menu choose Guick Tools In the dialog box that opens check Focus Type values in degrees for Pan and Tilt Click OK Click on each fixture you want oriented to the specified angle Right click anywhere in the wireframe view and then choose Finish Guick Tools To focus from the fixture s properties A o N Select the fixtures that you want to focus Right click and choose Properties Click the Fixture tab Type values in degrees for Pan Tilt and Spin or select a focus position from the drop down list Note For the definitions of these attributes please refer to Data fields on page 216 Click OK Fixture specific focusing tools All fixture specific focusing tools such as shuttering spotting flooding and lens changes are available through the selected fixture s properties on the Shutter Lens and Fixture pages respectively 1 2 3 To make shutter cuts Select the fixtures for which you want to make shutter cuts Right click and choose Properties Click the Fixture tab wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode 4 Click the Shutters tab Note The POV image is not available when a fixture is zoomable or articulable Properties RS E x General Appearance Light Emission Fixture Hang Structure Truss All Fixtures General Patch Shutters Bx E
274. n an existing look without losing it clone the look shortcut and work from the copy of the shortcut For more information on cloning shortcuts refer to To clone a shortcut on page 55 Cross fading between lighting looks You can use the Looks shortcut bar to guickly set up and run timed transitions between lighting looks without the need of a lighting console When you create a lighting look you can specify its fade time in seconds This is the amount of time that it takes to fade to this look when you click on it from another look in the shortcut bar You can create multiple looks and specify different fade times for each of them Once you create the look and specify the fade time you can use the design tools to customize the look For example you can add color gobos and intensity to lighting and set the position of moving lights When you switch from one look to the next you can see the movement of the lights from one position to the next along with any changes you have made between looks such as color intensity and so on To cross fade between looks In Design mode in the shortcuts bar click Looks In the Looks shortcut area right click and then select New Look In the Name box type the name of the new look In the Fade time box type the fade time in seconds for this look Click OK Scroll to the bottom of the Looks shortcuts list o o A O N WYSIWYG Reference Guide 247 Design mode 248 Release 1
275. n be turned on or off WYSIWYG is also set up to trigger an error notification when errors are detected Error notifications can be turned on or off Errors WYSIWYG checks for the following errors Error Dimmers gt Circuit Patches gt Circuit Channels gt Circuit Patches gt Dimmer Channels gt Dimmer Channels gt Patch Spots gt Patch Missing Position Missing Unit Missing Circuit Name Missing Circuit WYSIWYG Reference Guide Definition Fixtures assigned to the same circuit have been assigned different dimmer numbers Fixtures assigned to the same circuit have been assigned different patch addresses Fixtures assigned to the same circuit have been assigned different channel numbers Fixtures assigned to the same dimmer have been assigned different patch addresses Fixtures assigned to the same dimmer have been assigned different channel numbers Fixtures assigned to the same patch address have been assigned different channel numbers Fixtures assigned to the same patch address have been assigned different spot numbers The position field is empty The unit field is empty The circuit name field is empty The circuit number field is empty 231 Data mode 232 Error Missing Dimmer Missing Patch Missing Channel Missing Spot Missing Color Missing Gobo Error notifications Release 16 0 Definition The dimmer field is empty The patch field is empty The channel
276. n choose to display the drawing precision in centimeters millimeters whole numbers or fractions Background Color The color that will be used in all wireframe views Click the box to choose a different color Interval Select the spacing between points on the drawing grid Although the WYSIWYG drawing grid might not be visible it exists in the background The settings in this group box are important when using the snap to grid tool For more information on this tool refer to Snaps on page 107 Origin The point of origin For more information on the origin refer to Coordinate system and origin on page 102 Angle Select the angle of rotation for the drawing grid Although the WYSIWYG drawing grid might not be visible it exists in the background The settings in this group box are important when using the snap to grid tool For more information on this tool refer to Snaps on page 107 Visible Grid Select the On Off check box if you want to add a grid to your wireframe view in every view except isometric Then click the Grid Color box to choose the colour for the grid lines You can also choose the style of the grid by selecting the appropriate option button Standard creates a grid with evenly spaced closed Squares Open creates a grid with open squares Point creates a grid of dots The lines in the resulting grid are spaced at the interval specified in the nterva box If the interval is short you may have to zoo
277. n the Camera drop down list You may need to click this button a few times to return the view point to its original setting To learn more about cameras refer to Drawing cameras on page 139 a You can also control the camera view point with the camera toolbar For details see Using the Camera toolbar on page 140 a Ambient Light Use the slider to increase or decrease the amount of ambient light level shown in the shaded view H Background Color Modifies the background color used in the shaded view This color Is visible when you zoom far enough away that you can see beyond the venue n Beam Simulation Quality Choose one of the following beam simulation qualities Wireframe An outline of the footprint is shown and the beam is drawn based on the outline Regular The true footprint is shown but objects are not illuminated Light Up Objects in the path of the beam are illuminated and a full footprint is shown WYSIWYG Reference Guide 73 WYSIWYG user interface Release 16 0 The figures below illustrate the different levels of beam quality Wireframe Regular Light Up m Display Target Select the check box to show the focus point of the selected camera in the shaded view Choose the color of the displayed target by clicking the Color box and then selecting the color from the resulting palette The target is visible in shaded views only m Pan tool moves objects Select this check box if you want to
278. n the drawing to set the dimension end point Oo Ff o N Click and drag the grab point in the center of the dimension text to drag the text to the correct side of the object if required 6 Click to set the dimension line Tip Use snaps to connect dimensions directly to other objects Drawing surfaces Surfaces are 2D objects Surfaces are drawn continuously stretching out behind the cursor Surfaces can be used to create backdrops or other flat objects Surfaces can be extruded to create odd shaped risers or other custom shaped 3D objects For more information on extruding refer to Extrude on page 167 To draw a surface 1 From the Draw menu choose Surface Tip You can also click the Surface tool on the Draw toolbar Cy Click on the drawing at the starting point of the surface Drag to the next point of the surface and click Continue to place points for the surface as needed o fF N To finish and close the surface right click and choose Finish Surface from the sub menu To abort the surface entirely choose Abort Surface This erases the whole surface from the drawing Drawing risers Risers are solid 3D rectangular objects You can use risers for creating platforms sguare columns or any other box shaped objects There are two ways in which you can draw risers E non interactive mode in which you type the exact width depth and height of the riser m interactive mode in which you click and drag to set
279. n the network that can access WYSIWYG Learn or WYSIWYG Network m view the Sentinel Protection Servers that are currently installed and running on your network m view the addresses and version information for each Sentinel Protection Server The Monitoring tool is a convenient tool to use to keep track of license activity on your network For example you can use the Monitoring Tool to determine whether you have purchased enough licenses based on license demand Note The SuperPro Monitoring Tool is designed for use only with SuperPro protected applications such as WYSIWYG Learn or WYSIWYG Network that are being run on a network To launch the Monitoring Tool 1 Navigate to the folder where you installed the Server for example C Program Files WYSIWYG Learn Open the Bin Sentinel folder Double click the monitor application Result The Monitoring Tool is launched and you are prompted to set a protocol The Monitoring Tool can monitor servers on the network that use any of the following protocols m TCP IP m NETBEUI a PX SPX m SAP 4 Select TCP IP and then click OK Result Servers using the selected protocol are displayed in the Monitoring Tool WYSIWYG products run on TCP IP networks only Changing the protocol When you launch the SuperPro Monitoring Tool you are prompted to set a protocol WYSIWYG Reference Guide 347 Using the SuperPro Monitoring Tool Release 16 0 To modify the selected protocol 1 Fr
280. n the spreadsheet Tip If you have a shortcut created for the desired fixture you can right click on the shortcut and choose Insert or Insert Multiple I nserting focus positions in Data mode If you type a new value into the focus field of a fixture you are essentially creating a focus position That focus position is now available in the Flight Case for you to drag and drop into your drawing For more information on the Flight Case refer to The Flight Case on page 208 I nserting positions in Data mode If you type a new value into the position field of a fixture the Pick a value from the list dialog box is automatically displayed This is because a position cannot exist in WYSIWYG unless it is recorded in the Position Manager You can select from the list of positions that already exist or you can click Manager to open the Position Manager to create a new position If you are making this change to a fixture that was previously hung on a different position that fixture will by unhung and sent to the ght Case under its new position field From there you can drag it back onto the drawing If the position does not yet exist in the drawing you must draw a hang structure and assign it the appropriate position name before you will be able to hang the fixture again For more information on drawing hang structures refer to Hang structures on page 171 For more information on drawing items from the Flight Case refer to
281. n you do this those objects are moved to the selected current layer Scenes Scenes are collections of layers used to organize the plot A scene may contain one or more layers Hiding a scene hides all the layers assigned to that scene By organizing the layers and scenes in your plot you can quickly perform set changes By default WYSIWYG creates two initial scenes Current Layer Only and All Layers You cannot delete these scenes To create a new scene 1 From the Edit menu choose Scenes Result The Scene Database dialog box is displayed Scene Database Current Layer Only Clone Rename Delete Curent Scene A Layers Set Current Layers Out Layers In LLES BR B Cancel i Click New to create a new scene Type the name of the new scene and then click OK Result The layers associated with the scene are displayed in the Layers Out and Layers In boxes 4 Select the layers that you want to include in the scene and then use the arrow buttons to move the layers accordingly The layers that are available in a scene can also be set in the Layers dialog box For more information refer to Layers on page 157 Notes m To copy a scene select the scene and then click C one The copied scene has the same properties of the selected scene a To rename a scene select the scene and then click Rename a To remove a scene from the scene database select the scene and then click Delete
282. napBox Size HE MidGrid D Assembly Paints Iv Focus lw Midpoints 1 Fipe T Endpoints Pan 45 Tilt 19 lw Enable Grip Dragging Units y Metio C Imperial M Cross Hairs On Precision C Whole Fraction gt Grd Interval for Origin 00 000 a So on O G Standard C pen te Paint Background Colour L Visible Grid l Onor rid Eolour WYSIWYG Reference Guide Snap To Enables or disables snap For more information refer to Snaps on page 107 Snap tools can be toggled at any time using the tools on the CAD Options toolbar SnapBox Size Sets the size of the snap box that appears around the cursor when in snap mode Consequently this affects how close the cursor must be to the objects before the snap is applied Enable Grip Dragging Select this check box if you want to be able to resize objects by clicking and dragging on their markers Cross Hairs On Select this check box to set the cursor display to use cross hairs in plot views Cross hairs are useful for lining up objects Units of measure For more information on these units refer to Metric vs Imperial on page 103 The units can be toggled from metric to imperial at any time by double clicking on the units display on the status bar Precision affects the units of drawing precision For more information on these units refer to Coordinate notation on page 102 Based on your choice for measurement units you ca
283. nce Guide Reports The work area displays reports formatted for printing New Plots The work area displays plots Layouts The work area displays layouts formatted for printing Images The work area displays bitmap or jpeg images that are stored with the show file Worksheet The work area contains spreadsheets that the user can edit 261 Presentation mode b a Reports 262 Release 16 0 Introduction The Reports layout tab opens a series of pre formatted reports that are generated by WYSIWYG containing all data entered in CAD and Data modes These reports are available for you to use as is or to modify to suit your needs Unlike the spreadsheets in Data mode you cannot edit fixture data here Reports are designed to be printed documents You can however modify their setup and layout Working with reports To modify a report 1 From the Options menu choose View Options Result The View Options window is displayed View Options FR General Report Follow User Scene Scene All Layers Tip You can use the View Options tool on the Standard toolbar fal Modify options as desired Click OK General tab Options on the Genera tab affect the scene that is displayed in the report Follow User Scene Select this check box to filter the report according to the current scene The current scene Is displayed in the drop down list on the Scene toolbar and in the Scene Database dial
284. ncrements either forward or back from its current position adjust the slider on the second channel Tip To view fine movement the object must be attached to a very long linear axis or be set to rotate in a very wide arc It is also a good idea to zoom in guite close to the object before moving it To control a motion control patched movement axis with a motion control system After you have patched a movement axis in Data mode you can use the applicable motion control system in Live mode to control the movement of any objects that are attached to the axis Based on the type of system that you are using you can control the object in different ways The following procedure outlines how to control the object s with WYSIWYG S Motion Control Console 1 Launch the Motion Control Console m MCConsole Z 25 i LIH E J 2 ns iN ja Tee Linear BEWD STAT Trawel 35 00 C Rotational 100 00 FRWD meters Moge Static Update Axis Hew Axis i bounce Delete Axis Forward backward Duration sec 1 Delete All Reset WAH Position start end meters Conseole is sending data Start stop Soave Load 2 Ensure that the Motion Control Console or the motion control system if you are using one is connected to the patched movement axis You connect the Motion Control Console and motion control systems in much the same way as you connect consoles For details see To connect to a console
285. ndows ME Windows ME does not support services In this case the Server installs a small EXE file for which a shortcut is created automatically in the start up folder of the startup menu When a user logs on any shortcuts in the start up folder are triggered instantly The SuperProServer service runs in the background until the user logs off The service may also be started manually this choice is available during the installation process Network protocol WYSIWYG Learn or WYSIWYG Network will run on any LAN that supports TCP IP protocol NetBEUI and IPX SPX networks are not currently supported Detecting the network dongle If the service is not running the Clients will not be able to detect the dongle and the application will terminate Ensure that the dongle is attached to the workstation that is running the Server Before you begin a Previous versions of WYSILAB or WYSIWYG Learn Network must be removed before beginning the install process if this step is not completed the install menu will offer the option before continuing with the installation The workstations must be restarted for the changes to take effect WYSIWYG Reference Guide 35 Installation configuration activation and registration 36 To install the Server From the WYSIWYG Install window select nstall WYSIWYG Network Server 1 4 Release 16 0 Note The Server should only be installed on one computer on the network This Is the computer t
286. nect to a console Presentation mode Presentation Pres mode contains all the tools necessary for creating professional printouts of your show document including reports plots and images As with all other modes the contents of the Pres mode are continually updated as you draw input data and modify your show file In addition to being able to create your own plots WYSWIYG provides a series of default plots and reports that are ready for printout These defaults can be used as is or customized to suit your preferences Live mode Live mode is used for graphically simulating the output of a lighting control console or compatible offline editor This is where you can pre cue and visualize your show Live mode also has rendering ability so that you can create photo realistic pictures of the simulated lighting looks Unlike Design mode Live mode will display transitions from cue to cue allowing you to see the programmed movement of light over time Link mode The WYSI Link Link mode becomes available when you purchase and install the WYSI Link add on for WYSIWYG WYSI Link acts as an interface to ETCLink and monitors the Sensor line of dimmers When a problem with a fixture is detected data about the fixture is logged in Link mode and the image of the affected fixture is highlighted on your plot You can also use this mode to record and play backup looks and view information on dimmers and dimmer racks in your system Availability of mod
287. ng modifications you must return to CAD mode WYSIWYG Reference Guide 313 Live mode Release 16 0 y o t Connecting to consoles Introduction To use Live mode you need to insert and connect to a control console or compatible offline editor If you use a DMX console you require a DMX interface device to connect to WYSIWYG You must ensure that the patch you have created in WYSIWYG and the patch in your console are exactly the same for simulation to work properly Connecting to a console To connect to a console 1 Connect the console to the computer with the appropriate hardware 2 From the Live menu choose Device Manager Result The Device Manager dialog box is displayed Device Manager x Device Manager Status Connect on load Propenies meet onnect Selecta ii Ema eni eneu g P Eanmect onload 3 Click New Result The console library is displayed 4 Navigate through the console library until you find the console or device that you are connecting to Click the console name to highlight it Note If you are connecting to a console with a Wyg it or Wyg it2 you can select either the console or the Wyg it device The Address box discussed below must contain the name of the Wyg it 5 Click nsert Result The console appears in the Device Manager 314 wysiwyg gt March 2006 6 10 11 12 13 14 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Live mode With the console name sti
288. ngle m Flood vs Spot Field Displays a graphical representation of the ratio between the flood and spot for the fixture s field angle m Field The measurement in degrees from the center of the beam to where the light level drops off to 10 percent of the peak m Beam The measurement in degrees from the center of the beam to where the light level drops off to 50 percent of the peak Quick tools Quick tools allow you to quickly assign data accessories and other attributes to fixtures without having to switch to the Data mode or open the Properties box for each individual fixture Quick tools will enter repetitive information as well as incremental information for each fixture as you click on it To use Quick Tools 1 From the Tools menu choose Quick Tools te Tip You can also click the Quick Tools tool on the Tools toolbar Quick Fixture Tool x olherement alnerement E Chama iM sutolnerement Patch Poo EY iM Auto Wherement T Dimmer D IM sutolnerement Circuit Mame pooo Mum IM Auto Wrerement Accessones T Colour Las E Bo Other H Clear All Cancel 2 To activate a tool select the check box to the left of the tool You can activate as many as you want at a time See below for explanations of the different tools 3 Type the initial value for the tool in the box to the right of the tool name If you want the value to auto increment as for channels or spot numbers make sure you sel
289. nimator 48C Animator 72C Sabre and Spark Top consoles Avab s Pronto Panther Jaguar and Safari consoles Leprecon LP X24 console Transtechnik s Prisma NT and Focus NT consoles Rosco Horizon software For detailed instructions on setting up AutoFocus to work with the Hogll refer to Setting up AutoFocus to work with the HogPC on page 361 To bind Autofocus to the console 1 2 Follow steps 1 through 14 of To connect to a console on page 314 Click Bind Autofocus Note The Bind Autofocus button is only available when a compatible console is selected in the Device Manager Result The autofocus icon Device Manager appears beside the name of the console in the Device Manager Ea Device Manager D New Case Pro Case Pro Not Connected No Not Connected Select All Bind AutoFocus Connect on load Click Connect Click OK to close the Device Manager wysiwyg gt March 2006 Live mode Autofocus tools and menu commands To select fixtures The procedure for selecting fixtures in Live mode is the same as selecting fixtures in Design mode using the design tools For more information refer to Using the Design tools on page 239 To use the Autofocus tools The procedure for using the autofocus tools is the same as using the design tools For more information refer to Using the Design tools on page 239 To use the Autofocus menu commands Right click on a selected fixt
290. nputs that enable you to visualize up to 1024 channels of DMX The WYG it 2 also has 2 DMX through ports that allow you to connect the console both to WYSIWYG and to the physical lighting eguipment at the same time WYG it 2 is eguipped with the necessary outputs to send Autofocus commands You can connect the WYG it 2 to your computer by inserting the WYG it 2 USB cable into an available USB port Once connected to your computer the WYG it 2 does not need an external power supply Note When WYG it 2 is installed the WYG it DMX Interface configuration panel is accessible in the Control Panel of your computer The WYG it 2 name recorded in this configuration panel is the value that you must type in the Address box of the Device Manager Properties window WYSIWYG Reference Guide 319 Live mode Release 16 0 Mini Console WYSIWYG contains an application that simulates a small console called the Mini Console You can use this application in lieu of a real console To use the Mini Console run the Mini Console application found in the WYSIWYG section of the Windows Start menu Connect as if you are using an external console The Mini Console gives you control of the first 25 channels on a single DMX universe but does not record or playback cues e wysiwyg March 2006 Live mode y ab AutoPatch I ntroduction AutoPatch is a protocol by which WYSIWYG can transfer the patch hookup to a compatible console AutoPatch is only a
291. ns menu choose View Options Result The View Options window is displayed View Options E E General Options w Folow User Scene Scene Lighting Tip You can also use the View Options tool E on the Standard toolbar to open the view options Modify options as desired Click OK General tab Options on the General tab affect the scene that is displayed in the shaded view m Follow User Scene Select this check box to use the scene that is displayed in the drop down list on the Scene toolbar Click to clear the check box and then select the desired scene from the Scene drop down list To learn more about scenes refer to Scenes on page 160 Tip You can also change the current scene at any time by using the Scene toolbar 72 wysiwyg March 2006 WYSIWYG user interface Options tab Options on the Options tab affect the view point beam quality and ambient light levels View Options x General Options Set to Default Ambient Light Background Colour Oe 1002 Beam Simulation Quality Wire Frame Regular Light Up Target lw Display Target Colour _ Camera lw Pan tool moves objects lw Fast Background Rendering m Camera Select a camera to change the point of view Click Set to Default to remove any previous association with a camera and to display the original view point Notes m This button is enabled only if None is selected i
292. nt to convert Note There cannot be any fixtures hanging on the selected pipe You must unhang or delete any fixtures before attempting to convert the pipe into a line 2 From the Tools menu choose Convert and then choose Pipes into lines Result The pipe is converted into a line To convert a focus position into a point 1 Select the focus position that you want to convert 2 From the Tools menu choose Convert and then choose Focus positions into points Result The focus position is converted into a point Any fixtures that were focused to the initial focus position retain their orientation but lose the association with that point ues wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode To convert a point into a focus position 1 Select the point that you want to convert 2 From the Tools menu choose Convert and then choose Points into focus positions Result The points are converted into a focus position and are automatically called Label To change the name for the newly created focus position refer to Focus position properties on page 183 Note Alternatively to perform a convert command you can use the Convert tool on the Tools toolbar az To convert using the Specify dialog 1 Select the object that you want to convert 2 From the Tools menu choose Convert and then choose Specify Convert x onvert emeles tate fe Arce Cancel Surfaces Dont convert Humor Porat 10 lw Lines
293. o the desired patch location 3 For re patching repeat the above steps or click and drag the fixture s patch information to the new location To unpatch fixtures in the patch view 1 Select the fixture by clicking on the first channel start cell for that fixture It should become highlighted 2 Right click and choose Unpatch Result The fixture is unpatched the value in the patch field for that fixture is deleted To patch the control of a video source In WYSIWYG you patch the control of a video source not the actual video This means that you can use the console device to control the progress of a live video stream or a video file by making the video play pause or rewind you cannot use WYSIWYG to change different aspects of the video itself To control the video source the DMX patch is allocated three channels For details on controlling the video with the console device in Live mode see To control a DMX patched video source with a console on page 316 1 In the shortcut area click the Patch tab 2 Click the patch shortcut to which you have linked control of the video source Result The video patch appears in the patch universe 3 Open the console device that you have connected to the video DMX patch Using the console controls set the appropriate levels for the three channels For details see To control a DMX patched video source with a console on page 316 5 Save your settings 6 In the Shaded tab
294. o which you will attach the network dongle ARIAL Learn Network Setup x License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING CAREFULLY BEFORE OPERATING THE SOFTWARE IF ynu have acquired the software in packaging which has required you to agree to the termz of a License Agreement upon opening of such packaging that license shall govern your use of the software lf not the following License Agreement shall govern your use of the software El Do vou accept all the terme of the preceding License Agreement If ynu select No the setup will close To install Wo Shwe G Network Server you must accept this agreement InstallShield o No On the Setup window click Yes to accept the terms of the license Click Next Result The Choose Destination Location window appears ARIAL Learn Network Setup Ed Choose Destination Location Select folder where setup will install files Ei a Setup will install SIWR Network Server in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder Destination Folder C Program FilesNnw y Sl wya Network Server Browse mecla c lt Back Cancel Select a destination location for the Server files The default location is C Progr
295. ode operates like many other CAD programs so many of the concepts will be familiar to those who have used a computer aided drafting program before WYSIWYG adds features that are specific to the entertainment industry such as a comprehensive 3D library containing truss lighting eguipment and accessories as well as props musical instruments and various human figures In WYSIWYG Report you are limited to 2D views of your plot In Design and Perform 3D isometric and shaded views are available WYSIWYG Reference Guide 49 50 WYSIWYG user interface Release 16 0 Data mode As you draw in CAD mode all of your show information is compiled into spreadsheets that you can access in Data mode In this mode you can view and edit the data for all your fixtures Data mode operates like many other spreadsheet programs so many of the concepts will be familiar to those who have used a spreadsheet program The CAD and Data modes remain completely interactive and any information modified in either mode is updated in the other Design mode Design mode was created to provide lighting designers with an avenue for experimentation Design mode can be used as a troubleshooting tool or as a creative tool to help you come up with cue concepts In Design mode you can create static lighting looks using the design tools and then save and render those looks to output photo realistic pictures You can turn on and control fixtures without having to patch or con
296. offset 0 00 Swap Axes Reverse Pan Reverse Tilt m Pan offset Sets the manually adjustable pan angle m Tilt offset Sets the manually adjustable tilt angle m Reverse Pan Select this check box only if the real fixtures have an option to reverse the pan parameter and that option is set to true m Reverse Tilt Select this check box only if the real fixtures have an option to reverse the tilt parameter and that option is set to true m Swap Axes Select this check box only if the real fixtures have an option to swap the control channels for the tilt and pan and that option is set to true m Pan Only visible for certain fixtures Displays the manufacturer low mid and high pan limit values for the fixture To change a value select it click Change and then type the new value u Tilt Only visible for certain fixtures Displays the manufacturer s low mid and high tilt limit values for the fixture To change a value select it click Change and then type the new value Note The Pan and Tilt limit behavior is defined by the Mode selected on the Options tab WYSIWYG Reference Guide 195 CAD mode 196 Options tab Release 16 0 Options on this tab affect the mode selection for the fixtures The options vary according to the fixture that you have selected General Appearance Light Emission Fixture General Contral Moving Head 1 Static Colour 2Gobo1 3Gobo2 2FX Options P
297. og box from the File menu choose Scenes To filter your show information based on the scene selected click to clear the check box and then select the desired scene from the Scene drop down list Only fixtures on the active layers or layers in the scene are displayed in the report Tip You can change the current scene at any time by using either the Scene toolbar or the Scene Database dialog box For more information on scenes refer to Scenes on page 160 wysiwyg o gt March 2006 Presentation mode Report tab Options on the Report tab affect the appearance of the report View Options Ei Ea General Report Detail Level View Fistures and Accessories Fistures Circuits Truss T Word Wrap ceu Printing Pant for arau Visible Sume fio Report Total E Group Total Duplicate Lines Filters None Empty Not empty Equals Not Equals Above or equals Below or equals Between And Not between And WYSIWYG Reference Guide Group By Select a data field for grouping the data These groups appear as separate tabs pages at the bottom of a report In the case of an Instrument Schedule fixtures are grouped by hanging position Each position appears on a separate page Columns Displays the columns available for inclusion or exclusion in a report You can display the columns in any order by arranging the order in this list The top of the list re
298. olbars using the Options menu 1 2 3 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the Options menu choose Application Options Click the 7oo Dars tab Application Options My E x Compatibility Render Options ETC Interface General File Options DirectsD OpenGL Toolbars View Selection Layout Format l ComEdit Design F Layout Edit Scene F Live Layout Inzert Layer MH T Layout View Universe T New Plot Options WwySILink M CAD Options D New PlotView D Message Log Opt Show statusbar panes lw Selected objects W Coordinates lw Snap M Autofocus fw Ortho lw Channel Over lw Absolute lw Error Checking Missing Coordinate Unit Type w Statusbar Select the check boxes of the toolbars that you want to display Note Since toolbars are mode sensitive certain toolbars are disabled based on the mode that you are currently in 63 WYSIWYG user interface Release 16 0 Status bar 64 Introduction The status bar is displayed along the bottom of the WYSIWYG screen below the layout tabs The status bar displays the prompt line the number of unused channels WYSIWYG Perform selected object information and tracks the status of the snap ortho and absolute coordinates commands It also tracks and displays the coordinates of the cursor Ready O O F o c 0 ABS xn 9B y 2 3 1516 2 0 0 Missing Coord z 0 0 Imperial Mo Errors Prompt Selected Unused Absolute Missing Units of nap line object
299. om the File menu choose Set Protocol Select the protocol that you want to use Click OK Result Servers using the selected protocol are displayed in the Monitoring Tool Viewing servers on the network When you launch the SuperPro Monitoring Tool all Sentinel Protection Servers running on the network appear in the server list on the left Click a server in the list to display the following information in the right pane m server name 7 server s protocol m server s address for TCP IP or IPX SPX protocols E server s version m key information for the dongle that is connected to the server 2m Server List Key Highest Used Haf blinky LU LL akey 1 10 0 1 0 Bu fat_tony amp milhouse Ready Done y7 Key information Information about each key or dongle connected to a server running on the network appears in the right pane when you select a server from the server list Click on a key to obtain the following information m key number a label used only for identification purposes m key s hard limit that is the maximum number of licenses that can be obtained from the dongle and therefore the maximum number of users that can access WYSIWYG Learn or WYSIWYG Network m number of licenses currently in use on the dongle m highest number of licenses issued from this dongle a number of time outs recorded by the Server for Clients using licenses from the dongle a wysiwyg March 2006 Us
300. om the Library menu choose Browse Library Click the Fixture tool at the bottom of the browser Browse to the desired fixture and highlight it A Oo N Right click on the fixture name and then click Property Tip You can also click the Property tool at the top of the Library Browser Result The properties window for the selected fixture appears with a shaded view and an image of the fixture s symbol displayed in the two boxes An example is shown below 3 5 4 amp Axial Ee ax 3D View Plan Side Front Change Symbal Edit Layout View Type Static Moving Insert Multiple Shortcut Hew window Close 5 Click Plan Side or Front to view the fixture in the different views The Wireframe view changes based on the view type that you select Version tab Options on the Version tab are read only and are set when the fixture is added to the library 3 5 x 8 Axial ES xi Version ii Status Author Cast Software Ltd Mantes y m Version The release number of the fixture m Status The status of the fixture For example Beta indicates that the fixture is completed but not verified Release indicates the fixture has been tested and is accurate A status of Preliminary indicates that the fixture has minimal functionality m Author The individual or company who constructed the fixture March 2006 CAD mode m Notes Any notes that pertain to the fixture
301. om the resulting menu To place other fixture types repeat the above steps for each type To replace fixtures A GQ N WYSIWYG Reference Guide Select the fixtures that you want to replace Right click and choose Replace Fixture Select the new type of fixture from the Fixture Selection dialog box Click nsert Result All the fixtures that you selected in step 1 are replaced with the fixture type chosen in step 3 Some fixture attributes may be modified as a result of the replacement 179 CAD mode Release 16 0 Custom fixtures To create a custom fixture You must create custom fixtures on the WYSIWYG welcome screen with all files closed If you are currently working on a document save and close it Note You do not have to complete all fields Fill in as much information as you can You cannot delete or edit custom fixtures once saved 1 On the WYSIWYG welcome screen from the Options menu choose Create new conventional Result The Fixture Wizard opens Select the type of fixture that you want to create In the Name box type a name for the new fixture Click Next From the 7ype drop down list select the circuit type The default REGDIM is a regular dimmer Click Next 7 Add or modify the path Note The path is the location in the library where the fixture will be stored A fixture assigned to the path Custom Fresnels would be available in the custom section of the Fixture library in a sub categ
302. ombines WYSIWYG visualization software with ETC s Sensor Advanced Features to perform system diagnostics When Sensor detects a problem WYSI Link logs it posts a detailed alert and highlights the image of the affected fixture along with lamp and dimmer data WYSI Link highlights affected fixtures in Data and Wireframe views in CAD Data and Live modes giving you the most complete information about the problem You can also use the message log to track problems by fixture over time WYS I Link resides on a PC connected to an ETCNet2 network and gives you access to all ETCLink features You can record and play backup looks view which console is controlling which dimmers and obtain information from any dimmer or dimmer rack in your system Hardware reguirements WYSI Link requires a few additional pieces of hardware to perform system diagnostics For more information on hardware reguirements refer to Installation on page 31 Upgrading to WYSI Link WYSI Link is an optional feature set for WYSIWYG You can upgrade your dongle for WYSI Link operation by calling your WYSIWYG dealer Once you have purchased the upgrade you will be provided with an upgrade code To learn how to upgrade to WYSILink refer to Upgrades on page 42 ETCNet2 compatibility WYSILink supports ETCNet2 version 2 1 1 and version 3 0 0 networks WYSILink can only monitor one ETCNet2 version at a time By default WYSILink will monitor an ETCNet2 version 2 0 0
303. omma and period Note that the decimal separator cannot be the same as the co ordinate separator Co ordinate Select the method you want to use to separate coordinates in WYSIWYG Available options are comma period semicolon colon or slash Note that the co ordinate separator cannot be the same as the decimal separator Region profile for new documents The profile to be used for such items as voltage and which default lamp should be used in a fixture Look for network dongle 1f you have a WYSIWYG Network product installed for example WYSIWYG Learn Network AWT or CSP you must click this check box to ensure that the program looks for a network dongle when you launch WYSIWYG If you do not have WYSIWYG Network installed leave this check box deselected Note that if you choose Network product in WYSIWYG Product Configuration Wizard then this check box is automatically selected Show WYSIWYG configuration wizard in startup Click this check box if you want to see the product configuration wizard each time you launch WYSIWYG The wizard enables you to choose the level of WYSIWYG that you want to run for example it gives you the option of launching a standard version of WYSIWYG such as Report or Design or a network version of WYSIWYG If you leave this check box deselected the same level of WYSIWYG that you chose when running the program for the first time appears by default File Options tab Settings on the File Options ta
304. ompted to save changes to the current show document click Yes to save changes and close the document Note Click No to skip saving and close the document Click Cance to skip saving and keep the document open Print command The Print command varies from mode to mode In general this command prints the active view to the selected printer To print a document From the File menu choose Print Result Based on the mode you are in the program may print the document directly or it may open the following dialog box so that you can set printing options Print Ea Printer Name SSMCBAINSHP LazerJet 4050 T Setup Print to file Print hat Extents i View Window f Lagu imn Joio feno hy paper Real nni Paint Size jie Preview Cancel a wysiwyg gt gt March 2006 Managing your WYSIWYG document Considerations when printing from CAD mode The Print command opens the Print dialog box Print 7 Ea Printer Name SSMCBAINSHP LazerJet 4050 T Setup Print to file Print what Extents View Window f Last many hy paper Real ong Paint Size jie Preview Cancel This dialog box displays the printer that is used to print your WYSIWYG document The printer shown is the default printer that you have set up in Windows Click Setup to change the printer or printer settings Select the Print to File check box to print your WYSIWYG document to a file instea
305. on based on the level of your Perform system Note that fixtures on layers that are not visible or which are not included in the current scene are not counted Absolute coordinates Absolute coordinates is the default setting however you can change this to the Relative mode This setting determines how coordinate information is displayed mid command In ABS which is the default mode the coordinates display always shows the coordinates currently under your cursor wysiwyg gt March 2006 WYSIWYG user interface Coordinates Coordinates are displayed in the order of X Y and Z The coordinates display the position of the cursor as a distance from the origin of the drawing For more information on coordinates and setting the origin point refer to Coordinate system and origin on page 102 Missing coordinate Double click this label to set the missing coordinate The missing coordinate X Y or Z is the coordinate whose value cannot be entered by clicking on the screen The easiest way to determine the missing coordinate in a wireframe view is to move the mouse around and look at the status bar at the bottom of the working area You will see only two values changing The value that is not changing Is the missing coordinate for that view or workplane The missing coordinate is dependent on the plot type and the workplane selected Once entered this value will affect all subsequent objects inserted in the current view For example if
306. on that you want to modify and then select Properties Result The View Shortcut Properties dialog box is displayed View Shortcut Properties x Mame Plar Open Location f Curent Window Pop Up Window In the Name box type the new name of the shortcut To open the shortcut in the current active window enable the Current Window option button To open the shortcut in a pop up frame enable the Pop Up Window option button For more information on popup frames refer to Popup frames on page 51 Modifying wireframe views The properties of a wireframe view affect how objects are drawn and how much information is visible These settings are modified in the View Options To modify a wireframe view 1 2 Ensure the wireframe view that you want to modify is active From the Options menu choose View Options Result The View Options window appears View Options x General Draw Options View type Show Details w Follow User Scene Scene Tip You can also use the View Options tool E on the Standard toolbar to open the view options Modify options as desired Click OK wysiwyg March 2006 WYSIWYG user interface General tab Options on the Genera tab affect the current scene Name Name of the wireframe view Follow User Scene Select this check box to use the currently selected scene Click to clear this check box and then select the desired scene from the Scenes drop down l
307. ookup data field 216 Hot keys 354 Patch views 358 Presentation views 357 Simulation 356 Image items 295 Images 307 333 Imperial units 103 Importing DWG DXF files 111 112 In Place update 33 Insert Pres toolbar 60 Inserting Color in Data mode 219 Fixtures in CAD mode 179 Fixtures in Data mode 219 Focus positions in Data mode 219 Items into layouts 286 Positions in Data mode 219 Installing In Place update 33 WYSIWYG 32 WYSIWYG Learn 34 WYSIWYG Network 34 Intensity design tool 239 Interactive mode 94 109 Isometric view 106 Item properties 290 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Index J jpeg file 207 252 286 307 K Key Instrument labels 197 Keyboard and mouse control 66 Keyboard shortcuts 353 Keys 300 L Label layout 198 Ladders 171 176 Lamp Type data field 217 Lamps 120 Latitude 93 Layer data field 217 Layers 157 Layers toolbar 60 Layout fixture data 197 Layout tabs CAD 101 Data 215 Design 237 Link 331 Live 313 Pres 261 Layouts Pres mode 284 Left view 106 Legend items 296 Library Browser 119 Library shortcuts 54 Light emission 148 Line Drawing lines 128 Line color 158 Line weight 158 Linear axis 137 Lines 277 Live toolbar 60 Load recording 343 Location setup 92 140 Longitude 93 Looks and moving scenery 248 M Mainframe 52 Marker grips 145 Masking 134 Materials 148 155 Measurement mode 131 Menu bar 57 Mer
308. orcycle Z After you select and drag the attribute to the desired location the following is displayed Motorcycle wysiwyg 2 March 2006 Presentation mode Drawing objects You can add objects to the plot for notation Objects that you can draw include lines arcs circles and text labels You can also insert symbols from the Library Browser Drawing circles Drawing circles in a New Plots view is similar to drawing circles in CAD mode You can access the Circle tool from the Draw menu or from the New Plot Options toolbar 3 For more information on drawing circles refer to Drawing circles on page 129 Note When you add objects such as circles to your plot they are not added to your drawing in CAD mode Drawing arcs Drawing arcs in a New Plots view is similar to drawing arcs in CAD mode You can access the Arc tool from the Draw menu or from the New Plot Options toolbar For more information refer to Drawing arcs on page 129 After you have drawn an arc you can choose to add arrows to one or both ends of the arc The default is none For more information on adding arrows refer to page 283 Drawing lines Drawing lines in a New Plots view is similar to drawing lines in CAD mode For more information refer to Drawing lines on page 128 You can also use the appropriate line tool from the Draw menu or the New Plot Options toolbar The available line tools are as follows a lt Solid
309. orm providing an end to end solution including CAD paperwork rendering and pre visualization In less than one day of training you can begin working with WYSIWYG and see your lighting design without actually installing any lights You can even see what a new lighting fixture can do before you rent buy or install it Once your design is complete WYSIWYG handles the logistics it automatically generates plots schedules pipe tapes and color and gobo lists For more information on each of the three main levels of WYSIWYG see the appropriate section E WYSI WYG Report For details see WYSIWYG Report on page 17 m WYSI WYG Design For details see WYSIWYG Design on page 18 m WYSIWYG Perform For details see WYSIWYG Perform on page 20 wysiwyg V WYSIWYG Reference Guide Chapter 2 The WYSIWYG suite of software products This chapter describes the different levels of WYSIWYG In this chapter WYSIWYG Report WYSIWYG Design WYSIWYG Perform WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition WYSI WYG Learn WYSIWYG Network WYSI Link 17 18 20 22 24 26 27 The WYSIWYG suite of software products Release 16 0 wysiwyg 2 March 2006 The WYSIWYG suite of software products b WYSI WYG Report Introduction WYSIWYG Report is the basic WYSIWYG package It allows lighting professionals to create 2D plans of their productions along with all the necessary paperwork WYSIWYG Report is also available
310. ory named FRESNELS o Ff o N Click Next 9 Select the lamp base and default lamp for this fixture 10 Click Next 11 Specify the lens system for the fixture 12 Click Next 13 Type a value in degrees for the beam angle for this fixture 14 Type a value in degrees for the field angle for this fixture 15 Click Next 16 Select the color frame slot size 17 Click Next 18 From the symbol library select a 2D symbol for this fixture 19 Click Next 20 From the shape library select a 3D symbol for this fixture Note A 10 parcan is shown beside the selected shape in the viewing pane to offer a relative size measurement 21 Click Next 22 Type the manufacturer weight and any other information 23 Click Next 24 Type your name 25 Click Finish wysiwyg gt March 2006 CAD mode Pipe snap Pipe snap places fixtures on a pipe at a specific interval Pipe snap does not work for truss or other hang structures It allows you to specify a pre determined distance between fixtures As with all snap functions refer to Snaps on page 107 for more information about snap tools you can select Pipe snap in mid command or as a running snap type To select Pipe snap as a running snap type Enable Pipe snap before inserting fixtures to hang fixtures equidistantly To select Pipe snap mid command Enable Pipe snap after inserting the first fixture to enforce the interval selectively Pipe Snap will disengage after you pl
311. oting that Quick Tools have been enabled Click on the fixtures to which you want to add the color or gobo Note If you want to apply color to a multi source light that has multiple circuits such as the 528 Borderlight 6 4 Circuit the following window appears prompting you to select the circuit to which you want to apply the color I Do not ask this question again In this case select the circuit and then click Se ect To choose multiple circuits press CTRL and then select the desired circuits Click Se ect when you are finished Right click and then select Finish Quick Tools to finish placing the color or gobo 203 CAD mode Release 16 0 204 To create a new shortcut to a color or gobo 1 Click the Col Gobo shortcut bar 2 Right click in the open space on the bar and then choose New Shortcut Result The Co or Select or Gobo Select dialog box is displayed 3 Select a color or gobo from the tree menu on the left side Result The color or gobo is displayed on the right side 4 Click Select Color gobo lists Color and gobo lists are reguired for automated lighting fixtures and scrollers By default when inserted automated fixtures and scrollers are set to use the manufacturer default color or gobo list WYSIWYG contains a library of stock color and gobo lists provided by the fixture manufacturers If you are using a custom set of colors or gobos or want to generate a scroll for a color scroller
312. ou open a similar or identical dialog box to the View Options dialog box that appears when you are working on the original item in CAD Data or Pres mode In this dialog you can modify the information to be displayed and control how it is displayed To modify content properties 1 Select the presentation item that you want to modify 2 From the Edit menu choose Content Properties Tip You can also click the Content Properties tool on the Edit toolbar Eal Result The View Options dialog box is displayed Note Content properties for CAD items are discussed in CAD items on page 291 Item Properties Item Properties affect the placeholders and the scaling of the contents Options here include the outline s weight and color and various printing options for the contents such as scale au wysiwyg March 2006 Presentation mode To modify item properties 1 2 Select the presentation item you want to modify From the Edit menu choose ltem Properties Tip You can also click the tem Properties tool on the Edit toolbar P Result The Properties dialog box is displayed Properties 21 General CAD Rotation CAD Printing Outline Weight E Colour L Fill None Fill Colour Note The first page of the properties dialog is identical regardless of the type of presentation item Options here affect the outline and fill color of the placeholder CAD items You can modify or edit CAD items to m
313. oved and all patch binding information is lost To control a DMX patched video source with a console Note If the video control is patched and DMX connected in Live Mode then you will not be able to control the video using any of the Video Designer Tool commands in Design mode Video sources can only be controlled by a designer tool when the DMX source is disconnected therefore you must first disconnect the applicable console device from Live Mode before using any of the Video Designer Tool commands After you have patched the control of a video source in Data mode you can use the applicable console device to control the progress of the video in Live mode In WYSIWYG you patch the control of a video source not the actual video This means that you can use the console device to control the progress of a live video stream or a video file by making the video play pause or rewind you cannot use WYSIWYG to change different aspects of the video itself wysiwyg March 2006 Live mode To control the video source the DMX patch is allocated three channels with the following controls First channel Intensity The video is off if the value is set petween 1 128 below 5090 it is on if the value is between 128 255 above 5090 Second channel Control The video is controlled by the position that you set on the third channel if the value is set between 1 84 between 1 and 3390 it is paused if the value is set between 85
314. pe of object When you select multiple objects of different types tabs appear for each type of object selected General object properties In WYSIWYG there are three tabs that appear in the properties dialog box for every object These three tabs are the General Appearance and Light Emission tabs For 3D solids and surfaces the Set Piece tab also appears in the properties dialog box All tabs are explained here General tab Options on the Genera tab affect the layer s color and line thickness Properties General Appearance Light Emission Set Piece Fixture Hang Structure Truss Black Box lw Use Layer Line Thickness m Layer list A list of the layers in your document is displayed Click on a list item to change the layer on which the objects will be drawn m Use Layer Color Select this check box to set the object s color for wireframe views to be the same as the properties of the layer on which the object resides For more information refer to Layer properties on page 158 wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode Click to clear the check box and then use the color button to set a specific color for the object m Use Layer Line Thickness Select this check box to set the object s line thickness to be the same as the properties of the layer on which the object resides For more information refer to Layer properties on page 158 Click to clear the check box and then type a thickn
315. pe s or truss properties will also open the Position Manager Position Manager x Sort Order Hew Rename Renove Select Cancel Click New Type the name of the new position and then click OK To modify the name of a position select the position and then click Rename o Ff Oo N Type the new name and then click OK WYSIWYG Reference Guide 171 CAD mode 172 Release 16 0 6 To remove a position name select the name and then click Remove Removing the position name does not delete the hang structure Rather the hang structure removes its association with the position name 7 _ To reorder the position names in the list select the name of the position you want to move Click Up or Down to move the name in the list 8 If you are in a plot view and want to determine what a particular position references click Se ect If the plot view is open and the correct layers are marked editable the hang structures that use that position name are selected To select more than one position press CTRL and then click the position 9 Click OK to close the Position Manager Hang structure properties Options on the Hang Structure tab affect the properties of the selected hang structure s Properties X a 2 x General Appearance Light Emission Hang Structure Fipe Name ix BE i Autollnit r Hang Options lw Snap Number of fixtures n Fixture weight 0 00 lbs cence
316. pecified source Tip You can open the Device Manager without having to change to Live mode by double clicking on the AF shortcut on the status bar Display tab Options on the Display tab set properties such as the color of a patch universe View Options x Universe Display Show Details Node Manager Updates per second E l Enable Tooltips Colour UnPatched Colour Background Colour L__ Selected Colour Text Colour Column width Size Small I Large m Updates per second The frequency of updates from the console to the patch universe m Enable Tooltios Select this check box to display information about the patch and the fixture when you hover over the start cell m UnPatched Color The color of a cell in the patch universe that is not patched m Background Color The color of the background of the patch view m Text Color The color of the text that is displayed in the patch universe m Selected Color The highlighted color of a selected fixture in the patch universe m Column Width Size Adjust the slider to resize the patch universe cells to the desired width To change the width of the patch cells You can adjust the width of the cells in DMX and Motion Control patch universes 1 Right click anywhere in the patch universe and choose View Options 2 Click the Display tab 3 Adjust the Column Width Slider to the preferred size 4 Click OK Show Details tab Options on the Show Det
317. perties including the number of poles length height or perimeter of the walls and the color of different parts of the tent You can also choose from different materials and you can choose whether you want to apply either a custom color or texture to different parts of the tent When assigning a texture you can choose your own texture such as a company logo or symbol or you can choose a texture from the WYSIWYG library The origin for both types of tents is at the center of the tent on the floor Frame tent wysiwyg March 2006 The following entries describe the parts of the frame tent New Venue Tent Description Field The height of the tent Wall height walls The length of the tent Width walls The width the tent walls Depth The height that the Height above walls center pole extends above the height of the walls The distance between the Separation center poles Circus tent The following entries describe the parts of the circus tent WYSIWYG Reference Guide New Venue Tent Description Field The number of individual Segments segments in the tent The height of the tent Wall height walls The height that the Height above walls center pole extends above the height of the walls The diameter of the tent Diameter measured from pole to opposite pole CAD mode WYSIWYG Default Value 20 0 80 O 70 0 10 O 20 0 WYSIWYG Default Value 6 20 0
318. place to hang fixtures but also a means to organize your paperwork Some general facts about hang structures m Hang structures can be pipes or trusses Pipes are drawn trusses are placed from the truss library There are many different types of truss pieces in the truss library including box triangle and curved Truss includes floor mount boom and ladder positions as well m AutoUnit will assign and adjust unit numbers for fixtures on a pipe as you add move or delete them m Hang structures can have the same name even if they are not connected For example you can use this feature for set mounts where you have many small pipes attached to the same piece of scenery Position Manager The Position Manager organizes all the available position names in your show document It also sets the sort order of your positions You can use the Position Manager to change the sort order of the position names which is important for printed paperwork like instrument schedules and other reports that use the Position field The order of position names is also used for general sorting in the Data view and the order in which positions appear in the Flight Case The Position Manager is accessible from the Properties window of a hang structure and from the Positions command in the Edit menu To view and edit entries in the Position Manager 1 From the Edit menu choose Positions Note The ellipsis button on the Hang Structure page of a pi
319. plication level you must browse the library from the WYSIWYG Welcome window The information is stored in the Default ldb file in the WYSIWYGU 1 Library folder If you need to reinstall WYSIWYG make a backup of Default ldb and replace the installed file with the backup to ensure your changes are not lost a To change the label layout for the selected fixture only select the fixture open its properties and then skip to step 5 If more than one fixture type is selected the edit layout option is not available Select the Fixtures library Navigate through the library and then select the fixture type for which you wish to change the label layout a wysiwyg gt March 2006 WYSIWYG Reference Guide CAD mode Click the Property tool Result The properties dialog box for that fixture type Is displayed Click Edit Layout Result The Labe Layout window is displayed Label Layout for 0 66 Metre bliniztrip Patch vw Visible l Use Body Colour VW Position with fixture M Rotate with fixture Italics m Horizontal Justification b Left Center Right Top Center Bottom Height oz Angle 0 00 Shape None Size or a Use Defaults Cancel o Justification From the list on the left select the attribute that you want to edit Note To make the controls active you may have to deselect the Use Defaults check box Modify the individual propert
320. presents the left hand column on the page and the bottom of the list represents the right hand column To move a column up or down in the list click its name and then use the Up and Down buttons Note There is a special column in the Columns list called Count The Count column displays the total of all fixtures that meet the unigue reguirements of all the filters applied to all columns Filters Contains settings for the column that you selected from the Columns list You can use filters to extract specific information from reports For example you can create a report that displays all the fixtures that have notes To do so select the Notes column and the Visible check box and then select the filter Not Empty You will also have to make Position Unit and Channel visible so that you know which fixtures have these notes Sums After you select either the Count or Status column from the list select one of the following types of sums to be displayed on the report m Report Total Select if you want to include the total for the report a Group Total Select if you want to report totals for all groups a Duplicate Lines Only available if you have selected the Status column Select if you want to report the total of all duplicate lines Sort By Contains the settings for how the report will be sorted The keys sort fixtures in alphabetical or numeric order When fixtures have the same value in the first sort Key the report is then sorted
321. ptions x Object Settings Report Data Error Regional Settings Document Summary Show Info Object Defaults Venue PO Show Po Designer PO Assistant PO Type all the pertinent information in the boxes Click OK Result All reports are updated WYSIWYG Reference Guide 267 Presentation mode Release 16 0 b gt t New Plots Introduction New Plots views were introduced so that you could more effectively manipulate a drawing developed in CAD mode to create a lighting plot or schematic for printing In the New Plots view you can m manipulate the objects in a plot without affecting the objects in the original CAD drawing model u notate your plot using objects such as circles lines and text labels m rotate the position of vertical hang structures to better illustrate mounted fixtures m move rotate or manipulate the layout of fixture attributes easily and quickly Working in the New Plots view Working in a New Plots view is similar in some respects to working with a drawing in a CAD wireframe view You can use your keyboard and mouse to navigate around the plot easily and quickly A command line interface is available to help you when entering coordinates Note Changes made to a drawing in CAD mode are not automatically reflected in the New Plots view You must update plots manually to see the changes For details see Updating plots on page 269 Keyboard and mouse control Navigatin
322. r and WYSIWYG Perform will simulate the exact effect of the console s output in real time Note The following specifications are subject to change Software features Includes all the features of WYSIWYG Report and Design 3D plotting of set and lighting designs Multiple working views including front back sides top bottom and isometric Comprehensive 3D library of fixtures accessories truss colors gobos props and so on Fully integrated paperwork and CAD systems Live mode for real time lighting visualization Accurate simulation of conventional and automated fixtures OpenGL technology for improved beam simulation Light emitting surfaces allow simulation of lasers neon LEDs projection screens and so on Easy hook up to consoles and other DMX sources Auto Focus protocol lets WYSIWYG send color and focus data to consoles Integrated design mode allows you to create lighting looks without a console Rendering generates a photo realistic picture of your cue or lighting look Renderings include bounce and reflection from surfaces Animated renderings available though certified service providers Multi monitor support 12 months of software and library updates included Upgrade suggestions Modes A faster processor improves responsiveness and rendering times Memory requirements depend on the size of the show Insufficient memory can seriously affect performance Add memory if there is excessive disk activity A high per
323. r layout This one inch measurement translates to a realistic measurement for example 3 feet m Point Size The size at which points are printed m Hide Zero Intensity Fixture Select this check box to hide any fixtures with an Intensity set to zero so they do not print View type tab Options on the View type tab affect the view type of the CAD item View Options General CAD Rotation CAD Printing View type Show Details Wy OTe ene f Plan Side Front Right i Scrollbars On Front Back sometric m View Type The view types available are those discussed in Plot types on page 106 a WorkPlane The workplanes available are those discussed in Plot types on page 106 m Scrollbars Select this check box to display the scrollbars on the bottom and left side edges of the layout Click to clear this check box to turn the scrollbars off Show Details tab Options on the Show Details tab affect the amount of fixture information that is shown in the CAD item WYSIWYG Reference Guide 293 Presentation mode General CAD Rotation CAD Printing View Type Shaw Details Fixture data shown on plot lw Unit W Channel Tw Spot I Colour I Lamp I Focus Ti Gobo Circuit Patch Position Purpose T Lens Notes Dimmer Intensity View Options E x lw Show Test Labels Paint Size WW Enable Tooltips ho lw Draw Symbols Show truss crass members Fixture tooltips lw Unit
324. r more information see Rendering on page 250 WYSIWYG Reference Guide 211 CAD mode Release 16 0 Chapter 7 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Data mode familiar to those who have used a spreadsheet program In this chapter Layout tabs Spreadsheets Patch Errors 215 216 223 231 Data mode enables you to view and edit the data for all your fixtures Data mode operates like many other spreadsheet programs so many of the concepts will be 213 Data mode Release 16 0 a wysiwyg gt gt March 2006 y ae Layout tabs Data mode Beneath the work area in each mode is a series of layout tabs These layouts provide various configurations of the views you are working with To change layouts click the tab that corresponds to the layout you wish to use The Data mode contains the following layouts Spreadsheet The work area contains a spreadsheet of data currently in the show database H Select The work area is split horizontally with a wireframe view above and a spreadsheet view below V Select The work area is split vertically with a wireframe view on the left and a spreadsheet view on the right Patch The work area is split with a wireframe view above and the patch window below Errors The work area contains a spreadsheet displaying fixtures with errors Note The wireframe views in Data mode are used for fixture selection only Any selections made in the spreadsheet are visible on the CA
325. rd Hi from the Render shortcut bar in a similar manner as other shortcuts The Render shortcut bar is prepopulated with two shortcuts Quick Render and Full Render Quick Render shortcuts provide settings for a small lower quality render while Full Render shortcuts provide settings for a larger high quality rendering To create a shortcut from the Render Wizard 1 From the Design menu choose Render 2 While working through the steps in the Render Wizard you can at any time click Add Shortcut to save the current settings as a shortcut 3 Type a name for the shortcut n wysiwyg gt gt March 2006 4 Design mode Click OK Result The shortcut is added to the Render shortcut bar To create a shortcut from the Render shortcut bar 1 Right click in the open space on the Render shortcut bar and then choose New Render Type a name for the new render Click OK Result The Render shortcut is saved on the Render shortcut bar The shortcut is preconfigured with the default values for each of the eight steps These defaults are the same values that are used when you choose Render from the menu bar or the toolbar To modify a Render shortcut 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Double click on the Render shortcut that you want to modify Result The Render Wizard opens with the values that are saved in the shortcut Modify the options as required Result The settings are recorded in the shortcut and are available the
326. rotocol TEN Software Curent Slot 1 fi Colour Mix Slot 2 E Dual lt Gobos gt Slot 3 fi Gobo lris Gwe oo E Mode Sets the mode for the selected fixture E Software The software version that is loaded on the selected fixture m Slots The mechanical components that are present in the selected fixture m Control Simulates the lamp control channel on the selected fixture Since you can physically turn a fixture on or off WYSIWYG enables this action in the software Control tab Options on the Control tab enable you to set the channel circuit and patch universe information for the fixture General Appearance Light Emission Fixture 1 Static Colour 2Gobo1 3Gobo2 2FX Options General Contral Moving Head Control Circuit Channel jo fob Dinmer fo Z Fatch Use EDM address Universe Mone OF Cancel Apply m Channel Type the channel number for the selected fixture m Dimmer The dimmer number for the selected fixture March 2006 CAD mode m Use EDMX address If checked the EDMX address is used for the patch universe This check box is enabled if either EDMX or Conventionals for the DMX address is selected from the Universe drop down list E Name The circuit name for the selected fixture E Number The circuit number for the selected fixture m Universe Select a patch universe for the fixture a Address The starting DMX channel number for the
327. rs or millimeters To set the default unit type From the Options menu choose User Options Click the Draw Defaults tab Click either Metric or Imperial A Oo N Click Whole Fraction mm or cm Note These choices vary based on whether you selected Metric or Imperial in step 3 To switch unit types on the fly Double click the units display on the status bar WYSIWYG Reference Guide 103 CAD mode Release 16 0 The missing coordinate The missing coordinate X Y or Z is the coordinate whose value cannot be entered by clicking on the screen The easy way to determine which coordinate is the missing coordinate in a wireframe view is to move the mouse around Look at the status bar at the bottom of the working area You will see only two values changing The value that is not changing is the missing coordinate for that view or workplane The missing coordinate is dependent on the plot type and the workplane selected In the following example Y is the missing coordinate as its value is set at 0 0 1 aa oo aa Once entered this value affects all subseguent objects inserted in the current view For example if the missing coordinate is set to 5 in a plan view all objects are placed 5 feet off the floor X Y 5 until the missing coordinate is changed again Please note that the missing coordinate is not a move tool Objects will not be moved to the missing coordinate value The missing coordinate only affects subseguent
328. rting truss pieces in your drawing you can rotate them to the desired position by using the Rotate tool and the rotate hot keys X and Z By enabling Assembly snap pieces of truss that you drag into the drawing will snap to connect to the first piece of truss that you inserted ensuring proper structural assembly Notes a When inserting and rotating the first piece of truss in a series you must use the Rotate tool eb to rotate it to the desired position you cannot use the hot keys X and Z to rotate the first piece of truss a Once you have placed and rotated the first piece of truss and have enabled Assembly snap you can then drag new pieces of truss into the drawing and use the hot keys X and Z to rotate them to the same position as the first piece of truss To rotate truss 1 GO N O O RA 10 11 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Open the Library Browser and then click the 7russ tool R Navigate through the library to find the type of truss that you want to use Tip You can also click the Truss tool on the Draw toolbar to place truss Double click the object name Result A piece of truss attaches to the cursor Click on the drawing to place the first piece of truss Right click and choose Finish Placing Truss Select the piece of truss and then click the Rotate tool eb Click in the drawing to choose the base point around which you want to rotate the truss Type the rotational value in degrees
329. rtion point m Bottom Places the selected text label above the insertion point wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode Dimension tab Options on the Dimension tab affect the appearance and measurement mode of the selected dimension To change the length of a dimension it must be stretched in the drawing 2 x General Appearance Light Emission Line Text Label Hang Structure Pipe Dimension Dimension Length Text Extension Offset View Type Measurement Mode se Measurement Units Metric mperial Precision whole Fraction m Length This box is not editable It displays the actual length of the line drawn for the dimension H Text Type a height value to change the font size of the dimension label m Extension Type a value to change the length of the extension lines for the dimension The extension lines mark the extremities of the dimension m Offset Type a value to change the offset The offset is the distance between the extension lines and the object being measured m View Type This box is not editable It displays the plot type in which the dimension label is visible which is determined when the dimension is drawn u Measurement Mode Select an option to change the measurement mode Measurement modes are explained in Drawing dimension lines on page 131 a Measurement Units Select the mperia or Metric option buttons to change the me
330. ry Browser or you can create shortcuts to your favorite fixtures Hanging fixtures To insert fixtures 1 From the Library menu choose Browse Library In the tree menu that is now visible click on the sign beside Manufacturer to select fixtures by manufacturer name Type to select by fixture type or A to see all the fixtures in alphabetical order Click the Fixture tool at the bottom of the browser Double click on the name of the fixture that you want to Insert Result A fixture with default settings for this type attaches to the cursor Note You can change the fixture frame size using the Add Accessory option For more information on adding accessories refer to To insert an accessory on page 202 To change the properties of the fixture before inserting right click on the fixture name and then click Property Result A dialog box opens with a shaded view of the fixture on the left and an image of its symbol on the right Use the Photometrics tab to change the lamp and lens settings for the fixture if applicable For more information on the Photometrics tab refer to Photometrics tab on page 190 Click nsert and the dialog will close Move the mouse over a hang structure and then click to place the fixture Continue placing this type of fixture by clicking on the other hang structures as desired Finish placing this fixture type by right clicking and then choosing Finish placing fixtures fr
331. s 1 Select the cylinder that you want to divide From the Tools menu choose Divide and then choose Cylinder into lines Type the number of lines desired Result The cylinder is divided into equal parts by the number of lines specified The lines follow the same pattern as the cylinder s existing segments but at the calculated interval To divide a line into points 1 2 Select the line that you want to divide From the Tools menu choose Divide and then choose Lines into points wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode 3 Type the number of points desired Result The line is divided into egual parts by the number of points specified The points are placed along the line at the calculated interval Note Lines may also be divided by adding vertices In this case no new objects are created the line is simply divided by marker points To add a vertex to a line 1 Select the line to be divided 2 Right click on the line segment that you want to divide and then choose Add Vertex Result The original line remains intact A marker point is placed at the midpoint of the line Notes a This procedure can be repeated for vertices within a line The marker points will always be placed at the mid point of the vertices a Marker points can be dragged out to re shape the line m If the line is deleted the marker points are also deleted a Alternatively to perform a divide command you can use the Divide tool on the Tool
332. s Click Next and Back to navigate through the Render Wizard 3 Click Finish Result WYSIWYG generates the rendering of your lighting look or cue If the rendering is saved internally it is available as an image in Presentation mode Note For more information see Rendering on page 250 ji wysiwyg WYSIWYG Reference Guide Chapter 11 WYSI Link Link mode WYSI Link Link mode becomes available when you purchase and install the WYS Link add on for WYSIWYG WYSILink acts as an interface to ETCLink For further details on ETCLink refer to your Sensor CEM User Manual In this mode you can view diagnostic information about the fixtures in your system You can also record and play back backup looks and view dimmer and dimmer rack information In this chapter Layout tabs 331 Setting up WYSI Link 332 WYSI Link mode 333 ETCLink functions 338 329 WYS Link Link mode Release 16 0 wysiwyg March 2006 WYSI Link Link mode y ae Layout tabs Introduction Beneath the work area in each mode is a series of layout tabs These tabs provide various configurations of the views in which you are working To change layouts click the appropriate tab Link mode contains the following layout tab m Message Log The work area displays a spreadsheet of ETCLink error messages WYSIWYG Reference Guide 331 WYS Link Link mode Release 16 0 b Setting up WYSI Link I ntroduction WYS Link c
333. s if you drag the beam over the focus position It will automatically snap to the focus position instead wysiwyg gt March 2006 CAD mode I nteractive mode Interactive mode is an alternative method for drawing objects Objects are typically drawn using a dialog box to set the object s size width depth and height for example The full size object is then attached to the cursor so you can place it in the drawing An Interactive button enables you to switch modes Interactive mode allows you to click an Insertion point for the object first and then drag to create the scope of the object as allowed by the view XY for plan view XZ for front view and so on Once those dimensions are set a dialog box may open to allow you to set the third dimension if reguired Interactive mode works with Risers Cylinders Circles Arcs Spheres and Pipes There are some special considerations when drawing pipes in interactive mode as explained in Drawing pipes on page 134 To set interactive as the default drawing mode 1 From the Options menu choose User Options 2 Click the User tab 3 In the Options area of the window click the nteractive object creation check box To set interactive mode on the fly Press F11 on your keyboard or click the Interactive tool on the CAD Options toolbar I mporting DWG DXF files You can open or merge DWG or DXF files into your WYSIWYG show document If you open a DWG or DXF while another show
334. s 8 0 3 In the Vertical Diameter box type the vertical diameter for the sphere The default value is 8 0 4 Click OK Result The cylinder is attached to the cursor 5 Drag the new sphere to its position and then click to place the object in the drawing To draw a sphere in interactive mode Note To turn interactive mode on click the Interactive Mode button on the toolbar 1 From the Draw menu choose Sphere Tip You can also click the Sphere tool on the Draw toolbar 6B 2 Click to place the sphere in your drawing and then click again Result The New Sphere dialog box appears 3 In the dialog box that opens type the horizontal and vertical diameter of the new sphere Click OK Click in the drawing to finish placing the new sphere WYSIWYG Reference Guide 133 CAD mode Release 16 0 Drawing pipes For details refer to Drawing pipes on page 134 Drawing masking Masking specifically borders and legs can be automatically attached to pipes using the border and legs tool To draw borders and legs 1 Select the pipes for which you want to attach a border and legs From the Tools menu choose Border and Legs Select the Border check box to add a border to the selected pipes and then specify the height of the border Note This is the distance from the pipe to the bottom of the border 4 Select the Legs check box to add legs to the selected pipes and then specify the width and bottom elevation of t
335. s how points will be displayed as crosses dots sguares or circles Show Options x Object Settings Report Data Error Regional Settings Document Summary Show Info Object Defaults Point type C Do f Cross Square Circle Region profile North America Reset Label Layouts Set Default Font for Presentation Views m Point type Indicates the default point type in your show document You can choose to display points as dots crosses squares or circles m Region profile The geographical region where the show will be occurring This setting establishes the profile for voltage and consequently what will be used for such items as light bulbs in a fixture H Reset Label Layouts Click to reset all fixture labelling to the default settings E Set Default Font for Presentation Views Click to select a default font for presentation views Object Settings tab Options on the Object Settings tab affect how various objects are placed or drawn in CAD mode wysiwyg gt March 2006 Managing your WYSIWYG document Show Options E E Document Summary Show Info Object Defaults Object Settings Report Data Error Regional Settings Hang Options Tw AutoLnit lw Snap Interval j e lw Enforce Spacing fro Minimum Spacing Symbol Alignment l T Line up symbols r Line eight Emission Autofocus MH tl weight 0 015 ae r Shading Options Facet Splitting
336. s in the device manager in Live mode m Layer This field indicates which layer the fixture is drawn on m Tag This is an internal code used for importing and exporting data to from third party programs m Owner This feature is currently disabled Working in the spreadsheet Data may be entered in a number of ways within the WYSIWYG file The plot can be created and then edited or the data may be entered in a spreadsheet and then placed on the plot Any entries or changes are reciprocated throughout the file changes made in Data mode will be updated in CAD mode and visa versa To add or modify data Type the desired value in the appropriate cell Tip You can add or modify chunks of information at the same time by selecting a series of cells and typing If you are entering seguential numerical values for a field such as patch you can use incremental data entry to facilitate your work WYSIWYG will calculate the next available value based on the number of reguired channels for the previous fixture To input seguential numerical data 1 Type the first value in the appropriate cell 2 Press and hold ALT and press the down arrow for each incremental entry you want to make WYSIWYG Reference Guide 217 Data mode Release 16 0 To choose a new value 1 Select the appropriate cell 2 Right click and choose Pick value from the list Result This action opens a dialog with a drop down menu listing all of the values curr
337. s into lines Result Each segment of the solid becomes an independent line The 3D solid in no longer a solid Note Alternatively to perform a break command you can use the Break tool on the 7oo s toolbar amp 2 This is the same as choosing Specify from the Break sub menu To break using the Specify dialog 1 Select the object that you want to break 2 From the Tools menu choose Break and then choose Specify Break x M Lines into lines Number of lines 4 W Break Line at vertices Wa Cicles inte lines MUTT Gt ates 4 Circes inta ares Stes tate lines Stes inte ares Set pieces ita lines Set pieces into faces lw Delete original objects Put new objects on current layer Cancel 3 Select the desired break type from the available options by selecting the appropriate check boxes Based on the object that you have selected to break these options vary 4 In the boxes at the top right corner specify the number of break lines or arcs if appropriate 5 Select the Delete original objects check box if you want the original object to be replaced with the new broken ones 6 Select the Put new objects on current layer check box if you want the new broken objects to be placed on the current layer as opposed to the selected object s original layer if different 7 Click OK Convert The Convert command turns an object into a different kind of object For example you can convert a circ
338. s shortcut tab Right click in the New Plots shortcut area and choose the type of plot that you want to create Type the name of the plot Click OK Result The type of plot that you chose is created and a shortcut to your new plot is added to the New Plots shortcut bar For information on working with shortcuts refer to Working with shortcuts on page 54 Note The plot is created with a specific set of default properties but you can modify these settings as required For more information on the settings refer to Modifying the properties of a plot below Updating plots Changes made to a drawing in CAD mode are not automatically reflected in the New Plots view You must update plots manually To update a plot 1 2 Select the plot that you want to update From the Options menu choose Update New Plot Note If the New Plots view already reflects the current CAD drawing the option is disabled Modifying the properties of a plot You can modify the border thickness paper size or scaling of a plot 269 Presentation mode 2 0 Release 16 0 To modify plot properties 1 2 Select the plot for which you want to modify the settings From the Options menu choose View Options Tip You can also use the View Options tool on the Standard toolbar Bl Result The View Options dialog box appears View Options x New Plot View Properties Tile Frinting Fisture Details Grid Point Size iN Tw
339. s toolbar f This is the same as choosing Specify from the Divide sub menu To divide using the Specify dialog 1 Select the object you want to divide 2 From the Tools menu choose Divide and then choose Specify Divide x Lines into points Number of divide points a for number of segments 1 Circles inte patits Grcles inta lines fio Ares into pointe pod Ares intolines Cinders tate lines elinders inte cicles Delete original objects lw Put new objects on current layer Cancel 3 Select the desired divide type from the available options by selecting the appropriate check boxes 4 Select the Delete original objects check box if you want the original object to be deleted when the new ones are created 5 Select the Put new objects on current layer check box if you want the new objects to be placed on the current layer as opposed to the selected object s original layer if different 6 Click OK Extrude The Extrude command allows you to turn a 2D object like a line or an arc into a surface or turn a surface into an extruded surface or 3D solid WYSIWYG Reference Guide 167 CAD mode 168 Release 16 0 To extrude a line 1 Select the line that you want to extrude From the Tools menu choose Extrude and then choose Lines into Surfaces Type the distance to extrude the line The extrusion will occur parallel to the axis of the missing coordinate For example a line shown in plan view w
340. scend Descend Descend T Group By Cancel To adjust a column s location in the spreadsheet highlight the appropriate column heading in the Columns box and then click the Up or Down button to relocate it in the data view To hide a column in your view deselect the check box beside it To specify how entries should be sorted choose the desired column headings in the Key 1 Key 2 and Key 3 drop down lists When fixtures have the same value in the first sort key the spreadsheet is then sorted by the values of the second sort key Click Ascend or Descend to sort the criteria in ascending or descending order respectively Select the Show Selection Always check box to ensure that any fixtures selected in a plot view will automatically be selected in a data view Select the Enable Heading Click Sort check box to enable the ability to sort the spreadsheet by clicking on the column headings while working in the spreadsheet The Show Only Selected option will filter the spreadsheet to display only the fixtures that are selected in the Wireframe view Select the Show Gridlines check box to display the columns in tabular format with lines separating the data Select the Word Wrap check box to view all the text on a line in the spreadsheet Select the Show Edit Bar check box to display the edit bar at the top of the spreadsheet The Filter section has the same functionality as the data filters discussed in Data filt
341. scription Redo Undo Add to or remove from selection list Copy selected objects Rotate selected objects Nudges selected objects in 10 increments Nudges selected objects in 1 increments Displays properties of selected object Move target Rotates around the drawing in isometric view only Zoom in and out Erases selected object Abort command Hot keys are keyboard shortcuts that act as commands entered from menus or toolbars They are categorized according to the view and timing of usage For example certain hot keys are only operational in plot views and only in the midst of performing an operation Default hot keys available in Plot Views The following default hot keys are useful when working in CAD mode 354 wysiwyg March 2006 Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys Start Operations Description Hot Key Insert line Insert riser Insert cylinder Insert pipe Insert truss Insert text label Insert fixture Snap to grid Snap to midpoints Snap to endpoints Zoom window Modify view ToolTips on off o lt lt NN mM 2 QO T7 0D FH VDA r Insert dimension Mid Operations Description Hot Key Abort mode A Finish mode F Close line C Quick increase Quick decrease Snap to grid Snap to midpoints Snap to endpoints Previous zoom Next zoom Rotate truss counter clockwise Rotate truss clockwise n KX N 2 om lt o OJ Truss rotate from one end to the other end ToolTips on off Y
342. se on page 138 1 In the shortcut area click the Patch tab 2 Click the patch shortcut to which you have linked control of the moving object Result The moving scenery patch appears in the patch universe 3 Open the console device that you have connected to the DMX patch for example the Mini Console 4 Using the console controls move the slider of the first or second channel to advance the object to the desired position on the movement axis Note The first channel is for coarse movement and can be used to advance the object guickly to any position along the entire path from start to finish The second channel is for fine movement Its movement range is very slight and depends on the position that you have set on the first channel For details see To control a DMX patched movement axis with a console on page 317 5 In the Shaded tab of Live mode you can now use the console device to control the object s movement along the axis For details see To control a DMX patched movement axis with a console on page 317 To patch a movement axis to a motion control system In WYSIWYG you can patch a movement axis to which one or more objects has been attached and then use a console device or a motion control system to control the progress of the objects along the axis You have the choice of patching the axis to either a DMX patch universe or a motion control universe based on the type of console or system you will be using
343. se 16 0 Reestablish links 273 Relationship with objects in CAD 273 Relationship with objects in Data 273 Selecting objects 278 Updating 269 Working in 268 New Right Section Plot 269 New Show 77 Node Manager 340 Number of color frames data field 217 Number of data channels data field 217 Number of lamps data field 217 O Object representation in New Plots 272 Object specific properties 150 Offset 175 Offset data field 216 Open a show document 77 Open GL tab 86 Opening a new window 52 Options 83 Origin 95 102 Ortho 65 107 Owner data field 217 P Palette shortcuts 246 Pan data field 216 Paperwork 262 Passwords 45 Patch 223 changing width of cells in 229 Patch data field 216 Patch universe 223 Patch views Hot keys 358 Patching movement axes DMX 225 movement axes motion control system 225 Patching fixtures 224 Photo duality pictures 250 Photometrics 179 190 Pipe 134 181 Pipe snap 108 Pipe tape 309 Plan view 106 Plot type 106 Points 128 Popup frames 51 Ports console 314 Position 171 Position data field 216 Position Manager 171 POV Point of View 194 Precision 95 153 Presence option 253 Presentation items 286 wysiwyg March 2006 Presentation views Hot keys 357 Print 80 Printing layouts 306 Processors 87 Product Configuration Wizard 38 Properties Dimension 153 Errors 233 Focus position 183 General 146 Layouts 285 Legen
344. selected fixture Fixture notation Fixture notation affects how fixtures and their properties are displayed on your drawing and consequently on your plot in Presentation mode As illustrated below two components comprise fixture notation m symbol m information layout GO Oa RS CUS Information gt layout Ie Symbols A symbol is a graphical representation of a fixture in a Wireframe view In all wireframe views except isometric symbols may be used to represent fixtures instead of three dimensional models Fixtures are associated with specific symbols by default but you can change the symbol to whatever you like To turn fixture symbols on or off 1 From the Options menu choose User Options Result The User Options dialog box is displayed Select the Show Details tab Select the Draw Symbols check box 4 Click OK To change the symbol for a fixture type The following procedure changes the symbol for all instances of the selected fixture type in the document Similar procedures change the symbol at an application level WYSIWYG Reference Guide 197 CAD mode Release 16 0 Note For fixtures with interchangeable lenses or lamps in the case of PARs you must change the symbol for the lamp or lens instead of the fixture 1 From the Library menu choose Browse Library Note To change the symbol at an application level you must browse the library from the WYSIWYG welcome window The information is stored in
345. signalling the direction in which the object will move You can adjust the size of the arrow to suit your needs by opening the Properties page for the axis Rotation Choose this type of axis If you want to have an object rotate in a circular motion When you click to place this type of axis in your drawing a circle with a center dot appears The circle acts as a visual cue telling you the direction in which the object will rotate the center dot is the actual axis around which the object rotates The orientation of the object s rotation changes based on the view in which you draw the axis plan side or front back When placing the object to be rotated in your drawing note that its position relative to the center dot of the rotation axis Is important The distance from the center dot to the object represents the size of the circle in which it will rotate with the dot marking the center of the circle To have the object rotate in a very tight circle for example a dancer doing a pirouette or a spinning object place the object directly on the center dot By default all rotation axes have an arrow on one end signalling the direction in which the object will rotate While you cannot adjust the size of the arrow head directly you can click and drag the circle to the desired size which adjusts the arrow head proportionately To change the direction of the object s rotation switch views and then drag the center point to the new orientation
346. ssage Log m Ability to record and play backup looks m Loads can be recorded for specific dimmers WYSIWYG Reference Guide 27 The WYSIWYG suite of software products Release 16 0 28 wysiwyg gt Chapter 3 Installation configuration activation and registration This chapter provides instructions on how to install configure activate and register the WYSIWYG software You must activate and register the software before you can start using WYSIWYG In this chapter Installation 31 3Click FINISH to complete the installation 37 Upgrades 42 Subscriptions 43 Passwords 45 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Installation configuration activation and registration 30 Release 16 0 wysiwyg 2 March 2006 b Installation Installation configuration activation and registration Introduction Follow the procedures in this section to install the level of WYSIWYG that you have purchased Minimum hardware requirements for WYSIWYG Report Pentium or compatible processor 1 GHz or better Windows ME XP operating system 256 MB of RAM NTFS formatted hard drive Note You cannot install WYSIWYG on a hard drive that has been formatted in the FAT32 file system 400 MB of free disk space 1024 x 768 or better resolution free USB port Minimum hardware requirements for WYSIWYG Design Pentium or compatible processor 1GHz or better Windows ME XP operating system 256 MB of RAM NTFS formatted hard drive Note You c
347. st use the Position Manager to enter the new name 10 Click OK To insert a shortcut for truss objects Refer to To create a new shortcut on page 54 Using Assembly snap with truss Assembly snap assemble truss pieces together as you insert them ensuring proper structural assembly This is especially useful for long or complex structures made up of many individual pieces of truss As with all snap functions discussed in Snaps on page 107 you can select Assembly Snap in mid command or as a running snap type To select Assembly snap as a running snap type Enable Assembly snap before inserting truss to assemble and group all subsequently inserted pieces of truss To select Assembly snap in mid command Enable Assembly snap after inserting the first piece of truss to assemble selectively Assembly snap disengages after you place the next piece of truss assembling only the first truss or group of trusses with the second piece 176 wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode To use Assembly snap 1 From the Tools menu click Snap and then choose Assembly Tip You can also click the Assembly snap tool on the CAD Options toolbar gi Insert truss as described above To snap truss pieces together hover the cursor over the end of the piece of truss to which you want to attach the next piece and it will automatically snap into position Click to insert the piece of truss in the drawing Rotating truss When inse
348. storage area Layouts are created by arranging various CAD report image and other items on a defined paper size There are two default layouts included in the layouts shortcuts The Micro Layouts which is designed to print on an 8 5 x 11 piece of paper and the Big Layouts which is designed to be plotted on a 36 x 48 sheet of paper You can use either of these layouts as Is modify them to suit your needs or create new layouts from scratch Creating a new layout To create a new layout Click the Layouts shortcut tab Right click in the Layouts shortcut area and then choose New Layout Type the name of the new layout Click OK Result An empty layout is created A shortcut to your new layout is added to the Layouts shortcut bar A N Note By default empty layouts are set up to use 8 5 x 11 sheets of paper au wysiwyg gt March 2006 Presentation mode Working with layouts To modify layout settings 1 2 Select the layout for which you want to modify the settings From the Options menu choose View Options Tip You can also use the View Options tool on the Standard toolbar Eal Result The View Options dialog box is displayed View Options Ei Ea Presentation Name Micro Layout Background Colour lw GridOn Colour T Show placeholders only Paper Size a 36 5 17 0 lw Landscape Interval 100 125 Units Metic amp Imperial
349. sword protect your dongle select the No password check box 45 Installation configuration activation and registration 46 Release 16 0 wysiwyg 2 Chapter 4 WYSIWYG user interface All of the WYSIWYG levels use the same set of screens The user interface was designed to facilitate smooth transitions from mode to mode and to keep the data organized and easy to find In this chapter Navigation and screen set up 49 Shortcut bars 53 Toolbars 57 Status bar 64 Wireframe views 66 Shaded views 71 WYSIWYG Reference Guide WYSIWYG user interface Release 16 0 48 wysiwyg a March 2006 WYSIWYG user interface 2 Navigation and screen set up Welcome window When you start WYSIWYG the We come window appears The application level is shown in the upper right corner of the window File Options Help From the File menu you can choose to open an existing file or create a new file A list of template files are shown on the left and a list of recently saved files are shown on the right Click a file name to start working with WYSIWYG Modes The mode buttons located along the top of the user interface are used to access the different working modes available within the WYSIWYG levels Click the appropriate mode button to change modes CAD mode CAD mode is where you create your show drawings This includes drawing your venue set pieces lighting positions focus positions and lighting fixtures CAD m
350. t f On the Sca e tab click the option button for the units to be used tn the DWG DXF drawing 115 CAD mode Release 16 0 a To specify a custom unit of measurement select the Custom option button b Specify the mapping of the units of measurement to use in the exported file in the DXF Unit To boxes 7 Click OK Note The current type of the drawing will be used as the point of view in the exported 2D drawing To export to DWG DXF in 3D 1 From the File menu choose DWG DXF Export 2 In the xport dialog box navigate to the location where you want to save the exported file Ensure that the destination appears in the Save n box Export x Save ini My Documents b My Computer foe My Network Places File name I rititler Save as Ippe DwG ADADZDDD Cancel EE In the File name box type the name of the exported file 4 From the Save as type drop down box choose the exported file type There are a number of choices available for file type based on AutoCAD versions 5 Click Save Result The Se ect DWG DWX Settings dialog box appears Select DWG DVWX Settings x Scale Layer DWwf G ADF is in Meters Millimeters Feet Inches Custom hi DXxFuntTe fi Feet xf Cancel Note You cannot export a 3D drawing from WYSIWYG Report 6 On the Scale tab click the option button for the units to be used in the DWG DXF drawing To specify a custom unit
351. t use the Open command To open a recent file 1 From the File menu choose the file you want to open 2 If another show document is currently open you are prompted to save changes to that document before another show document is opened Only one show document may be open at a time Exit command Use the Exit command to exit WYSIWYG If you have made changes to your document but have not saved yet you will be prompted to save your changes before exiting To exit WYSI WYG 1 From the File menu choose Exit 2 When prompted to save changes to the current show document click Yes to save changes and exit WYSIWYG Note Click Wo to skip saving and exit WYSIWYG Click Cancel to skip saving and not exit WYSIWYG 82 wysiwyg gt March 2006 y a Options menu Introduction Managing your WYSIWYG document WYSIWYG offers you many options to customize the functionality of the software You can view and set options on the Options menu The Options menu is the same in all the modes Application Options window Application Options are general settings for the WYSIWYG software and apply to the entire application regardless of the show file that you are working on You might want to update these settings to display specific toolbars or indicate your file saving preferences for example To modify the application options 1 Application Options Compatibility Render Options General Fie Options Direct3D
352. t click the look and then select Jump to Viewing moving scenery You can use the Looks shortcut bar to guickly set up and run timed transitions between looks to simulate moving scenery When you create a look you can specify its fade time in seconds This is the amount of time that it takes to fade to this look when you click on it from another look in the Shortcut bar You can create multiple looks and specify different fade times for each of them Just as you can specify the fade time to watch the transition between lighting looks so too can you use the fade time to simulate moving scenery In the latter case however your Look must contain at least one movement axis with at least one object attached to it Note You can also combine Looks to simulate both moving lights and moving scenery in one fade Once you create the look and specify its fade time use the Moving Scenery Designer tool to customize the look by selecting the appropriate movement axis and the object s Starting position on it Then create a second look repeating the same procedure to set the object s starting position on either the same axis or a different one if there is more than one axis attached together When you switch from one look to the next you can see the object move from the Starting point of the first look to the starting point of the second look wysiwyg March 2006 Design mode To view moving scenery Note Before you
353. t the data item that you want to add to the layout and then click OK Result The selected data sheet referenced from Data mode appears within the placeholder as drawn To insert report items onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Report Tip You can also use the Report tool from the Layout Pres Insert toolbar wysiwyg gt March 2006 Presentation mode Click and drag a window placeholder on the page where you want the item to appear Result The Se ect Report to be referenced dialog box appears F Cancel Select Report to bijte i z Instrument Count Patch By Dimmer Gobos By Positon Purpose Cheat Sheet Channel Cheat Sheet Patch By Spot Circuit Hookup Patch By Chari Channel Schedule Lamp bulb Count Moving Light Court Colour Count Select the report item that you want to add to the layout and then click OK Result The selected report referenced from Pres mode appears within the placeholder as drawn Note If the Group By option has been set for a report the report cannot be added to a layout Setting the Group By option creates page breaks within the report and layouts do not support reports with page breaks For more information on this option refer to Report tab on page 263 To insert worksheet items onto the layout 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the Insert menu choose Worksheet Tip You can also use the Worksheet tool from the Layout Pres
354. t the object s starting position on either the same axis or a different one if there is more than one axis attached together When you switch from one look to the next you can see the object move from the starting point of the first look to the starting point of the second look within the time period that you define as the fade time To use the Moving Scenery tool After drawing movement axes and attaching objects to them you can use the Moving Scenery Designer tool to make the object move along each axis For details on drawing axes see Drawing movement axes on page 136 For information on attaching objects see To attach an object to a movement axis on page 138 Select the appropriate movement axis from this list Use these buttons to move the Use the Slider to move the ition ohjectto object along the selected inl a the path Type the object s position Click to apply the as a percentage of its total percentage that range of movement you have typed 242 wysiwyg amp March 2006 Design mode 1 In Design mode click the Moving Scenery Designer tool icon to open the tool Note You can also open the tool by clicking Design gt Moving Scenery tool From the drop down list select the appropriate movement axis To move the object on the axis you have three choices m Use the slider to move the object back and forth along the axis a Click Start or End to move the object im
355. t up in landscape format 285 Presentation mode 296 Release 16 0 Show page guides Select this check box if you want the printable outline to be displayed on each sheet of paper that comprises the layout The solid outline is the chosen printer s paper size and orientation Show page number Select this check box if you want the page numbers of the layout to be displayed in the center of each page The page numbers are for reference only and do not appear in the printed output Tile options Select one of the following option buttons m op Left Places the top left corner of the layout in the top left corner of the first page and then arranges the remaining pages accordingly a Center Places the center of the layout at the center of a page and then arranges the remaining pages accordingly a Split Center Places the center of the layout at the corner of four pages and then arranges the remaining pages accordingly Arranging items on layouts Objects can be inserted from the following categories basic shapes lines rectangles ellipses polygons and text images bitmap and Jpeg CAD items data items report items worksheet items includes the default Title Block legend items key items new plot items To insert a line onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Line Tip You can also use the Line tool from the Layout Pres Insert toolbar Click on the page where you want to start drawing the line
356. t whether you will use Media Access Control MAC addresses or Internet Protocol IP addresses 4 Click OK Backup looks You can record play back stop and clear backup looks from within WYSILink For more information on backup looks refer to your Sensor CEM User Manual To record a backup look 1 From the WYSILink menu choose Backup Looks and then choose Record Result The Record Backup Look dialog box is displayed Look Number il Nodes fe All Specific Dimmer Room OMe Mode Record f Snapshot of dimmers All manually set dimmers Cancel 2 In the Look Number box type a number for the backup look that you want to record Select the nodes for which you want to record the backup look Click Specify to select the node from the Node list A indicates that the backup look will be recorded for all connected nodes 4 When recording a backup look you have the option of recording the output level of all dimmers in the selected dimmer rack Snapshot of dimmers option or only those that have been set using the dimmer rack control panel A manually set dimmers option 5 When finished click OK WYSIWYG Reference Guide 341 WYSI Link Link mode Release 16 0 To play back a backup look 1 From the WYSILink menu choose Backup Looks and then choose Play Result The Play BackUp Look dialog box is displayed Look Number il Dimmer Room OMe Mode Cancel In the Look Number box type the n
357. tation mode is the only mode available in the WYSIWYG Viewer ensure that all relevant information is available in this mode before opening your file in the WYSIWYG Viewer All functionality except navigation and printing has been disabled Users cannot edit files nor can they insert items into a file For more information on preparing your file in Presentation mode refer to Chapter 9 Presentation mode You can download the WYSIWYG Viewer from the Cast Software Web site at www cast soft com wysiwyg WYSIWYG Reference Guide Chapter 6 CAD mode CAD mode is where you create your show drawings This includes drawing your venue set pieces lighting positions focus positions and lighting fixtures CAD mode operates like many other CAD programs so many of the concepts will be familiar to those who have used a computer aided drafting program before WYSIWYG adds features that are specific to the entertainment industry such as a comprehensive 3D library containing truss lighting equipment lighting accessories props musical instruments and various human figures In this chapter Layout tabs The CAD environment The Library Browser Drawing objects Editing objects CAD tools Hang structures Hanging and focusing fixtures Color gobos and accessories The Flight Case Rendering 101 102 119 123 142 162 171 179 202 208 211 99 CAD mode Release 16 0 March 2006 CAD mode y ae Layout tabs
358. te the library to find a suitable association gobo Note Generic association gobos are stored in the Proxy category Select the desired gobo Click Finish Result The custom gobo is placed in the gobo library as per the path specified in step 3 207 CAD mode Release 16 0 Ap The Flight Case Introduction The Flight Case is a special view used to hold unhung fixtures hang structures and focus positions created or inserted in Data mode but not yet placed on the drawing This is an ideal way to work from a set inventory as you can add all of your fixtures in Data mode and then click and drag the fixtures out of the Flight Case until you have exhausted your stock To open the Flight Case 1 From the Tools menu choose Flight Case Note You can open the Flight Case only in a wireframe view Tip The Flight Case layout is preconfigured with the flight case and a wireframe view Ss Unassigned Fixtures Focus Positions How objects get into the Flight Case As you enter fixtures in the Data mode spreadsheets they appear in the Flight Case under the Unassigned Fixtures branch When you type position names in the Position Manager the individual positions appear under the Position branch As you assign fixtures to those positions they will move from the Unassigned branch to under the proper position All fixtures that appear in the Flight Case are unhung fixtures which means they are not in your drawing regardless of wh
359. tep 1 54 lwyg 3 March 2006 WYSIWYG user interface To remove a shortcut 1 Right click the shortcut icon that you want to remove 2 _ Choose Delete Result You are prompted to confirm the deletion 3 Click OK to confirm Result The selected shortcut is deleted To rename a shortcut Right click the shortcut icon that you want to rename Choose Rename Type a new name for the shortcut Click OK Result The selected shortcut is renamed A Oo N To clone a shortcut 1 Right click the shortcut icon that you want to clone Choose Clone Shortcut Type a name for the copy Result The selected shortcut is cloned and the copy is added to the bottom of the list To arrange shortcuts You can arrange shortcuts in the shortcut bar area by using drag and drop functionality 1 Click the shortcut that you want to move 2 While holding down the mouse button press ALT to move the shortcut to the desired location 3 Release the mouse button to place the shortcut To set the display size for shortcuts Right click in open space on the appropriate shortcut bar and then choose either Icons or List depending on your current setup Result When you choose Icons all shortcuts are displayed as icons List will cause the shortcuts to be listed in the shortcut bar area thereby allowing you to fit more shortcuts in the area The settings are retained for all shortcuts Note To scroll to the bottom of a long list of shortcuts
360. the performance of real time simulation The following working modes are available in WYSIWYG Learn CAD DATA DESIGN PRES LIVE wysiwyg March 2006 The WYSIWYG suite of software products Refer to the respective chapters of this guide for detailed explanations about the features in each mode WYSIWYG Reference Guide 25 The WYSIWYG suite of software products Release 16 0 b WYSI WYG Network Introduction WYSIWYG Network allows you to run as many licenses of WYSIWYG Report Design and Perform as you want to over a network The workstations can be configured to run any combination of these products with the use of a single network dongle Note The following specifications are subject to change Software features Includes all the features of WYSIWYG Report Design and or Perform 2D and 3D plotting of set and lighting designs Multiple working views including front back sides top bottom and isometric Comprehensive 3D library of fixtures accessories truss colors gobos props and so on Fully integrated paperwork and CAD systems Accurate simulation of conventional and automated fixtures OpenGL technology for improved beam simulation Light emitting surfaces allow simulation of lasers neon LEDs projection screens and so on Easy hook up to consoles and other DMX sources Auto Focus protocol lets WYSIWYG send color and focus data to console Rendering generates a photo realistic picture of your cue or
361. the Point tab affect how the selected point is drawn The default point type used in a document is defined on the Object Defaults tab of Show Options To ignore the default setting click to clear the Use Document Defaults check box and then select the desired point type Properties o UU E a General Appearance Light Emission Paint Fixture Hang Structure Truss Point type C Do Cross Square Circle Gwe Aso _ Line tab Options on the Line tab affect how the selected line is drawn Properties i 2 x General Appearance Light Emission Line Fixture Hang Structure Truss Line Pattern P Closed F Spline Shade Options lw Shade Radius Joo 500 m Line Pattern Choose a line pattern for the selected lines Refer to Drawing lines on page 128 for an illustration of each type m Scale Type a value in this box to change the length and spacing of dots and dashes for the selected lines This value is applicable to center hidden or dot lines only m Closed Select this check box to quickly connect the first point of a multi segment line to the last point of that line WYSIWYG Reference Guide 151 CAD mode 152 Release 16 0 m Spline Select the Spline check box to transform a line into a spline or French curve Note You cannot change a line to a spline or French curve unless the selected line has more than two vertices m Shade Options select the Shade check
362. the Snap check box 6 In the nterva box type a new distance This is the measurement between fixture insertion points 7 Click OK Focusing fixtures You can focus the fixtures in your plot in three ways m You can click and drag the beam of a selected fixture m You can type the pan tilt and spin values for the fixture in its Properties box E You can assign a focus position to the fixture To focus using click and drag 1 Select the fixture that you want to focus Result The fixture s beam appears 2 Click on the beam and drag it to its new position When you are done release the mouse button Tips m You can also right click the fixture and then click Focus to drag the beam without having to hold the mouse button down continuously Click to finish when the beam is focused where you want it m Use the missing focus coordinate to set a value on the inactive axis oe wysiwyg gt gt March 2006 CAD mode Drawing focus positions Focus positions are m points at which fixtures can be focused 7 objects in the drawing To insert a focus position 1 From the Draw menu choose Focus Position Tip You can also click the Focus Position tool on the Draw toolbar to place focus positions Type a label for the focus position Move the mouse so that the intersection of the crosshairs is placed where you want the focus position Click to insert the focus position Repeat these steps to insert all focus positions
363. the current release by installing an in place update This update allows you to enhance a version of WYSIWYG that is a maximum of two releases back from the current release You do not have to uninstall the previous version of WYSIWYG to perform the update To install an in place update 1 WYSIWYG Reference Guide From the WYSIWYG Install window select nstall WYSIWYG Result If you have more than one release installed on your computer the following dialog box is displayed If you have only one release installed skip to step 4 WYSG Update InstallShield Wizard Qualifying Product s Detected Select the product to update Setup has detected the following product s on your computer that qualities for this update Update the product selected below Install Location Wwsiwyn C Program Fieste C Program Files wySTWw G 1 WYSIWYG C Program FilessW C Program Files Wwo SIWwy G2 Wor STW C Program Fiesse C Program Fieste r Sl wad wswyn C Program Fiese C Program Fieste r Siw rG 4 2 petala new copr af this product Ehocee thie option yrru maula rather metal the update as a separate product Ihe emanta Produce on pour computer will nat be updated maaleina hh O lt Back Cancel 33 Installation configuration activation and registration 34 5 6 Select Update the product selected below Release 16 0 From the list of WYSIWYG releases hig
364. the list use the Position Manager to enter the new name Repeat to draw more pipes Click OK To draw a pipe from start in interactive mode 1 2 174 From the Draw menu choose Pipe Set the height of the pipe that you are about to draw by pressing the TAB key and then entering a value for the missing coordinate if applicable Click to place the starting point of the pipe Drag it to the proper length and then click to place the end point of the pipe Notice that the pipe extends in one direction Right click on the pipe that you have just drawn and then click Properties Click the Hang Structure tab From the Name drop down list select the name for this new pipe If the name is not already in the list use the Position Manager to enter the new name Repeat to draw more pipes Click OK wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode Pipe properties Options on the Pipe tab affect the mode offset and dimensions of a pipe Properties 9 E 2 XI General Appearance Light Emission Hang Structure Fipe Pine Mode Start M Offset Type f Noma x CY C zZ Origin jon Length g g Trm Height 200 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Pipe mode Select the pipe mode for the specific pipe The available modes are a Start If enabled pipes are drawn from one end to the other When start mode is used offset is measured from the beginning of the pipe in a positive direction
365. the missing coordinate is set to 5 in a plan view all objects will be placed 5 off the floor X Y 5 until the missing coordinate is changed again Note that the missing coordinate is not a move tool objects are not moved to the missing coordinate value The missing coordinate only affects subsequent inserts Units of measurement Click this label to toggle between metric and imperial units of measurement Snap and Ortho The snap and ortho entry shows the status of these items If the indicator is black a Snap or ortho setting is active If the indicator is grey snap and ortho are not active WYSIWYG Reference Guide 65 WYSIWYG user interface y o t Release 16 0 Wireframe views 66 I ntroduction When you first create a new show document and enter CAD mode WYSIWYG defaults to the Wireframe view All drawing is done in Wireframe view Click the Quad tab to display three Wireframe views and a shaded view of your drawing Keyboard and mouse control To modify the point of view The arrow keys move you in their respective directions The PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys zoom you in and out You can also roll the middle mouse button up and down to zoom in and out The zoom action is centered on the mouse pointer rather than the center of the window In a 3D perspective view isometric or shaded the CTRL key in combination with any of the aforementioned keys rotates you around your drawing Holding down the middle
366. ther line m w Endpoint snap Aligns the placement of objects to the end point of another line Fixture insertion points are considered points It is therefore possible using the Point snap to align the placement of objects to fixtures snap to fixtures This is useful for dimensioning u 2 Centerpoint snap Aligns the placement of objects to the center point of circles arcs or cylinders u amp Assembly snap Use assembly snap to group multiple truss objects together as you insert them This ensures proper structural assembly Refer to Using Assembly snap with truss on page 176 for more details about truss assembly m s Pipe snap Constrains fixtures to placement on a pipe at a specific interval For more information refer to Pipe snap on page 181 amp Focus snap Orients one or more fixtures to a focus position When you choose this value you can also lock beam dragging to the incremental values of your choice as specified in the Pan and 7 lt boxes of the Draw Options tab the defaults are increments of 45 degrees for pan and increments of 10 degrees for tilt These are the values to which you want the fixture s beam to snap while manually dragging and focusing it For example if you set a value of 30 degrees when you drag the fixture s beam it will snap at 30 degrees 60 degrees 90 degrees and so on Note that any focus positions that you have set take precedence over the pan and tilt value
367. tio 1 Select the image item on the layout 2 From the Edit menu choose Item Properties ia Tip You can also click the tem Properties tool on the Layout Pres Edit toolbar WYSIWYG Reference Guide 295 Presentation mode 296 3 4 Worksheet Report and Spreadsheet items Click the mage tab Properties x General Image Image Image view Internal Lago Image File External ma lw Keep Aspect Ratio Cancel Select the Keep Aspect Ratio check box Release 16 0 Result When this box is checked the height versus width relationship of the original image is maintained regardless of how you resize the placeholder Worksheet Report and Spreadsheet items are inserted into your layout at a set scale 100 regardless of the paper size For readability purposes you can readjust this value To adjust the scale of Worksheet Report and Spreadsheet items 1 Select the worksheet report or spreadsheet item on the layout 2 From the Edit menu choose ltem Properties 3 Click the Worksheet Report or Soreadsheet tab as appropriate Properties kita General Report Report Print Options l Gridlines Scale 190 4 contents Legends Tip You can also click the tem Properties tool on the Layout Pres Edit toolbar a In the Sca e box type a percentage value to increase or decrease the size of the You may want to add a legend to your layout to provide a definition of the sym
368. tive across modes For example if you place the patch view in a popup frame it will remain visible even if the mode is changed from Data to CAD To place a view in a popup frame 1 Make the desired window active 2 From the Options menu choose Open in Popup Frame Tip Alternatively click the Frame Popup tool on the View toolbar aq Result A new window containing a copy of the selected view opens Popup frames a retain all the functionality of the original view so you can work in the popup view if you want to m are fully integrated with the remaining show document and are continually updated and vice versa u can be resized and moved to any location on the screen or across monitors WYSIWYG Reference Guide 51 WYSIWYG user interface Release 16 0 52 To display popup frames in full screen mode 1 Make the popup window active 2 Click the Full Screen button LJ Result The popup is expanded to fill the entire screen with no title bar visible Tip To return the popup frame to normal size press ESC To minimize a popup frame Double click the title bar of the popup window Result The title bar only is displayed Tip You can also click the Minimize button Multiple main frames A main frame is defined as the user interface for a given file WYSIWYG allows multiple occurrences of the main frame to be opened for a given file However at no time may more than one file be open Multiple main frames allow you to work
369. to move the objects For details on patching the axis to a DMX patch universe see To patch a movement axis to a DMX console device on page 225 When controlling the object s movement with a motion control system the patch indicates the ID on the motion control system that corresponds to the WYSIWYG axis ID the axis name and the position of the object on its path When connected to a system or to WYSIWYG s Motion Control Console you can watch the object s position change in patch view as it moves along its path Note Before performing this procedure the movement axis must already be linked to the patch universe For details see To attach a movement axis to a motion patch universe on page 138 WYSIWYG Reference Guide 225 Data mode 226 Release 16 0 In the shortcut area click the Patch tab Click the patch shortcut to which you have linked control of the moving object Result The motion control patch appears in the patch universe Open the console device or motion control system that you have connected to the motion control patch for example the Motion Control Console shown below MCConsole Tee w Linear Trawel Retational meters Made Update Axi Reape iE C Static Hew Axis bounce Delete Axis Forward Delete All t Backward Reset Duration c Pasition start and meter start Stop Save Logg If you are using WYSIWYG S Motion Control Console in the
370. to one another you cannot create a circular linking pattern For example you can link Axis A to Axis B and then link Axis B to Axis C but you cannot then link Axis C back to Axis A because this creates a circular link m You cannot attach fixtures to movement axes however you can attach pipes that hold fixtures to axes mee wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode Currently you cannot attach focus positions or groups containing focus positions to movement axes However in future releases you will be able to attach either of these items to movement axes You can draw axes either diagonally or straight along any direction of movement x Y or Z choosing between the following two main types of axes Linear Choose this type of axis to have an object move in a straight line along the path that you specify or in a series of straight segments all joined together at different vertices to create the path You can create a linear axis in any length or shape that you reduire as long as it comprises straight line segments you cannot draw a curved axis For example you could have a person walk across a stage in a zig zag path if desired When you draw this type of axis and then attach an object to it the distance from the axis to the object does not affect the object s movement the object will always follow the path of the axis regardless of where you have placed the axis or object By default all linear axes have an arrow on one end
371. toring Tool Release 16 0 ae wysiwyg gt gt Appendix B Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys help you to access commonly used commands more quickly In this appendix Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys 353 WYSIWYG Reference Guide 351 Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys Release 16 0 _ wysiwyg March 2006 Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys y Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys Keyboard shortcuts There are many keyboard shortcuts that can save you time when using WYSIWYG Standardized WYSIWYG keyboard shortcuts are defined below Keyboard shortcut Description F1 Help Shift F1 Displays context sensitive help F4 Repeat last command F5 Refresh current view F6 Relative or absolute coordinate toggle F8 Ortho toggle F9 Snap toggle F10 Crosshairs toggle F11 Interactive object creation toggle Space Repeat last command Ctrl A Select all Ctrl Shift A Select current layer Ctrl C Copy Ctrl F Find Ctrl G Group Ctrl H Replace Ctrl M Move Ctrl N New document Ctrl O Open document Ctrl P Print current view Ctrl R Rotate Ctrl S Save current document Ctrl U Ungroup Ctrl V Paste Ctrl X Cut WYSIWYG Reference Guide 353 Keyboard shortcuts and hot keys Keyboard shortcut Ctri Y Ctril Z Ctrl Click Ctri Drag Alt Drag Alt Arrow keys Alt Shift Arrow keys Alt Enter Arrow keys Ctri arrow keys Page Up Page Down Del ESC Hot keys Release 16 0 De
372. troduction Phone 44 0 1494 446000 Fax 44 0 1494 461024 E mail wysiwyg aclighting com Web site www aclighting com Germany ARCUS GmbH Obermeiers Feld 2 4 33104 Paderborn Germany Phone 49 0 5254 93069 O Fax 49 0 5254 93069 29 E mail support arcus lighting com Web site www arcus lighting com Japan Theater Engineering Phone 81 0 3 3706 5611 Fax 81 0 3 3706 6766 E mail info thea eng co jp Web site www thea eng co jp Support for WYSI WYG Perform Console Edition For assistance with a problem related to WYSIWYG Perform Console Edition contact the manufacturer of the console to which you are connected The console manufacturer is listed on the Welcome page that appears when you launch the application WYSIWYG Reference Guide 13 Introduction Release 16 0 Welcome to WYSIWYG I ntroduction The WYSIWYG suite of software products designed specifically for lighting professionals offers a range of solutions to meet the needs of designers assistants electricians console operators teachers and students WYSIWYG is the essential tool if you are looking to 7 increase creative freedom a save time win more contracts m cut costs Within the WYSIWYG suite of products any higher level product contains all the features of a lower level product WYSIWYG Report Design and Perform are the core products with WYSIYWG Report offering basic CAD and paperwork solutions and WYSIWYG Perf
373. ts occupy three dimensional space Different plot view types allow you to see and work with your drawing from different perspectives There are six types of plot views accessible from the CAD Options toolbar The following definitions identify the working axes X Y and Z and the missing coordinate for each plot type The missing coordinate can be defined as the axis for which a value cannot be set simply by clicking on the work space For details see The missing coordinate on page 104 Plan View Plan views display the plot from above looking down This is similar to a plan view drawing on paper In plan views the working axes are X and Y and the missing coordinate is Z f Left View Left views display the plot looking from the left side through the venue This is similar to a section on paper In left views the working axes are Y and Z and the missing coordinate is X Y Right View Right views display the plot looking from the right side through the venue This is similar to a section on paper In right views the working axes are Y and Z and the missing coordinate is X g Front View Front views display the plot looking from the front side through the venue This is similar to an elevation on paper In front views the working axes are X and Z and the missing coordinate is Y aa Back View Back views display the plot looking from the back side through the venue This is similar to an elevation on paper In back views the working a
374. ttings to determine how long messages are held in the Message Log and to delete messages currently in the Message Log m Use the Show settings to switch between displaying all messages Pending and Cleared or only Pending messages m Use the Auto Save settings to determine how often the Message Log is backed up to disk wysiwyg gt March 2006 WYSI Link Link mode m Use the notification settings to set up how you want to be notified of new message arrival You can choose to have a notification box pop up and or have a sound play as new messages arrive Display Log Options tab The display log options affect how columns are ordered and how the messages are sorted To set column visibility and order 1 Click the Display Log Options tool on the Message Log Options toolbar Ea 2 Click the Display Log Options tab Click the Column Manager tab 2x Display Log Options Message Log Options Filter Sot Column Manager Column visibility and order list w NMessageData I Severity MessageData I Category MessageData I Pending MessageData 1 Timestamp MessageData I Msg Class MessageData 1 Msg_ID MessageData I Message_Text MessageData 1 Dimmer MessageData I Rack SourceData I Mode_ Type SourceData I IP_Address SourceData 1 MAC_Address 1 Saurece Data Rack B Down Up O O IS SJ IS fs is S 4 Click the name of the column that you want to move and then click Down or Up to
375. ttings when you start a new show file Error conditions and the appearance of certain objects in your show file are also specified in Show Options To open the Show Options dialog box from the Options menu click Show Options Document Summary tab Options on the Document Summary tab affect the document information such as name of the person who created the document and the name of the person who last modified the document The date stamps are not editable but will track the creation and modification dates of the file Show Options x Object Settings Report Data Error Regional Settings Document Summary Show Info Object Defaults Created By Thursday September 12 2002 11271 Last Modified By New Wig Saturday September 14 2002 8 1 34 Put your comments here Comments Colour Ja Show Info tab Options on the Show nfo tab affect the venue show Designer and Assistant s names that are displayed in your show document Show Options E x Object Settings Report Data Error Regional Settings Document Summary Show Info Object Defaults Venue PO Show iC Designer Po Assistant PO WYSIWYG Reference Guide 89 90 Managing your WYSIWYG document Release 16 0 Object Defaults tab Options on the Object Defaults tab affect the default settings for the regional profile The profile that you choose determines items such as the type of bulb to use in a particular fixture This also set
376. ture Adjustment Options Render Wizard Step 7 Picture Adjustment Options Picture Adjustments Saturation Brightness lt Back Finish Add Shortcut ZOOMOFF 505 00x75 Li Options in Step 7 affect the quality of your final image a Saturation This is comparable to the exposure on a camera it determines which pixels are represented as pure white b Brightness This slider adjusts all pixels equally Step 8 Antialiasing Options li Render Wizard Full Render ni x Step 8 Antialiasing Options m Antialiasing Options C None Lysftwdbyfb Finish Add Shortcut Ready ZOOMOFF 505 100x75 7 Options in Step 8 affect the antialiasing settings Antialiasing is a method of smoothing out and sharpening rough or jagged edges of images to produce a more polished result This method subsamples the pixel area and averages the results of neighboring samples to reduce the areas of high contrast edges a Antialiasing Options Choose how you want edges to appear in your final rendering The Fast method samples the pixels quickly but does not produce the highest quality 297 Design mode 299 Release 16 0 When you click Finish the real rendering takes place Based on the options that you selected and the complexity of the scenery and lighting it may take some time to compute You can minimize the window and continue working
377. u hang a fixture on a pipe you cannot drag it onto a mountable yoke To remove a fixture from a mountable yoke right click the fixture and then select Remove Accessory In the resulting tree menu you can either remove the accessory from the fixture or remove the fixture from the mountable yoke If you insert a fixture onto a yoke by using a shortcut and then you insert another fixture onto a pipe using the same shortcut when you right click the option Finish Placing Accessories appears instead of Finish Placing Fixtures When you insert a fixture on a mountable yoke in CAD mode you can no longer focus the beam by dragging it in CAD mode Additionally the beam direction might not point straight down To insert an accessory o fF Oo N Open the Library Browser Click on the Accessory section tool Find the accessory that you want to insert Double click the accessory name Click on the fixtures to insert the accessory Tips To place an accessory on a selected fixture right click on the fixture and then click Add Accessory Use the browser to find the accessory you want to insert Follow this procedure in Data mode and only those accessories that can be applied to the selected fixture will be available To place an accessory on a group of selected fixtures use the Accessory library With the fixtures selected find the accessory in the Library Browser Right click on the accessory name and then click Insert
378. umber of the backup look that you want to play Select the nodes for which you want to play the backup look Click Specify to select the node from the Node list A indicates that the backup look will be played for all connected nodes 4 When finished click OK To stop a playback look 1 From the WYSILink menu choose Backup Looks and then choose Stop Result The Stop Active Backup Look dialog box is displayed Dimmer Room Okis Mode Cancel In the Look Number box type the number of the backup look that you want to stop Select the nodes for which you want to stop the backup look Click Specify to select the node from the Node list A indicates that the backup look will be stopped for all connected nodes 4 When finished click OK To clear a backup look Perform this procedure if you want to permanently erase a backup look from a dimmer rack 342 wysiwyg March 2006 WYS I Link Link mode 1 From the WYSILink menu choose Backup Looks and then choose Clear Result The Se ect BackUp Look to Clear dialog box is displayed Select BackUp Look to Clear ajx Look Number il Dimmer Room OMe Node Cancel In the Look Number box type the number of the backup look that you want to clear Select the nodes for which you want to clear the backup look Click Spec fy to select the node from the Node list A indicates that the backup look will be cleared for all connected nodes 4 When finished clic
379. und is selected Click OK In the Video Manager ensure that the status of the video source is Connected If it is not then press Connect Tip To ensure that the video source is connected to the console every time you start WYSIWYG click to select the check box beside Connect on load 8 Click OK to save your changes and close the Video Manager Notes 1 For details on patching the video control in Data mode see To patch the control of a video source on page 224 2 For details on using the Video Designer Tool to play the video in Design mode see To use the Video tool on page 241 3 For details on using a console device to control the video in Live mode see To control a DMX patched video source with a console on page 316 Drawing movement axes For every movement axis that you draw in CAD mode you can attach one or more objects to it and then define the object s position along the axis You can attach objects such as risers library objects or custom objects that you have drawn To be able to move an object in different planes you can attach multiple movement axes to one another Simply attach the object to one of the axes and then control the object s movement along any of the axes by selecting it with the Moving Scenery Designer tool This feature is useful for example if you have a set piece that needs to be able to move in both a vertical and horizontal motion Notes m When attaching axes
380. update concepts 1 Select the set of fixtures that you want to include in the concept 2 Right click on the Concept shortcut that you want to update and then choose Update Result The Concept shortcut is modified to include only the fixtures that you selected Working with concepts When you select a Concept shortcut any currently selected objects are deselected and the Concept set is selected instead If you press the CTRL key while selecting concepts the concept is added to the current selection set If you press the CTRL and SHIFT keys while selecting concepts the concept is removed from the current selection set 244 wysiwyg gt March 2006 Design mode Notes 1 Ina Concept shortcut multi cell fixtures such as cyc lights can be selected either by cell or fixture If the concept was created in Design mode using cells the entire fixture is selected in the other modes If the concept was created using fixtures all cells are selected when in Design mode 2 When you replace a multi cell fixture that is selected by circuit with a different multi cell fixture that has a different number of circuits the replacement fixture is selected by fixture and not by circuit 3 When you delete a fixture the fixture is removed from all concepts that include that fixture 4 When you replace a fixture using the Replace Fixtures menu option any concepts referring to that fixture are updated to refer to the fixture replacem
381. ure or fixtures to open a menu with the following Autofocus commands WYSIWYG Reference Guide At Level and Focus Sets the intensity of the selected lights on the connected Autofocus compatible console to the level last specified by the Intensity command and then launches the Focus command Focus When you click in a Wireframe view the selected automated fixtures will focus if they can to that point Click and drag to position them in real time Change the missing focus coordinate to alter the height at which you want to focus the fixtures Intensity Reveals a sub menu where you can specify the level to set the intensity for the selected fixtures The first option in the list is the last level you specified and by default is set to Full You can also set the level to half and out Iris Sets the iris to either tight or wide There is also a Specify option where you can set the iris to any percentage The Specify value is retained for the session Color Fixtures that can mix color can be directed to either a palette color or an approximation of a manufacturer s gel color You can specify and save palette colors using the custom color creator or Palette shortcuts You can repeat Autofocus commands by touching the Space bar This way you can select one fixture adjust it select another and then press the Space bar to perform the same operation repeatedly Alter the missing focus coordinate to focus fixtures at different heights When fo
382. ures the video frame that was showing when it processed the screen information a If the video control is patched and DMX connected in Live Mode then you will not be able to control the video using any of the Video Designer Tool commands in Design mode Video sources can only be controlled by a designer tool when the DMX source is disconnected therefore you must first disconnect the applicable console device from Live Mode before using any of the Video Designer Tool commands To draw a screen 1 From the Draw menu click Screen 2 In the appropriate boxes type the width and height of the screen or accept the default width of 8 feet and height of 6 feet 3 To configure the image that will appear on the screen click the appropriate option button a To leave the screen blank click the Blank Screen option button a To show a Static image on the screen click the mage File option button and then click Browse to locate the graphic The image must be saved in either bitmap or JPEG format To attach a video source to the screen click the Video Source option button and then choose the video source from the drop down box or click Create New to configure a new video source with the Video Manager For details on creating a new video source see To configure a new video source for streaming video below 4 Click OK To configure a new video source for streaming video To create a new video source for streaming video you
383. use either the scroll button on your mouse or the scroll bar along the side of the shortcut bar To use a shortcut Click the shortcut icon As with all objects in WYSIWYG all shortcuts have properties that affect the object being inserted the view or tool or the navigation method WYSIWYG Reference Guide 55 WYSIWYG user interface Release 16 0 To modify a shortcut s properties 1 2 3 4 56 Right click the shortcut icon that you want to modify Choose Properties Result The properties dialog box is displayed The settings modified here affect the object view tool or navigation destination of the selected shortcut An example of the Navigation Shortcut Properties dialog box is shown below however the shortcut properties window varies based on the type of shortcut that you select Navigation Shortcut Prope FI Navigation Hame CAD w ireframel Apply Mode Layout Tab Toolbars Designer Tools Popup Windows Set as Default In the Name box type the new name of the shortcut To open the shortcut in a pop up frame click the Pop Up Window check box For more information on popup frames refer to Popup frames on page 51 wysiwyg March 2006 WYSIWYG user interface b oe Toolbars The menu bar The menu bar is located within the WYSIWYG user interface below the mode buttons and above the work area The available menus change when moving from mode to mode The in
384. use the ipse tool from the Layout Pres Insert toolbar Click on the page at the starting point of the ellipse and holding the mouse button down drag out the shape of the ellipse Release the mouse button when you have the desired shape Click anywhere in the drawing to finish placing the ellipse Result The ellipse is placed on the layout To insert a polygon onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Polygon Tip You can also use the Polygon tool from the Layout Pres Insert toolbar m Click on the page at the starting point of the polygon and holding the mouse button down drag out the shape of the polygon Release the mouse button when you have the desired shape Click anywhere in the drawing to finish placing the polygon Result The polygon is placed on the layout To insert text onto the layout 1 From the Insert menu choose Text Tip You can also use the 7ext tool from the Layout Pres Insert toolbar T Click on the page at the starting point of the text box and holding the mouse button down drag out the shape of the box Release the mouse button when you have the desired shape Click anywhere in the drawing to finish placing the box Result The text box is placed on the layout To type text in the new box double click the box and then delete the default text Type your custom text Click anywhere in the drawing to finish adding the text To insert image items onto the layout 1 From the
385. use the Video Manager There are a couple of ways of opening the Video Manager for example from the New Screen window or from the Tools menu the following procedure lists one possible way Note You can only incorporate live video If you have WYSIWYG Perform you cannot select a video from a live capture device If you have WYSIWYG Design WYSIWYG Reference Guide 135 CAD mode Release 16 0 1 Click Tools gt Video Manager 2 Click New Result The Video Source window opens 3 In the Name box type a descriptive name for the video a To play a video from a file click the Video File option button and then click Browse to locate the file To capture a live video stream from an external source such as a web cam or a video capture device that is attached to your computer click Video Capture and then use the drop down arrow to select the appropriate device This option is available only if you have WYSIWYG Perform installed Note The video capture device must already be configured on your computer and must be using WDM drivers 4 To play the video with a DMX control click DMX Patch and then use the drop down arrow to select the appropriate patch universe to control the video In the box to the right of the drop down list type the starting DMX address Note You must have a named patch already configured on your computer 5 To mute the sound of the video click Mute to play the sound of the video ensure that Play So
386. vailable in WYSIWYG Perform You must be connected to a compatible console for this feature to be enabled All ports for which you want the patch information to be transferred must be properly bound Only the hookup information in patch universes bound to the console s outputs will transfer The patch information is transferred over Ethernet To perform an AutoPatch 1 Connect to the console as described in To connect to a console on page 314 2 From the Live menu choose AutoPatch Result The AutoPatch dialog opens AutoPatch x Clear Patch Send Patch Close 3 Click Send Patch Result WYSIWYG assembles the patch information for all the fixtures in the plot and then attempts to send the relevant patch information to each connected AutoPatch capable device Notes m A fixture s patch information is transmitted to a console only if the following conditions are met a the fixture has at least one part that is patched to a patch universe m the patch universe is bound to the console m the console is connected to WYSIWYG through the Device Manager a Some fixtures might have parts patched to two or more different consoles In this situation both consoles will receive the patch information for that fixture but the port numbers given for each part will be set appropriately for each console a Itis recommended that you click C ear Patch prior to sending the patch to clear out the existing patch 4 Click C ose
387. validation code Note You can postpone registration for a period of up to 15 days after installation 40 wysiwyg March 2006 WYSIWYG Reference Guide Installation configuration activation and registration To register later click Register Later You must register and obtain a Registration Validation Code to continue using the product after this time It is recommended that you register as soon as possible to avoid any restrictions on using the product You can register by phone online fax or e mall To register by phone click Phone and then proceed to step 3 To register by any of the other methods select the appropriate button and follow the instructions as prompted When you have obtained your validation code click have my validation code and then proceed to step 4 If you have chosen to register by phone the Register by Phone dialog box is displayed Register by Phone Please call any one of the phone numbers below with your Registration Request Code While you are on the phone you will be given a 11 digit Registration Validation Code Simply enter this in the space provided and click the Register button 87r 989 2278 or 416 597 2278 Americas 44 011494 446000 United Kingdom 49 Dl 5254 930 69 0 Germany 03 37065611 Japan Serial Code for pour reference xG Falk Registration Request Code GREY SEBCOM Registration Validation Code Example GEGHS6y N MF Cancel
388. variables and a new menu and toolbar for formatting text Report headings editor File Edit Format Help 1127 2003 11 26 Veo boy s MD esigner gt i Ved ssistant s nHeadings n SeLata e From the Format menu use the alignment font border edit and color controls to customize the heading text Modify or add variables as reguired Save your changes and close the window Result You are prompted to apply the headinos to all the reports in the document Click Yes to indicate that all reports will be modified Click Wo to change only the chosen report wysiwyg March 2006 Using variables in reports Presentation mode Variables can be used in reports and worksheets to ensure that the same type of information is displayed in each report These variables are found in the report headings of each report and can be globally shared among all the reports in your document The variables you can use and the information they store are described in the following table Variable Title Venue Designer Show Assistant9o Headings Data Scene Group WYSIWYG Reference Guide Definition The name of the report The venue for the show The lighting designer for the show The name of the show The assistant lighting designer for the show The column headings that comprise the report The data that comprises the report The scene chosen for the report
389. ver again at the beginning in a continuous forward loop Backward Select this option if you want the object to move backwards along the axis from finish to start and then begin over again in a continuous backwards loop Duration box If you have chosen any moving Mode value that is any value except Static you can specify the length of time in seconds over which you want the full range of motion to take place The larger the number you type in this box the slower the object moves Position slider For all moving modes bounce forward backward the slider indicates the position of the object when the console is sending data to WYSIWYG For the static mode while the console is started drag the slider to to adjust the position of the object on its axis The position value changes in the box in the left pane m Position box While the console is sending data to WYSIWYG for all moving modes this box shows the progress of the object s movement along its axis for the axes in the static mode you can type the precise location of the object on the axis Click Update Axis to view your new settings Click Save to save the changes Note If you make any changes to the axis settings and save the changes you can revert to the previous settings by clicking Load Connecting with a Wyg it 2 WYG it 2 is Cast Software s DMX interface device You reguire a DMX interface to connect a DMX console to WYSIWYG Each WYG it 2 has 2 DMX i
390. white box appears at the insertion point and the lines of the object become dotted Fixtures that are selected are filled in green and their beams can be set to either on or off Use the following table to identify the selection method for objects Desired action Selection method Select a single object a Click on the object Select multiple objects Press and hold CTRL while clicking on the desired objects a Draw a box from left to right to select all objects fully within the box a Draw a box from right to left to select all objects fully within the box as well as the objects partially contained in the box Select all the objects on the a Press and hold CTRL SHIFT and type A current layer or use the Select Current Layer tool on the Selection toolbar 8 Select all the objects on the Press and hold CTRL and type A or use screen the Se ect Alltool on the Se ection toolbar HLL Select all the objects on one or From the Edit menu choose Select more layers Special and then choose Specify layers to select You can also use the Specify Layers tool on the Se ection toolbar E To select multiple layers press and hold CTRL while selecting the layers Set beam display for selected am Set the Show beams for selected fixtures fixtures option For more information on this option refer to the Show Details tab on page 70 Undo Redo If you discover that you have made an error while editing an object you c
391. wser Repeat steps 2 3 to view the properties of multiple objects You may want to open the properties of different objects to compare data such as photometric information Tips m You can also hold the ALT key and double click on the object name m To view library objects without opening property windows browse the library using the shortcut bar To do this select the shortcut bar for the type of object you want to view Right click in the shortcut bar and then choose New lt library item gt The Library Selection dialog box opens with a viewing pane included To insert objects from the library 1 Open the Library Browser Navigate to the desired object Click the nsert tool at the top of the Library Browser Tip You can also double click on the object name Note Fixtures may only be placed on hang structures Please refer to Hanging and focusing fixtures on page 179 for more information wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode 4 Click in your drawing to insert the object 5 Click away from the object to deselect it To create a shortcut for a library object In the Wireframe and Ouad views you can create shortcuts for freguently used objects Shortcuts are tools found on the various shortcut bars to the left of the working area Clicking a shortcut for an object is the same as finding the object in the Library Browser and using the nsert command 1 Open the Library Browser Navigate to the desired object C
392. ww Venue v v Delete Get IELITTETIL Scenes i Select All UnSelect Al Cancel To create a new layer click New Type a new name for your layer for example Pipes and then click OK To change the color of the layer click Co or Select It is recommended that you select different colors for each layer so as to easily identify the layers on the plot To make a layer and all objects on the layer visible on the plot and in shaded views select the Visible check box If not selected the layer is not visible and is not therefore editable To make a layer and all objects on the layer editable on the plot and in shaded views select the Editable check box If not selected the layer is not editable and is not therefore visible Tip You might want to deselect a layer when you are finished working with it to avoid possible errors while working on other parts of the plot This is similar to freezing in Auto CAD To view and modify the scenes in which a layer is included select a layer and then click Scenes For details see Scenes on page 160 To view the properties of a layer for example name color and inventory of objects drawn on the layer click Properties For more information on these properties refer to Layer properties on page 158 157 CAD mode Release 16 0 158 9 Before closing the dialog set your current layer by highlighting it and then clicking Set Current The
393. wyslwyn 500 1000 2000 or 5000 The software that you are running naw iz one of the new wys lwyn suite of products wyslwy Report Wwyslwyn Design wyslwyn Perform To use this new software ynu need to purchase an upgrade This can be done through your WYS IW rG dealer or over the phone from one of these numbers 1 416 597 2278 International 87r 989 2278 North America IF ynu have already done this enter your 11 digit upgrade code here Upgrade Code Example GEGHXEYNMXF Serial Code MG730K ee for pour reference The code that you type in this dialog enables your old dongle to function with the new version of WYSIWYG Type your upgrade code and then click Upgrade Proceed to To register WYSIWYG below To register WYSI WYG 1 Once you have gone through the Product Configuration Wizard and you have successfully activated your product the Register window appears prompting you to register your software EE n IiI xj Flease take a momentto register this copy of Wir SAYO ou can use an unregistered W SIW Y G far 15 days after installation of which you have this many days left 11 devs left to use Wo SIA YG unregistered Register Later Step 1 Registration Submit your registration information in one of these ways re ebail Fhone r bap 2 Validation When you have registered in Step 1 you will be given a registration validation code to be entered into Y S YG have my
394. x is displayed Node Manager Curent Node Name Colour IP Address Online 10 101 1 14 10 101 1 14 Discover 100 101 130 101 100 101 130 101 BEE 10 101 50 103 10 101 50 103 Colour Select 10 101 50 106 Booth Input DMX No Catwalk DMX Node Dimmer Room DHX ETC Video Node ETCNet2ContigEditor Expression 3 800 Untitled Emphasis C 10 101 50 106 10 101 50 107 10 101 50 104 10 101 50 105 10 101 50 102 10 101 1 142 10 101 45 101 10 101 130 101 a n ME S lt S S808 08 lt 2 Click the Discover button to view the nodes that are currently online and to set a color for the display of channels that are owned by each node 3 To set the color for a node double click the color box to the right of the node s name or click the node s name and then click Co or Select 4 To remove an entry from the list click Hide You can use the Node Manager to reconcile the configurations between your show document and the actual ETCNet2 Nodes that are connected to your ETCNet2 network 340 wysiwyg March 2006 WYSI Link Link mode To reconcile nodes 1 In the Node Manager dialog box click Reconcile Result The Reconcile Options dialog box is displayed Selecter Using Both MAC and IP addre Only MAC addres Only IP address i Cancel 2 Select whether you want to reconcile all nodes or only currently selected nodes Use CTRL Click to select multiple nodes in the Node Manager 3 Selec
395. xes are X and Z and the missing coordinate is Y i I sometric View An Isometric view is a 3D perspective drawing Despite this you are still limited to two working axes In isometric views the working axes and the missing coordinate are dependent on the workplane selected The workplanes available are E P plan E side 7 Sg front a wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode If a plan workplane is selected the working axes are X and Y and the missing coordinate is Z If a side workplane is selected the working axes are Y and Z and the missing coordinate is X If a front workplane is selected the working axes are X and Z and the missing coordinate is Y The crosshairs of your cursor change to reflect the selected workplane Note Isometric views are not available in WYSIWYG Report Ortho Ortho mode constrains movement and drawing to a direction parallel to the specified axis When ortho mode is inactive objects can be drawn or moved in any direction on the workplane You can draw diagonal lines or move objects anywhere in the working area Y 2 You can activate ortho at any time by clicking the ortho tools on the CAD Options toolbar or by right clicking the Ortho label on the status bar You can also press F8 on the keyboard or double click the Ortho label on the status bar to toggle your last recorded ortho setting on or off Notes m The plot type determines the axes of movement XY for plan views YZ for side v
396. xt This is similar to selecting a font size The default value is 2 O Click on the drawing to place the text label Note a You cannot change the font for text labels in CAD mode a The insertion point for the text label is at the intersection of the crosshairs To set alignment for a text label Oo Ff o N Select the text label for which you want to change the justification Right click and then choose Properties Click the Text Label tab Set the horizontal and vertical justification as desired Select the Align to View check box to ensure the text label is legible in all view types plan left right front back and isometric Click OK Result The text label is relocated around the insertion point based on the options selected wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode Drawing dimension lines Dimension lines are 2D objects They have a start and end point and measure and display the distance covered based on the measurement mode selected The measurement modes available are X Y XY XZ YZ and XYZ The dimension will only be visible in one view type The view type is set when the dimension is drawn and is dependent on the plot type and workplane in which the dimension is drawn To draw a dimension 1 From the Draw menu choose Dimension Tip You can also click the Dimension tool on the Draw toolbar rf Click on the drawing to set the dimension start point Right click to set the measurement mode Click o
397. xture data is defined on the Show Details tab in User Options For more information on this option refer to Show Details tab on page 70 Moving the page You can move the page around to capture the parts of the schematic that you want plotted or printed To move the page 1 Select the plot that you want to adjust 2 Right click and choose Move Page Result A hand similar to the Pan tool is displayed 3 Hold down the left mouse button and drag to move the page until the area of the schematic that you want on the page is contained within 4 When you are finished right click and select Finish Move Page Objects in New Plots Objects that are contained in the drawing in CAD mode are transposed to the New Plot representation This representation is a 2D presentation of the drawing and as such certain objects are displayed differently than they are in the 3D CAD mode drawing A specific number of objects are used to represent the objects in the CAD drawing These objects are listed in the following table Object in CAD mode Resulting object in New Plots Fixtures Representative symbols Accessories Representative symbols Riser Riser wysiwyg gt March 2006 Presentation mode Object in CAD mode Resulting object in New Plots Text Text Arc Arc Ellipse Ellipse Circle Circle Notes E Beams are not represented in the New Plots view H Some objects may not be visible if they are on a layer that is not in the current
398. y Result The Enter new Key name dialog box is displayed Type a name for the key and then click OK Result The key shortcut is stored in the shortcut bar and the Key Wizard opens wysiwyg March 2006 Presentation mode Step 1 Key Symbol Selection Key Symbol Selection Keyl Specify a 20 symbol for this fixture Accessories Title Te Cancel Options in Step 1 allow you to choose the symbol that will represent the fixture or accessory in the key m List of symbols Select the symbols you want to use You can choose up to one fixture symbol and one accessories symbol The symbols available in this list are the default WYSIWYG symbols for each fixture or accessory type When you selecting a symbol it appears in the preview window to the right m Title Select the Display Title check box if you want the name of the symbol to be displayed in the key Type a title in the 7 t e box if you want a title other than the default name to be displayed H Change Symbol Enables you to choose a different symbol from the more extensive symbols library which includes the USITT standards among others Follow the steps in Changing Symbols to perform the modifications u Delete Symbol Click this button to remove the selected symbol from the preview window Changing symbols From the list of items in the window to the right of the preview window select the symbol To change the symbol click the Chang
399. you are having system problems and need to get the Message Log to Cast Software Technical Services To export the Message Log 1 Click the xport Message Log tool on the Message Log Options toolbar an 2 Use the browser to set the name and destination of the exported file and then click Save Note The file must have the log extension Printing the Message Log To print the message log From the File menu choose Print Tip You can also use the Print tool on the Message Log Options toolbar To print preview the message log From the File menu choose Print Preview Tip You can also use the Print Preview tool on the Message Log Options toolbar ES WYSIWYG Reference Guide 337 WYS Link Link mode Release 16 0 y ETCLink functions I ntroduction WYSI Link enables you to use many of the ETCLink features commonly found on ETC consoles These features allow you to get information about your Sensor dimming system You can access information about individual dimmers and about entire dimmer racks You can also record dimmer loads and record and playback backup looks from within WYSI Link The WYS I Link toolbar The WYSILink toolbar provides guick access to the ETCLink functions described below Current device Node manager Wor SlLink E Monitor All t amp l ge About ay dimmer About HI rack Error Mode toggles between the currently selected node and all connected nodes Node Selection enables
400. you click and drag to set the dimensions of the cylinder To draw a cylinder 1 From the Draw menu choose Cylinder Tip You can also click the Cylinder tool on the Draw toolbar a In the Height box type the height for the cylinder The default value is 8 0 In the Width box type the width for the cylinder The default value is 8 0 Click OK Result The cylinder is attached to the cursor 5 Drag the new cylinder to its position and then click to place the object in the drawing ie wysiwyg March 2006 CAD mode To draw a cylinder in interactive mode Note To turn interactive mode on click the Interactive Mode button on the toolbar From the Draw menu choose Cylinder Click to place the center of the bottom surface of the cylinder Click to set the radius for the cylinder In the dialog box that opens type the desired height or length for the cylinder Click OK Oo Ff o N e Drawing spheres Spheres are solid 3D circular or oval objects There are two ways in which you can draw spheres m non interactive mode in which you type the exact horizontal and vertical diameter of the sphere m interactive mode in which you click and drag to set the dimensions of the sphere To draw a sphere in non interactive mode 1 From the Draw menu choose Sphere Tip You can also click the Sphere tool on the Draw toolbar amp 2 In the Horizontal Diameter box type the horizontal diameter for the sphere The default value i
401. ysiwyg March 2006 10 11 12 13 CAD mode Click on the slot you wish to edit Click nsert Color or nsert Gobo or nsert Prism Make sure if you are inserting different types of media into the same list that this is actually possible for that fixture or accessory Click on the item you want to insert and then click Se ect Repeat for the remaining slots To reorder the items in the slots click on the slot and then click Up or Down to move that item to a new position To erase a color or gobo selection from a slot click Remove The slot returns to the default selection of OPEN Click C ose when you are done creating lists Tip It is recommended to clone the stock wheel or list associated with the fixture s and edit the cloned list The cloned list inherits the properties of the original list To clone a stock color gobo list Oo Ff o N From the Library menu choose Edit Color Gobo Lists In the Show section click Stock Scroll to find the list you want to clone Click Clone Type a name for the cloned list and then click OK Result The cloned list appears in the custom lists To rename a color gobo list o mB Oo N From the Library menu choose Edit Color Gobo Lists In the Show section click Custom Select the color gobo list that you want to rename Click Rename Type the new name for the list and then click OK Result The list is renamed To delete a color gobo list A GQ N

Reference Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents